HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 14-00352 - BYU-I Science & Technology Building Vol 4ARCHITFCTURE PLANNING INTERIORS
649 E SOUTH TEMPLE • SLC, UT 84102 WALLY COOPER: 801.635.6882
151 N RIDGE AVE STE 113 • IDAHO FALLS, ID 83402 - 208.524.4621
vrzlwcrsn us. Com
-�(.— S 125 N GARF ELD E O I
POCA EL IDAHO -208, 32 235, P.A.
J www ihsoichltects coin
BYU
IYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
/olume 4
'roject Manual
ovember 7, 2014
ONFORMED SET
Divisions 26-33
RSA Project# 11-026.03
fU Idaho Approvals
r.
.. i
•:''�"eTf i ,�w:.in .w niwr�� ai�..o.
Z�2i�r{
r ,
�-
vu[\,Mm.. A[�x.I1mW O45bne Cdl,p W..
U.p
iw,MxbnY"6..htW
yW
Cwu,w�:a
�
� —Uriu'
e 4:4r:.6:rw Anenm
r.
iYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Division Section Title Pages
VOLUME4
Facility Services Subgroup Continued
DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL
260501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260503' EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
260513 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
260519 LINE -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260550 LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS
260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
260943 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
260950 POWER MONITORING SYSTEM
261219 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS
262200 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262417 PANELBOARDS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263353 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263560 TVSS FOR PANELBOARDS
263565 TVSS FOR SWITCHBOARDS INTEGRATED
265100 LIGHTING
266100 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
266210 DATA SYSTEM CABLING
BYU IDAHO TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING STANDARD 24
266411 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
DIVISION 27 — AUDIO 1 VIDEO SYSTEMS
275115 AUDIO SYSTEMS
275117 VIDEO SYSTEMS
Division Section Title Pages
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
ABLE OF CONTENTS
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK
310516
EARTHWORK
311000
SITE CLEARING
312000
EARTH MOVING
312333
TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
315000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321216
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
321300
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
321313
CONCRETE PAVING
321373
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALERS
321613
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
328400
IRRIGATION
329000
PLANTING
329119
FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
329223
SODDING
DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES
330500
EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER
330500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
330513
MANHOLES
330660
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER
331113
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
333113
FACILITY SANITARY SEWER
334100
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
334112
STORM DRAIN
334600
SUBDRAINAGE
336310
STEAM AND CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS AND REVISIONS
END VOLUME 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
wnwimeu oe[ I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 0501 -COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General electrical system requirements and procedures.
2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract
Documents.
3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections.
4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3
Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements.
A. Product Data:
1. Provide following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog Sheets.
b. Assembly details or dimension drawings.
C. Installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number.
e. Name of local supplier.
2. Furnish such information for following equipment:
a. Section 26 0550: Ladder Type Cable Tray
b. Section 26 0943: Lighting Control Systems
c. Section 26 0950: Power Monitoring System
d. Section 26 1219: Liquid Filled Transformers
e. Section 26 2413: Switchboards.
f. Section 26 2417: Panelboards
g. Section 26 2726: Wiring devices.
h. Section 26 2816: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
i. Section 26 3213: Energizing Generator
j. Section 26 3353: UPS
k. Section 26 3553: TVSS
I. Section 26 5100: Interior lighting fixtures.
3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data.
4. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets)
B. Quality Assurance / Control:
1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified.
2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear
their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available.
B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer:
1. Sections 26 2416, 26 2816, and 26 2913: Panelboards, Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers, and
Enclosed Controllers.
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Iecnnology building i,omunneu aer I rvovernuer f, cU 14
C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable
to this Division.
1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation and
maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as
necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O R M Manuals—manuals to contain information listed be-
low. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project.
1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items:
a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings.
b. Letter oft -year guarantee of workmanship.
C. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings.
d. Copy of letter verifying owner's receipt of spare parts.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Contractor:
"The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or re-
pair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be deter-
mined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance."
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all dev-
iations from the original layout are recorded. These marked -up prints shall be turned over to the Archi-
tect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be
included without additional cost to Owner.
B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site
dimensions and with other Sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501-2
_ • _ - - __'__w M • —,,,- war i-,milu it IV uomormea Set I November 7, 2014
1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations
for proper installation.
2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served
before installation or rough -in.
a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work.
b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with
mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and
functional.
3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching,
and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections.
B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls,
ceilings, and top plates of walls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating property. Notify Architect before
test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed
for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full -load nameplates current rating and size of thermal
overload unit installed for each motor.
END OF SECTION
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 -3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0503 -EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections or Punished by Owner.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. In the even of conflict regarding equipment wiring system requirements between this Section and any
other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART2 PRODUCTS
As described in the related sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough -in. Verify location, size, and
type of connections, voltage, number of phases, and ampacity. Coordinate details of equipment
connections with supplier and installer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat -producing
equipment.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in
damp or wet locations and for connections to vibrating equipment. Make flexible connections to
vibrating equipment of sufficient length to form a loop to restrict transmission of noise to structural
elements or to the air.
C. Install prefinished cord set or use attachment plug with suitable strain -relief clamps. Refer to Section
26 2726, Wiring Devices, for details.
D. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of prewired equipment in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. Tag all
interconnecting wiring to identify source and destination equipment and terminal numbers. Refer to
Section 26 0553, Electrical Identification, for details.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260503-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0513 -MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall provide and install all new cable and shall perform all terminations, splices, etc.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for wire and cable.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification.
3. Section 26 0519 — Wire and Cable
B. In the event of conflict regarding wire and cable requirements between this Section and any other
section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLT
A. EPR Insulated Cable:
1.
Extrusion: Single -pass, triple -tandem, of conductor screen, insulation, and
insulation screen.
2.
Type: 15kV, shielded, UL 1072, Type MV -105.
3.
Conductors: Copper, concentric lay Class B round stranded in accordance with
ASTM 63, ASTM B8, and ASTM B263.
4.
Insulation Screen: Thermosetting, semiconducting ethylene -propylene rubber
(EPR), extruded directly over insulation in accordance with NEMA WC 8, and
AEIC CS 6.
5.
Metallic Shield: Uncoated, 5 -mil, copper shielding tape, helically applied.
6.
Jacket: Extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound applied over the metallic
shield in accordance with NEMA WC 8.
7.
Operating Temperature: 90 degrees C continuous normal operations, 130
degrees C emergency operating conditions, and 250 degrees C short-circuit
conditions.
8.
Manufacturer: Cable - The cable shall be Okonite, Okoguard - Okosal type
MV -90 No. 115-23-30XX Series (Size as noted on the plans). Confirm sizes and
lengths before ordering the cable.
9.
Cable shall carry a two-year warranty after shipment.
10.
Test in accordance with NEMA WC 8 and AEIC CS 6 partial discharge level test
for EPR insulated cable.
11.
Cable shall have a 133 percent insulation level.
2.02 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in base bid all for well inserts, elbows, terminations and splice kits,
etc. as required.
B. Termination Kits:
1. Capable of terminating a 15kV, single -conductor, polymeric -insulated shielded
cables.
2. Capable of producing a termination with a current rating equal to, or greater
than, the cable ampacity, meeting Class 1 requirements of IEEE 48.
3. Capable of accommodating any form of cable shielding or construction without
the need for special adapters and/or accessories.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Raychem.
b. 3M Co.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 260513-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
2.03
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Cold Shrinkable Splice Kits:
1. Components necessary to provide insulation, metallic shielding and grounding
systems, and overall jacket.
2. Capable of making splices that have a current rating equal to, or greater than the
cable ampacity, conforming to IEEE 404.
3. 15 kV class, with compression connector, splice insulating and conducting
sleeves, stress -relief materials, shielding braid and mesh, and abrasion -resistant
cold shrinkable adhesive -lined rejacketing sleeve to provide a waterproof seal.
4. Manufacturers:
a. 3M Co.
C. Elbow Connector Systems:
1. Molded, peroxide -cured, EPDM-insulated, 15kV class, 951<V BIL, 200A, 10,000A
rms load -break and 600A, 40,000 rms load -break elbows having all copper
current -carrying parts in accordance with ANSI 386.
2. Protective Caps: 15kV class, 951kV BIL, 200 and 600 amperes, with molded EPDM
insulated body.
3. Insulated Standoff Bushings: 251kV class, 95kV BIL, 200 and 600 amperes, complete
with EPDM rubber body, stainless steel eyebolt with brass pressure foot, and
stainless steel base bracket.
4. Bushing Inserts: 15kV class, 95kV BIL, load -break with EPDM rubber body and
all -copper, current -carrying parts. See plans for size.
5. All elbows (both 200A and 600A) shall be load break.
6. All 200A elbows shall have a test point for testing under load. Supply with protective
cap.
7. All 600A elbows shall be supplied with a 200A wall insert test point, with protective
cap, install on back of 600A elbows for testing under load. Provide all required
components to complete this installation.
8. Manufacturers.
a. 3M
b. Cooper.
D. Cable Lugs
1. In accordance with NEMA CC1.
2. Rated 15kV of same material as conductor metal.
3. Manufacturers and Products, Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
a. Square D; Versitide.
b. Thomas & Betts; Color -Keyed.
c. ILSCO.
4. Manufacturers and Products, Uninsulated, Bolted, Two -Way Connectors and
Terminators:
a. Thomas & Betts; Locktite.
b. Brundy; Quiklug.
c. ILSCO.
PULLING COMPOUND
A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax -based lubricant; UL
listed.
B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon. CPE, and lead -covered
wire and cable.
C. Suitable for zinc -coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass
raceways.
D. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Ideal Co.; Yellow 77.
2. Polywater, Inc.
3. Cable Grip Co.
PART 3 EXECUTION
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 260513-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.01 GENERAL
A. Conductor installation to be in accordance with NECA 5055.
B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted
otherwise.
C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions
and minimum bending radii.
D. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A for copper conductors.
E. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center -to -center
spacing as required by equipment terminals.
F. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable
trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means,
bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties
placed at intervals not exceeding 18 inches on center.
G. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or
cables.
H. Concrete -Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through
each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter.
3.02 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS
A. Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by the Owner's Representative.
B. Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits, in accordance with kit
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install splices or terminations as continuous operation in accessible locations under
clean, dry conditions.
D. Single Conductor Cable Terminations: Provide cold shrinkable stress control and outer
nontracking insulation tubings, high relative permittivity stress relief mastic for
insulation shield cutback treatment, and a heat -activated sealant for environmental
sealing.
E. Install terminals or connectors acceptable for type of conductor material used.
F. Provide shield termination and grounding for all terminations.
G. Provide necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors.
I. Where elbow connectors are specified, install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
J. Field Test Cable: DO NOT apply a High Potential "Acceptance Test" to existing cables.
K. Do not drag along the ground.
L. Provide and install all grounding per manufacturer and NEC.
3.03 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE FIELD TESTING
A. Perform the following field test on the new 15kV cable:
1. Perform high potential tests on 1 5k cable after installation per IEEE test duration per Owner.
2. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner. Test each length of each phase cable in the
system, after installation, with splices and terminations in place but disconnected from
equipment.
3. Furnish necessary test equipment, experienced testing personnel, and necessary electric
power.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 260513-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
4. Perform high -potential test in accordance with ICEA S-66-524 and S-68-516, and NEMA WC7
and WC8.
a. Use do test voltage of 55kV for 151kV (133 percent insulation) cable applied for 15
minutes.
b. The voltage may be increased continuously, apply the test voltage at a uniform rate,
increasing to maximum voltage in not less than 10 seconds or more than 60 seconds. If
applied in steps, increase the test voltage from one step to the next in approximately five
to eight equal steps. Make the duration of each step long enough for the absorption
current to attain reasonable stabilization (1 minute).
5. Record current and voltage readings at the end of each step and prepare a written copy of the
test data for submission to the Owner and include in the Operations and Maintenance Manual.
6. Immediately following these tests, ground the conductor to drain any charge to earth. Repair
or replace cables not passing test. Repaired cables must pass same test.
3.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All splices and terminations of conductors above 600 volts shall be performed by
qualified splicers with not less than 5 years experience. Submit a resume of proposed
splicers to Owner's Representative. All cable splicers shall receive the approval of the
Owner's Representative before any splice or termination is made.
END OF SECTION
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 260513-4
— — a � c�niwluyy DunUing Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
PART 1
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Line Voltage Conductors:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown:
a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger.
2. Insulation:
a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C).
b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C).
C. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes.
d. Type TC cable is acceptable for use in cable trays only.
3. Colors:
a. 208Y / 120 V System:
1) Black: Phase A.
2) Red: Phase B.
3) Blue: Phase C.
4) Green: Ground.
5) White: Neutral.
b. 480Y / 277 Volt System:
1) Brown: Phase A.
2) Orange: Phase B.
3) Yellow: Phase C.
4) Gray: Neutral.
5) Green: Ground.
C. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding
of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed.
d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band
or color tag color -coded as specified above.
B. Line Voltage Cables:
1. Non -Metallic Sheathed Cable (NM) and Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used as restricted below.
a. Copper Conductors
b. Use only indoor, dry locations where:
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 260519-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1) Not subject to damage.
2) Not in contact with earth.
C. Not in concrete.
d. Is allowed by local codes.
C. Standard Connectors:
1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors.
2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs.
3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non -hardening
sealant.
D. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors:
1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com
b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
C. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 016000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
2. Do not use direct burial cable.
B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts):
1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different
voltage systems in separate conduits.
2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit
homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings.
3. Neutrals:
a. On three-phase, 4 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits.
b. On single-phase, 3 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits.
C. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings.
d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers
in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced
current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted
otherwise.
4. Pulling Conductors:
a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are
free of foreign matter and moisture.
b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors.
c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants.
END OF SECTION
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 260519-2
1�uIlw Vulilluluyy ou ny Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 0526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as
excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre -Installation Conference: Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation.
C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for
such use.
D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices:
1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Burndy
b. Thomas & Betts.
C. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing
concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation.
B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without
splice. Provide grounding for following.
1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures.
2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures.
3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.
4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
5. Non -current -carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets,
instrument cases, and lighting fixtures.
C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches of point of
entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical
continuity.
D. Provide concrete -encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet minimum of No. 2/0 bare copper conductor in
concrete footing, 2 inches minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper conductor to main panel as
shown on Drawings.
E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying
building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service
disconnect.
F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in
flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment.
G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures.
H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor.
1. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground.
1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG.
2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings.
J.Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate
connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet.
K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with
bolted solderless lug.
L. Do not bond neutral conductor of emergency generator set to set frame at generator location.
M. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary neutral
conductor to cabinet.
N. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest ground per NEC and local inspector.
O. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate ground at
board on a grounding bar.
Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits. Terminate
each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit ground is not acceptable.
Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to ground system.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2
1—onrormea set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 0533 -RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished
under other Divisions.
2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other
Divisions.
3. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with
telephone company requirements.
4. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Raceway And Conduit:
1. Sizes:
a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use.
b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product.
a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas.
Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit
and fittings completely with vinyl tape.
b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Electrical Non -Metallic tubing (ENT)
1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is:
a) Not subject to damage.
b) Not in contact with earth.
c) Not in concrete.
2) Flexible steel conduit or metal -clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical
equipment.
c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:
1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows
and risers.
d. Listed, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches.
3. Prohibited Raceway Materials:
a. Aluminum conduit.
b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable.
B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use.
2. EMT:
a. Compression type.
b. Steel set screw housing type.
3. PVC Conduit:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes.
b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer.
4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type.
5. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type.
6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper.
7. Prohibited Fitting Materials:
a. Crimp -on, tap -on, indenter type fittings.
b. Cast set -screw fittings for EMT.
c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Outlet boxes shall be UL listed for the application, Heavy Duty PVC for NM and ENT of proper size and
shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following:
a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box.
b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required.
c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box
flush with finish surface.
2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be a deep box to accommodate Cat 6A cables. 4sq. deep box with
single gang mudring where two or more cables come to one box.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contact Information:
1. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com.
2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com.
3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com.
7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site
dimensions and with other Sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment.
2. Before rough -in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located
for purpose intended.
a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22.
b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough -in. Refer
conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction.
3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors.
4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed
under other Divisions.
B. Conduit And Raceway:
1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be exposed
on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems.
Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines.
2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes.
3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet,
fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting.
a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively
reduced.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 2
• •• - " _.--u u Lomormea set I November 7, 2014
b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC.
4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during
construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated.
5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways
where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints.
6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible
area and cap for future use. i
7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof
penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof
penetrations with the Roofing Contractor.
8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except
sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and
indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as -built drawings.
9. Install expansion -deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation
break (SIB) joints.
10. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL -listed foamed
silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all
concrete or masonry walls.
11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply
PVC adhesive only by brush.
12. Installation In Framing:
a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing
points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width.
b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum.
13. Underground Raceway And Conduit:
a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum.
b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install
conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of
exit from planting areas.
14. Conduit And Raceway Support:
a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required.
b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely
mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by:
1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry.
2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units.
3) Wood screws on wood.
4) Metal screws on metal.
15. Prohibited Procedures:
a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes,
cabinets, or other equipment.
J. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed.
C. Use of torches for bending PVC.
d. Spray applied PVC cement.
e. Boring holes in truss members.
f. Notching of structural members.
g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires.
C. Boxes:
1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover.
2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall
construction, do not install boxes back to back.
3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets.
4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb.
5. Support switch boxes larger than two -gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. I ----
6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use.
7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier.
8. Location:
a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings.
Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies
to Architect before rough -in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall be within 6 inches of doorjamb.
b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural
features. j
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Contormea jet I November 1, 2014
C. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with
architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with
each other, if possible.
d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0550 - LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision,
materials, equipment, tests and services to install complete cable tray systems as shown on the
drawings.
B. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to straight sections of ladder type cable
trays, bends, tees, elbows, drop -outs, supports and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural
(Physical) Quality
D. ASTM A1011 - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength
Low -Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability (FormerlyASTMA570 &A607)
E. ASTM A1008 - Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy
and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability (Formerly ASTMA61 1)
F. ASTM 8633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
G. NEMA VE 1-1998 -Metallic Cable Tray Systems
H. NEMA VE 2-2000 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. Specifications and drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact routing, locations, distances and
levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor is directed to make field surveys as part of
his work prior to submitting system layout drawings.
B. Cable tray size is estimated only. Electrical Contractor shall provide tray as required based on actual
cable counts. Submit anticipated cable counts and size with shop drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Drawings: Submit drawings of cable tray and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger
rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies, and fittings, showing accurately scaled
components.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on cable tray including, but not limited to, types, materials,
finishes, rung spacings, inside depths and fitting radii. For side rails and rungs, submit cross sectional
properties including Section Modulus (Sx) and Moment of Inertia (Ix).
LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS 260550-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cable trays and fittings of types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, "Cable Tray Systems".
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray and
cable channel systems (Article 318, NEC).
D. UL Compliance: Provide products that are UL -classified and labeled.
E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70B, "Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment
Maintenance" pertaining to installation of cable tray systems.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cable tray systems and components carefully to avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes.
Do not install damaged equipment.
B. Store cable trays and accessories in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from weather and
construction traffic. Wet materials should be unpacked and dried before storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, cable tray and cable channel systems
shall be such as manufactured by Cooper B -Line, Inc.
2.02 CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes indicated;
with splice plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units. Construct units with rounded edges and
smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additional construction
features.
B. Materials and Finish: Material and finish specifications for each tray type are as follows:
1. Aluminum: Straight section and fitting side rails and rungs shall be extruded from Aluminum
Association Alloy 6063. All fabricated parts shall be made from Aluminum Association Alloy 5052.
2.03 TYPE OF TRAY SYSTEM
Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with transverse members (rungs)
welded to the side rails. Rungs shall be spaced 9 inches on center. Spacing in radiused fittings shall be
9 inches and measured at the center of the tray's width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable -bearing
surface of 7/8 inch with radiused edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane
of the side rails.
B. Tray Sizes shall have 6 inch minimum usable load depth, or as noted on the drawing.
C. Straight tray sections shall have side rails fabricated as I -Beams. All straight sections shall be supplied in
standard 10, 12, 20, or 24 foot lengths as desired by contractor, except where shorter lengths are
permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths as shown on drawings.
D. Tray widths shall be 36 inches or as shown on drawings.
E. All fittings must have a minimum radius of 24 inches.
LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS 260550-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. Splice plates shall be the bolted type made as indicated below for each tray type. The resistance of fixed
splice connections between adjacent sections of tray shall not exceed .00033 ohms. Splice plate
construction shall be such that a splice may be located anywhere within the support span without
diminishing rated loading capacity of the cable tray.
Aluminum Tray - Splice plates shall be made of 6063-T6 aluminum, using four square neck
carriage bolts and serrated flange locknuts. Hardware shall be zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B633, SC1. If aluminum cable tray is to be used outdoors then hardware shall be Type 316
stainless.
G. Cable Tray Supports: Shall be placed so that the support spans do not exceed maximum span indicated
on drawings. Supports shall be constructed from 12 gauge steel formed shape channel members 1-5/8
inch by 1-5/8 inch with necessary hardware such as Trapeze Support Kits (9G-55XX-22SH) as
manufactured by Cooper B -Line, Inc. Cable trays installed adjacent to walls shall be supported on wall
mounted brackets such as B409 as manufactured by Cooper B -Line, Inc.
H. Trapeze hangers and center -hung supports shall be supported by 1/2 inch (minimum) diameter rods.
I. Barrier Strips: Shall be placed as specified on drawings and be fastened into the tray with self -drilling
screws.
Accessories - special accessories shall be furnished as required to protect, support, and install a cable
tray system. Accessories shall consist of but are not limited to; section splice plates, expansion plates,
blind -end plates, specially designed ladder dropouts, barriers, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays as indicated: Installation shall be in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
instructions, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that cable tray equipment comply with
requirements of NEC and applicable portions of NFPA 70B. Reference NEMA-VE2 for general cable
tray installation guidelines.
B. Coordinate cable tray with other electrical work as necessary to properly integrate installation of cable
tray work with other work.
C. Provide sufficient space encompassing cable trays to permit access for installing and maintaining cables.
D. Cable tray fitting supports shall be located such that they meet the strength requirements of straight
sections. Install fitting supports per NEMA VE -2 guidelines, or in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Install with minimum of 12" clear space above each tray.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to
demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. See NFPA 706, Chapter 18, for
testing and test methods.
B. Manufacturer shall provide test reports witnessed by an independent testing laboratory of the "worst
case" loading conditions outlined in this specification and performed in accordance with the latest
revision of NEMA VE -1; including test reports verifying rung load capacity in accordance with NEMA VE -
1 Section 5.4.
END OF SECTION
LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS 260550-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0553 -ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
1.02 RELATED WORK
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section and any
other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black
background.
B. Nameplates (Emergency Equipment): Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch
high white letters on a red background.
C. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types not
approved.
D. Conductor -color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard doors.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the inside of
the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each coverplate. Use a
permanent black marker.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
3.02
3.03
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule
System Voltage
Conductor 480Y/277V
208Y/1 20V
Phase A Brown
Black
Phase B Orange
Red
Phase C Yellow
Blue
Neutral Grey
White
Grounding Green
Green
Isolated Ground Green with
Green with
yellow stripe
yellow stripe
Switchleg (lighting) Purple
Pink
NAME PLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below.
B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers:
1. 1st Line - Equpment Name: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 3/16 inch Lettering
4. 4th Line - Available Fault Current: 3/16 inch Lettering
5. Nameplate Examples:
PANEL:HA
480Y/277V
FEED FROM: SWBD: MSB
MSB -2 480YI277V
SCA: 18,560 AMPS FEED FROM:
UTIL.
MCC -A: SEC. 1 SCA: 35,680 AMPS
480V -3P
FEED FROM:
MSB -2
SCA: 18,560 AMPS
C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control
Centers:
1. 1st Line - Load Served: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Location of Load: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. Nameplate Examples:
PUMP: P-1
MECH. RM 112
D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters:
1. 1st Line - Load Served: 1/4 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 3/16 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 3/16 inch Lettering
4. Nameplate Examples:
FAN: F-1
480V -3P
FEED FROM: HM -
1,3,5
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary
voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.
1. tat Line - Equpment Name: 3/16 inch Lettering.
2. 2nd Line - Voltage Rating: 1/8 inch Lettering
3. 3rd Line - Feed Source: 1/8 inch Lettering
4. 4th Line - Available Fault Current: 3/16 inch Lettering
5. Nameplate Example:
XFMR:TA
480-208Y/120V
FEED FROM: HA -2
SUPPLIES: PNL
LA
SCA: 18,560 AMPS
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0943 -LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Part 7 General
Introduction
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
The work covered in this section is subject to all the requirements in the General Conditions of the Specifications.
The contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the
specification to provide a complete and operable system.
1.01 Description of Work
1. The extent of the lighting control system work is indicated by the drawings and by the requirements of this
section. It is defined to include, but not by way of limitation:
A. Panelboards containing both standard and remotely operable circuit breakers
B. Control electronics for switching circuit breakers and monitoring the status of the system
C. Associated low voltage switches, occupancy sensors and external time clocks
D. Any work stations, software and communications hardware
2. System installation includes the following:
A. Wiring of main and branch circuit conductors
B. Installation of external control devices and wiring to the panelboard controller
C. Installation of communications conductors and associated hardware
1.02 Quality Assurance
1. Manufacturers: Firms engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of the
types indicated, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
2. Component Testing: All electronic component board assemblies are to be factory tested and burned in prior to
installation.
3. System Support: Factory fax/telephone/email support shall be available free of charge during normal business
hours.
4. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical
equipment and enclosures.
5. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the NEC including Articles 110-10 and 725.
6. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards for panelboards, circuit breakers and energy management
equipment.
7. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions Standards specified in Part 15,
Subpart J for Class A applications
8. IEC 1000: Electronic components shall meet or exceed levels specified below:
A. ESD Immunity IEC 1000, Level
B. RF Susceptibility IEC 1000, Level 3
C. Electrical Fast Transient Susceptibility IEC 1000, Level 3
D. Electrical Surge Susceptibility—power line IEC 1000, Level 4
E. Electrical Surge Susceptibility—interconnection lines IEC 1000, Level 3
9. ISO 9002: Manufacture of hardware and software components shall be registered as ISO 9000 compliant.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 260943-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
1.03
1.04
1.05
Part 2
2.01
2.02
2.03
Warranty
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for at least
one year from the date of installation or eighteen months from date of purchase.
Submittals
1. Product Data Sheets: Submit manufacturer's data sheet for the lighting control system and specified components
2. Panel Drawings: Submit manufacturer's dimensional drawings and circuit breaker placement locations for each
panelboard.
3. One Line Diagram: Submit a one -line diagram of the system configuration proposed if it differs from that
illustrated in the riser diagram included in these specifications.
4. Typical Wiring Diagrams: Submit typical connection diagrams for all components including, but not limited to,
panelboards, low voltage switches, occupancy sensors, light level controllers, communications devices, and
personal computers.
System Start Up and Training
1. On site system start up and training shall be included in the project. Commissioning shall include programming
all Owner defined schedules.
Materials and Components
Manufacturers
1. The panelboard lighting control system shall be POWERLINK Generation 3 manufactured by Square D
Company.
Integrated Lighting Control System
1. The lighting control system shall consist of microprocessor -based control electronics with remotely operated
circuit breakers mounted to a UL67 listed lighting panelboard interior and enclosed in a UL50 listed panelboard
enclosure. The circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent protection, and have an AIR rating or series connected
rating that meets or exceeds the fault current of the system to which the panelboard is being applied.
2. Each master control panel shall meet or exceed the following capabilities:
A. Sixteen (16) 2 -wire input terminals for connection to external low voltage switch contacts.
B. Capable of remotely controlling 168 branch circuits in a master/slave configuration.
C. Provide true status feedback by monitoring branch circuit breaker status based on actual system voltage at
load side terminal.
D. Accept remote commands via network connection.
3. All lighting control components shall be installed in a conventional panelboard 20 inches wide or column -width
enclosures (as noted on drawings). Suitable barriers shall be installed to separate Class 2 wiring from power
conductors.
Hardware
1. To minimize space requirements, the remotely operated circuit breakers and electronics shall be integral to the
lighting panelboard.
2. Remotely Operated Circuit Breakers—all remotely operated branch circuit breakers shall provide overload and
short circuit protection suitable for the location in the electrical system, as defined in the panelboard schedules.
Remotely operated power switching devices shall have the following:
A. Integral branch circuit overcurrent protection as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC). All circuit
breakers shall have a UL Listed interrupting rating sufficient for the application or shall have UL Listed series
connected ratings for the maximum available fault current at that point in the system. Submittals reflecting
the use of relays or contactors to perform remote switching must show evidence in writing that the relay can
safely withstand the available fault current.
B. UL Listed SWD ratings for 15A and 20A 1-, 2- and 3 -pole branch devices, HID ratings, and HACR ratings.
C. Handle operator that shall mechanically open the power switching device contacts when moved to the OFF
position and disable the contacts from being remotely closed.
D. Manual override switch to enable or disable the remote operation of the device.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 260943-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Visible flag that clearly indicates the status of the circuit breaker contacts with the panel trim installed. Flag
shall indicate: ON, OFF, and TRIPPED circuit breaker states. The visible flag shall be mechanical in nature,
directly tied to the circuit breaker mechanism, and shall be provided in addition to any status indicator
supplied by the system electronics.
F. Switching endurance rating of 200,000 open/close remote operations. Switching devices with lower ratings
may be judged to be acceptable, but must be provided with [100°/x] [200%] spare switching devices for each
circuit to ensure an equivalent total number of operations.
3. Lighting Control Electronics—Master Panelboards
A. Panels identified on the panel schedule as master panels shall contain both a power supply module and
controller in the indicated spaces. Master panels provide power and control for operating and monitoring
remotely operated branch circuit breakers connected to control busses located in master and slave
panelboards. One power supply module and controller shall support up to eight (8) control busses. Master
panels shall contain a nameplate label, located on the panel trim indicating its designation, automation level
network address, and the designations and addresses of all associated slave panels connected to its sub -
net.
B. A power supply module shall be furnished to provide control power for the operation of the remotely
operated circuit breakers, controller, bus system and low voltage inputs. Power module(s) shall connect
directly to the panel interior and receive line voltage from the panel bus. Power module(s) shall be internally
self -protected and operate within a range of -15% to +10% of its nominal line voltage rating.
C. The controller shall operate whenever voltage is within the power supply operating range. In the event of
incoming power outage, the controller shall automatically halt execution in a safe manner. Upon return of
power, the controller shall automatically reboot and return to normal system operation. The controller shall
include the following:
1. Integral keypad and LCD front panel for local setup. Front panel setup shall permit local input setup and
creation of time schedules without requiring separate PC-based software.
2. RS232 serial communications interface to permit local connection to personal computer without having
to remove panel trim.
3. Non-volatile memory to retain all setup and configurations.
4. Eight (8) three -wire input terminals configurable for either eight (8) three -wire momentary operation, or
sixteen (16) two -wire, or (8) two -wire operation with status feedback. All configurations shall allow either
momentary or maintained control devices to be attached without providing any external control power.
5. An auxiliary power source for powering external control devices such as occupancy sensors, low
voltage photo sensors, and pilot LEDs, as indicated on drawings.
6. Programmable input timers to permit timed override periods.
7. Adjustable blink notice assignable to any remotely operated circuit breaker(s) connected to the system.
8. Capability for accepting downloadable firmware so that the latest production features may be added in
the future without replacing the module.
D. Time scheduler shall provide, at minimum, the following:
1. Sixteen (16) independent schedules, each having twenty-four (24) time periods.
2. Clock configurable for 12 -hour (AM/PM) or 24-hour format.
3. Schedule periods settable to the minute.
4. 365 -day calendar, with automatic daylight savings and leap year adjustments.
5. Day -of -week, day -of -month, day -of -year with one-time or repeating capability. j
6. Thirty-two (32) special date periods.
7. Astronomical tracker to automatically adjust sunrise and sunset times throughout the year. j
8. Selectable logic that allows an input to be logically connected to time schedules in "AND", "OR", or
"LAST EVENT" combinations.
4. Lighting Control Electronics—Slave panels
A. Panels marked as slave panels shall contain the necessary busses and network hardware to allow
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 260943-3
BYLI Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
connection of the sub -net wiring between panels.
B. Sub -net wiring connections shall allow connection of wiring to a terminal that can be removed from the panel
without interrupting the communications to other panels.
C. Slave panels shall contain a nameplate label attached to the deadfront trim indicating the panel designation,
network address of the panel, and the panel designation of the associated master panel.
2.04 Networks
1. Provide sub -net wiring between master and slave panels as indicated on the drawings. Sub -net wiring shall
permit slave panels to receive power and control data from the master panelboard. No more than eight (8) bus
rails shall be connected to the sub -net.
2. Sub -net communications shall follow Class 1 wiring practices. Communications conductors shall be Belden
27326 or equal having the same voltage rating as the branch circuit conductors. Wiring distances shall not
exceed the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. For RS485 based networks, all wiring between master panels shall use 2 -wire twisted pair shielded conductors
(Belden 9841 or equal). Provide all necessary hardware for connecting the RS485 network to the RS232 port of
the workstation.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 260943-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 0950 -POWER MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Furnish and install a complete Power Monitoring System (PMCS) as detailed on the drawings and as
described in this specification. The system is defined to include, but not be limited to, remote devices for
monitoring, control and protection, device communication interface hardware, inter -communication wiring,
and ancillary equipment.
B. The manufacturer shall demonstrate the system is not a prototype and that similar systems have been field
installed and successfully operated for at least five years. The PMCS vendor shall have full responsibility
for insuring that the PMCS system performs as specified.
C. The PMCS shall utilize Ethernet as the high-speed backbone network that supports direct connection of an
unlimited number of personal computer workstations anywhere on the network.
D. Each Personal Computer Workstation (PCW) connected to the network shall have equal access to
information provided by the power monitoring devices for centralizing data display, data logging, alarming,
event recording, and other power monitoring operations. Each PCW shall be independent of the other
PCWs with its own software to allow the user to retrieve and configure the information based on the user's
needs.
E. The high-speed network shall allow direct access to data provided by the power monitoring.
F. The PMCS shall be POWERLOGIC as manufactured by Square D Company.
G. All products shall not violate any U. S. patents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All Power Meters and Circuit Monitors shall be UL 508 Listed and CSA approved, and have CE marking.
B. The system shall comply with the applicable portions of NEMA standards. In addition, the control unit shall
comply with FCC Emission Standards specified in Part 15, Sub -part J for Class A application.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. When PMCS components are installed by
the power equipment manufacturer, the power equipment shop drawings shall clearly identify the
components, the internal connections, and all contractor connections. The PMCS drawings shall show all
PMCS components including necessary component dimensions; type, size, and weight; location of conduit
entry and exit; single line diagram indicating external wiring requirements. Drawings shall identify terminal
blocks used for interconnections and wire type to be used.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical
performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.
1.04 QUALITY
A. The PMCS vendor shall be ISO 9000 registered to demonstrate quality compliance.
B. PMCS components included within the power equipment lineups shall be factory installed, wired and tested
prior to shipment to the job site.
1.05 SYSTEM START-UP AND TRAINING
A. On-site start-up and training of the PMCS shall be included in conjuction with power link start up and
training.
Sec 26 0943.
S. Start-up shall include a complete working demonstration of the PMCS with simulation of possible operating
conditions which may be encountered.
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 CIRCUIT MONITORS (Quantity as Required)
Circuit monitors shall be SQ -D #ION 7650.
A. Electronic circuit monitors shall provide true rms metered values. Information provided by each circuit
monitor shall include frequency, temperature, current, demand current, voltage, real power, reactive power,
apparent power, demand power, predicted demand power, power factor, accumulated energy, accumulated
reactive energy, total harmonic distortion (THD) of each current and voltage, and K -factor of each current.
B. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide valid data for
waveform analysis and true rms metering accurate beyond the 30th harmonic (fundamental of 60 Hz).
C. The Circuit Monitors shall be rated for an operating temperature range of -25° C to 70° C and have an
overcurrent withstand rating of 500 amps for 1 second.
D. All setup parameters required by the Circuit Monitors shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in
the event of a control power interruption. Any battery or other device used to provide non-volatile memory
shall be serviceable from the front of the circuit monitor and servicing shall not require removing the circuit
monitor from the gear in which it is mounted.
E. The Circuit Monitor shall maintain in nonvolatile memory maximum and minimum values for each of the
instantaneous values reported as well as the time and date that the minimum or maximum was set.
F. The Circuit Monitors shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers (120 VAC
secondary PTs and 5 A secondary CTs). Connection to 480Y/277 VAC circuits shall be possible without
use of PTs. In the interest of safety, provision shall be made that if PTs are not used, it shall not be
necessary to bring voltages greater than 120 VAC (line to neutral) to the Circuit Monitor itself.
1. PT primaries through 1.2 kV shall be supported
2. CT primaries through 32 kA shall be supported
G. The Circuit Monitor shall be accurate to 0.15% of reading plus 0.05% of full scale for voltage and current
metering and 0.3% for all power and energy functions.
1. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.
2. No annual recalibration by users shall be required to maintain these accuracies.
3. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in
conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).
H. Any Circuit Monitor may be applied in three-phase, three- or four -wire systems. A fourth CT input shall be
available to measure neutral or ground current. If the fourth CT is not used, then a residual current shall be
calculated by vectorial addition of the phase currents. In four -wire connections the Circuit Monitor shall
utilize the circuit neutral common reference and not earth ground, to provide metering accuracy.
I. The Circuit Monitor shall be capable of being applied without modification at nominal frequencies of 50, 60,
or 400 Hz.
J. The Circuit Monitor shall operate properly over a wide range of control power including 100-264 VAC or
100-300 VDC. Connections to 18-60 VDC shall also be available.
K. Ride through capability shall be available for backup control power for up to 8 seconds.
L. The Circuit Monitor shall surface or flush mount to an enclosure and be provided with an attractive finish
bezel ring.
1. The Circuit Monitors shall be equipped with an integral, continuous duty, long -life display to provide
local access to the following metered quantities as well as the minimum and maximum value of each
instantaneous quantity since last reset of min/max:
2. Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if applicable)
3. Voltage, phase -to -phase, phase -to -neutral, and 3-phase average (phase -to -phase and phase -to -
neutral)
4. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
5. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
6. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
7. Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
8. Frequency
9. Demand current, per phase and three phase average
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
10. Demand real power, three phase total
11. Demand apparent power, three phase total
12. Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
13. THD, current and voltage, per phase
14. K -factor, current, per phase
15. Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the front of the Circuit Monitor:
a. Peak demand current
b. Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA)
c. Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
16. Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the front of the Circuit Monitor. Setup provisions
shall include:
a. CT rating as required.
b. PT rating as required.
c. System type three-phase, 4 -wire
d. Demand interval (5-60 min.)
e. Watt-hours per pulse
17. All reset and setup functions shall have a means for protection against unauthorized/accidental
changes.
18. For ease in operator viewing, the display shall remain on continuously, with no detrimental effect on the
useful life of the Circuit Monitor.
M. The Circuit Monitor shall be equipped with a front panel communications port as standard equipment. The
port shall be completely accessible during normal operation and shall not require exposure of the operator
to life-threatening voltage when in use. The operator shall be able to quickly connect a small Personal
Computer (PC) to this port without use of tools or splices. This front panel port shall have all of the
communication functionality of the standard hard wired rear port. When a connection is made to the front
port, the Circuit Monitor shall disregard communication from the rear port until the front port is
disconnected.
N. It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Circuit Monitor to enhance functionality. These
firmware upgrades shall be done through either the front or rear communication connection. No Circuit
Monitor disassembly or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required. It shall not be necessary to
de -energize the circuit or the equipment to upgrade the firmware.
O. The following metered values as well as the minimum and maximum instantaneous readings since last
reset shall be communicated by the Circuit Monitor:
1. Frequency
2. Temperature
3. Current, per phase rms and neutral (if applicable)
4. Current, 3-phase average rms
5. Current, apparent rms
6. Voltage, phase -to -phase and phase -to -neutral
7. Voltage unbalance, phase -to -phase and phase -to -neutral
8. Power factor, per phase
9. Power factor, 3-phase total
10. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
11. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
12. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
13. Demand current, per phase and three-phase average
14. Demand real power, three-phase average
15. Demand reactive power, three-phase average
16. Demand apparent power, three-phase average
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
17. Accumulated energy, (MWh, MVAH, and MVARh)
18. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), voltage and current, per phase
19. K -factor, per phase
P. All power demand calculations shall be done by any one of the following calculation methods, selectable by
the user:
1. Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every 15 seconds. The window length shall be set by
the user from 5-60 minutes in five minute increments.
2. Block interval, with optional sub -intervals. The window length shall be set by the user from 5-60
minutes in 5 minute intervals. The user shall be able to set the sub -interval length from 5-30 minutes in
5 minute intervals.
3. External Pulse Synchronization, utilizing a synch pulse provided externally. An optional status input
shall be used to sense the pulse.
4. Sliding block interval with continuous sliding 15 second subintervals.
Q. The default demand calculation method shall be a 15 minute sliding window thermal demand.
R. The following demand readings shall be reported by the Circuit Monitor:
1. Average demand current, per phase
2. Peak demand current, per phase
3. Average demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
4. Predicted demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
5. Peak demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
S. Each Circuit Monitor shall be capable of receiving a broadcast message over the communications network
that can be used to synchronize demand calculations by several Circuit Monitors. This message need not
be addressed specifically to any one Circuit Monitor.
T. The following energy readings shall be reported by the Circuit Monitor:
• Accumulated energy
• Accumulated reactive energy
• Accumulated apparent energy
1. For real and reactive energy reported values, separate totals for energy flow in each direction shall be
kept, as well as an arithmetic sum.
2. Each Circuit Monitor shall be capable of operating a solid state KYZ output relay to provide output
pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy. Minimum relay life shall be in excess of one
billion operations.
U. All Circuit Monitors shall include current and voltage waveform capture capability. Waveform capture shall
be user selectable for 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycles of data.
1. Either type of waveform capture shall be initiated either from a Personal Computer Workstation (PCW)
running the appropriate Power Monitoring and Control Systems software, or by the circuit monitor as a
user defined response to an alarm condition. In addition, an external trigger can initiate the 12, 24, 36,
48, or 60 cycle waveform. The waveform capture sequence shall be initiated within 1 millisecond after
the trigger is sensed. A user definable delay of 2 - 10 cycles shall determine how many pre -event
cycles are included in the waveform capture.
2. The Circuit Monitor shall capture, and store in internal memory, 64 digitally sampled data points for
each cycle of each phase voltage and current.
3. The Circuit Monitor shall transmit the waveform samples over the network to the personal computer
workstation for display, archival, and analysis.
4. Each voltage and current of all the phases shall be sampled concurrently so that proper phase
relationships are maintained, so that harmonic flow analysis can be performed, and so that the effect of
a disturbance can be observed on all phase voltages and currents.
5. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve harmonics through the 31 st.
6. The data used for the four cycle waveform capture display shall also be used to derive metered
quantities in order to provide meaningful additional data.
7. All waveforms must reflect actual circuit performance. Waveforms synthesized or composed over time
shall not be acceptable.
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
V. Data logging may be accomplished either within the circuit monitor or at the PCW, or both. Each circuit
monitor shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and multiple waveforms. The monitors shall offer up
to 356 KB of on -board non-volatile memory. This information shall be communicated to the PCW upon
demand. Logged information to be stored in each Circuit Monitor includes:
1. Up to 14 separate data logs shall be configurable by the user. Each log entry shall be date and time
stamped. The type of data for the log shall be selected from a list of 175 monitored values. Each log
entry shall be user configurable to consist of from one to over 75 values of instantaneous data,
depending on the type of data. It shall be possible to set up each log to take data at a different user
defined schedule interval. In addition, it shall be possible for a user to define an event or new min/max
condition that will trigger log file entries.
2. Data logs can be configured by users to be Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO).
3. A Min/Max log file shall include the time, date, and value for the minimum and maximum of each of the
instantaneous metered values.
4. An alarm and event log shall contain time, date, event information, and coincident information for each
user defined alarm or event. This log shall have a capacity of up to 1,000 events selected from over
100 alarms or events.
5. Waveform logs shall store captured waveforms, 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, and 60 cycle as defined by the user.
Waveform log entries shall be scheduled at a user defined interval, externally triggered, or forced in
response to a user defined event. Waveform logs shall be either Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO) as
defined by the user.
6. A simple user interface shall be available to enable the user to allocate Circuit Monitor memory to
different log functions.
W. Circuit Monitor Input/Output Options: Input/Output modules shall be field replaceable. Circuit Monitors shall
be equipped with one of the following 1/0 options as shown on the project drawings:
1. Option One - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation: one solid state input suitable for
external end of demand interval demand pulse detection
X. Alarm events shall be user definable.
1. The following classes of events shall be available as alarm events:
a. Over/under current
b. Over/under voltage
c. Current imbalance
d. Phase loss, current
e. Phase loss, voltage
f. Voltage imbalance
g. Over kVA
h. Over kW or kVAR into/out of load
I. Over/under frequency
j. Under power factor, true or displacement
k. Over THD
Over K -factor
m. Over demand, current or power
n. Reverse power
o. Phase reversal
p. Status Input change
q. End of incremental energy interval
r. End of demand interval
s. Over/under analog inputs
t. Current sag/swell
u. Voltage sag/swell
2. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able to define a pick-up, drop-out, and
delay.
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-5
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier for the user to respond to the most
important events first.
4. Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.
Y. Output Relay Control
1. Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent over the communication link, or set to
operate in response to user defined alarm event.
2. Output relays shall close in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by the user.
3. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an independent timer that can be set
by the user.
4. It shall be possible for individual relay outputs to be controlled by multiple alarms in a wired "OR"
configuration.
Z. All Circuit Monitors noted on the project drawings shall include sag and swell detection capability. This
capability is characterized by the following features:
1. The Circuit Monitor shall continuously monitor for disturbances in the currents and incoming voltage.
There shall be zero blind time; each cycle shall be individually monitored.
2. Disturbance events less than one cycle in length shall be detected.
3. The user shall be able to set a threshold and delay which shall be used by the circuit monitor to
determine if an event has occurred. The threshold shall be user defined as either a fixed setpoint or
relative setpoint. When using the relative setpoint, the Circuit Monitor will set the nominal current or
voltage equal to its present average value. The Circuit Monitor will automatically adjust the nominal
current and voltage values to avoid nuisance alarms caused by gradual daily variations of currents and
voltages.
4. Upon detecting a disturbance, the Circuit Monitor shall be capable of
a. Logging a waveform of the event, 12, 24, 36, 46, or 60 cycles in length, of all phase currents and
voltages. The sample rate shall be of sufficient resolution to show the 31st harmonic for each
cycle.
b. Operating any output relay on an optional 1/0 module.
c. Recording the disturbance into an event log with a date and time stamp to the millisecond.
d. Causing an operator alarm at the PCW workstation.
5. All data and waveform logs shall be communicated over the local area network or through the front
panel communications port so that the user may view and analyze the data using the PMCS software
and workstation.
AA. Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Circuit Monitor. This shall include the calculation
of the harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 31st harmonic.
1. This information shall be available for all three phases, current and voltage, plus the neutral current.
To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis, the current and voltage information for all phases shall be
obtained simultaneously from the same cycle.
2. The Circuit Monitor shall have a minimum of 100k of on board memory to log harmonic magnitudes and
angles.
3. The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as a percentage of
the rms values, as selected by the user.
2.02 SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS
A. System Display units shall be provided that include easy to read, pre -configured screens displaying data
from the electronic trip units in an organized manner. The system display shall be UL Listed.
B. System Display Installation
1. System Display units shall be installed by the manufacturer in the switchgear as indicated on the
drawings.
2. The System Display units shall be flush mounted on switchgear door panels.
C. System Display Keypad
1. The System Display unit shall allow for easy operation by providing a keypad with large keys for
operator selections.
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-6
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
2.03
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. The keys shall have a raised perimeter and tactile feedback to provide a positive response even with
gloved hand operation.
3. The keys shall be clearly marked to indicate the function and separated into meaningful groups with
display prompting to assist the user in operation.
4. It shall be possible to sequentially view all available data from a selected device by single keystrokes
advancing through the various display pages.
5. It shall be possible to view the same pages of data from other Electronic Trip Units by single keystroke
advancing back and forth from device to device.
D. System Display Configuration
1. Each System Display unit shall be configured by the manufacturer with all necessary data.
2. It shall be possible to change the configuration for each System Display unit using the keypad provided
on each display.
3. Access to configuration functions shall be password protected to prevent unauthorized or accidental
modification.
E. Resetting Device Data Using the System Display
1. The System Display unit shall permit the reset of the stored min/max values in the electronic trip units.
2. It shall also permit the reset of the accumulated energy values, peak demands, and the time and date
stamps stored in the Circuit Monitors.
3. These resets shall be limited to authorized persons by means of password protection.
PMCS NETWORK
A. Connecting and Networking of Power Monitoring Devices
1. All data stored in the Power Monitoring Devices shall be accessible to external devices by means of
RS -485 serial communications.
2. It shall be possible to connect from one communications port to another (daisy -chain) such that up to
32 Power Monitoring Devices may be connected to form a continuous communications link extending
up to 10,000 feet.
3. Communications links shall be compatible with the RS -485 multi -drop communications standards.
4. Communication rates on the links shall be adjustable up to 19.2 k baud to provide acceptable
throughput of power monitoring device data.
5. It shall be possible to connect up to an unlimited number of communications links into a large network
using ethernet hubs to form a high-speed power monitoring and control network.
B. General Network Information
1. The PMCS shall be connected by means of Ethernet as the high-speed backbone network.
2. The high-speed network shall consist of POWERLOGIC Ethernet Communications Card that allow
display units, computers, programmable controllers, and other higher level or sub -networks to access
the electrical data being gathered by the electronic Circuit Monitors, Electronic Trip Units, Transformer
Temperature Monitors, Electronic Motor Protective Devices, and Digital Protective Relays.
3. It shall be possible to add an unlimited number of Personal Computer Workstations (PCWs) to the high
speed network. Addition of a new PCW shall not require any modification to any existing PCWs.
Adding PCWs shall require only a simple network tap; extensive rewiring or wiring to each group of
monitoring devices shall not be required.
4. Each personal computer connected to the network shall be a Windows NT or Windows 95 workstation
with a standard Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC).
END OF SECTION
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 260950-7
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 261219 — LIQUID -FILLED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Liquid -filled pad -mounted transformers.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C37.47 - Specifications for Distribution Fuse Disconnecting Switches, Fuse Supports, and Current -Limiting
Fuses.
B. IEEE C57.12.00 - Standard General Requirements for Liquid -Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating
Transformers (ANSI).
C. ANSI C57.12.22 - Requirements for Pad -Mounted, Compartmental -Type, Self -Cooled, Three -Phase Distribution
Transformers with High Voltage Bushings; 2,500 kVA and Smaller: High Voltage, 34,500 GrdY/19,920 Volts and
Below; Low Voltage, 480 Volts and Below - Requirements.
D. ANSI C57.12.26 - Standard for Transformers - Pad -Mounted, Compartmental -Type, Self -Cooled, Three -Phase
Distribution Transformers for use with Separable Insulated High Voltage Connectors: High Voltage, 34,500
GrdY/19,920 Volts and Below; 2,500 kVA and Smaller.
E. ANSI C57.12.28 - Switchgear and Transformers, Pad -Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity,
F. ANSI C57.12.50 - Requirements for Ventilated Dry -Type Distribution Transformers, 1-500 kVA Single -Phase and 15-
500 kVA Three -Phase, with High Voltage 601-34,500 Volts, Low Voltage 120-600 Volts.
G. IEEE C57.12.51 - Requirements for Ventilated Dry -Type Power Transformers, 501 kVA and Larger Three -Phase,
with High Voltage 601-34,500 Volts, Low Voltage 208Y/120-4,160 Volts.
G. IEEE C57.12.90 - Standard Test Code for Liquid -Immersed Distribution Power, and Regulating Transformers and
Guide for Short -Circuit Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers (ANSI).
I. IEEE C57.12.91 - Test Code for Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers.
J. IEEE C57.13 - Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
K. ANSI/IEEE 386 - Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600 V.
K. ASTM D877 - Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
L. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
L. CAN/CSA-C88-M90 - Electrical Power Systems and Equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings indicating outline dimensions, connection and support points, weight, specified ratings and
materials.
B. Submit product data indicating standard model design tests and options.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under.
B. Include procedures for sampling and maintaining fluid, cleaning unit, and replacing components.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS 26 1219 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in distribution transformers with 5 years documented experience.
1.06 TRANSFORMERS
A. Provide and install two transformers as specified herein:
1. 12.47kV Delta — 277/480V Wye 750kVA
2. 12.47kV Delta - 120/208V Wye 1000kva
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D Company, Westinghouse, General Electric, Pennsylvania Transformers.
2.02 FLUID-FILLED PAD -MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
A. The transformer(s) shall be compartment type, self -cooled, for mounting on a pad and shall comply with the latest
applicable standards.
B. The average temperature rise of the windings, measured by the resistance method, shall be 65° C when the
transformer is operated at rated kVA output in a 40° C ambient. The transformer shall be capable of being operated
at rated load in a 30° C average, 40° C maximum ambient, as defined by ANSI C57.12.00 without loss of service life
expectancy.
C. Coolant and insulating fluid shall be FR3 Oil.
D. The high and low voltage compartments shall be located side by side, separated by a steel barrier. When facing the
transformer, the low voltage compartments shall be on the right. Terminal compartments shall be full height, air-filled,
with individual doors. The high voltage door fastenings shall not be accessible until the low voltage door has been
opened.
E. The following accessories shall be provided as standard on all transformers:
1. Nameplate in low voltage compartment, 1 inch upper filter press and filling plug, 1 inch drain plug.
2. Drain plug provided on 75-500 kVA.
F. The transformer shall be rated kVA per drawings self cooled (OA). Primary voltage 12.47kV delta. Secondary
voltage 480/277 wye, 4 -wire, 60 Hz with two 2-1/2% full capacity above normal and two 2-1/2% below normal taps.
Manufacturer's standard impedance, t7-1/2%. Basic impulse level of the primary winding shall as specified in ANSI
C57.12.00 for comparable kV class.
G. The transformer shall be of sealed -tank construction or sufficient strength to withstand a pressure of 7 psi without
permanent distortion. The cover shall be welded and the fastenings tamper-resistant. The transformer shall remain
effectively sealed for a top oil temperature range of -5° C to 105° C. When required, cooling panels will be provided
on the back and sides of the tank. Lifting eyes and packing pads will be provided.
H. Coils shall be wound with copper conductors.
I. Core and coil assembly shall be the five -legged wound core type, using high grade, grain -oriented silicon steel
laminations carefully annealed after fabrication to restore high magnetic permeability. Magnetic flux is to be kept well
below the saturation point.
J. The high voltage terminations and equipment shall be dead front and conform to ANSI C57.12.26.
K. Dead front bushings shall be either universal wells or one-piece integrated for use with separable connectors.
Bushings shall be externally clamped and front removable.
L. The low voltage bushings shall be molded epoxy, and provided with blade -type spade terminals with NEMA standard
hole spacing arranged for vertical take -off. The low voltage neutral shall be an insulated bushing, grounded to the
tank by a removable ground strap.
M. Select one of the following options for fusible protection:
1. Provide Bay -O -Net oil immersed current limiting fuses that are externally replaceable with a hot -stick without
opening the transformer tank.
N. 15kV connection to transformer shall be with 200A load break elbows.
LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS 261219-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
O. Surge Protection - Provide three 15 kV distribution class lightning arresters for surge protection. Arresters are to be
mounted in the high voltage compartment.
P. Accessories
1. 1 inch drain valve with sampling device, 75-500 kVA only standard on units above 500 kVA.
2. Dial type thermometer.
3. Magnetic liquid -level gauge.
4. Pressure vacuum gauge.
S. Pressure relief valve.
6. Automatic pressure relief device (self resealing with indicator).
7. Mounting provisions for low voltage current transformers and potential transformers.
8. Sudden pressure relay.
9. 3p. gang operated, switch on HV side of transformer.
10. One removable fiberglass operating handle.
Q. Testing - Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of ANSI C57.12.90 and shall include, as a
minimum, the following tests:
1. Ratio —
2. Polarity
3. Phase Rotation j
4. No -Load Loss
5. Excitation Current
6. Impedance Voltage
7. Load Loss
8. Applied Potential
9. Induced Potential
10. QA Impulse Test
11. Provide a factory performed fluid test to establish a contaminant base line.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that pads are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION i
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install safety labels to NEMA 260.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test dielectric liquid to ASTM D877, using 25,000 volts minimum breakdown voltage, after installation and before
energization from system.
I_
B. Test transformer to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.90. F
I
B. Test transformer to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.91. i
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust primary taps so that secondary voltage is within 2 1/2% of rated voltage.
END OF SECTION
LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS 261219-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 2200 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Dry type two winding transformer. Size as per plan.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for secondary grounding.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. In the event of conflict regarding dry type transformer requirements between this Section and any
other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep out dust.
B. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for that purpose. Protect units
against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow it handled in inclement weather.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. Provide a separate set of shop drawings for each transformer supplied.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. General Electric Company
B. Square D Company (Sorgel)
C. ITE
D. Federal Pacific
2.02 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry Type Transformers: NEMA ST 20; factory -assembled, air cooled dry type transformers.
B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
Rating Class Rise (decree C)
16-500 220 150
C. Case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at its warmest point.
D. Winding Taps, Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20. Two 5 percent taps above and below
full rated voltage.
E. Transformers 75 kVA and larger, provide an impedance of 4.5 percent minimum.
F. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
Dry Type Transformers 262200-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
G. Sound Levels: Maximum sound levels are as follows:
WA
Sound
Rating
Level
1-5
30 db
6-25
40 db
26-150
42 db
151-225
43 db
226-300
47 db
301-500
51 db
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
H. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV
I. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.
J. Mounting: Transformers 75 kVA and less shall be suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting;
transformers larger than 25 kVA shall be suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
K. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
L. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20; Type 1. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
M. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration -absorbing mounts.
N. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated allowable
temperature rise.
END OF SECTION
Dry Type Transformers
26 2200 - 2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART1 GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Provide and install all switchboards and switchboard components as indicated on drawings and
Specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of 26 0501.
B. Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown: conduit entrance locations
and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground;
switchboard instrument details; instructions for handling and installation or switchboard; and
electrical characteristics including voltage, switch size and ratings, and withstand ratings of all
equipment and components.
C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of 26 0501.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of 26 0501.
B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and
recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of 26 0501.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of 26 0501.
C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or
heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D.
2.02 SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION AND RATINGS
A. Factory -assembled, dead front, metal -enclosed, and self-supporting switchboard assembly
conforming to NEMA PB 2, and complete from incoming line terminals to load -side terminations.
Provide lugs appropriate for conductors used,
B. Switchboard electrical ratings and configurations as shown on Drawings. The short circuit rating
indicated shall be an integrated rating of switchboard and its devices.
C. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the
conductor materials used.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Bus Material: Copper or aluminum with tin plating, sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2.
Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
F. Enclosure shall be NEMA PB 2 Type 1 - General Purpose. Sections shall align at rear.
G. Switchboard Height: 90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting members and pull boxes.
H. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with
minimum one coat corrosion -resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.
Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably
insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Continuous current rating as indicated on Drawings.
Main Switch or switches shall be electronic trip circuit breakers (field adjustable). Amperage as
indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboard in locations shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground for one
minute each. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts, and minimum acceptable value for insulation
resistance is 2 megohms.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Tightness shall be
in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
SWITCHBOARDS 262413-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 2417-PANELBOARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Distribution panelboards.
B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for panelboards.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification.
B. In the event of conflict regarding panelboard requirements between this Section and any other
section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following in addition to the standard requirements: Include outline and support point
dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and
fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish two each to Owner.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PANELBOARDS
A. Square D NQOD—NF
B. "Power Link" Panelboards shall be SQ -D ONLY.
2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type: FS W -P-115; Type I, Class I.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. Cabinet size: 5 3/4 inches deep; 20 -inches wide, mount per plans.
C. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged door with flush lock. Finish in
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide ground bus in
all panelboards.
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as type HACR for air
conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black
background. Label to include panel identification, voltage and source. Label to be attached with
screws.
2.03 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.
PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set J November 7, 2014
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1, mount per plans.
C. Cabinet Size: 5-3/4 inches deep; 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches for 480
bolt panelboards.
D. Provide flush surface cabinet front with typewritten directory, concealed trim clamps, concealed
hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide ground bus in
all panelboards.
F. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards;
22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as shown on Drawings.
G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, FS W -C-375; plug -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for
lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled on
Drawings. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch
circuits.
H. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black
background. Label to include panel identification and voltage. Label to be attached with screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Height: 78 inches to top.
C. Adjust trim to cover all openings.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
F. Provide typewritten circuit schedules in lighting and distribution panelboards and load centers to
identify panelboard and load served by each branch breaker. Index shall include specific information
including actual room names and numbers and load served. Obtain actual room names from
Architect prior to producing indexes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any
panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the
phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multiwire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible
switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS 262417-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 2726 -WIRING DEVICES
PART1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Receptacles.
C.
Device plates and box covers.
D.
Cords and caps.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for wiring devices.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. In the event of conflict regarding requirements for wiring devices between this Section and any other
section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. FS W -C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B. FS W -S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES.
1 -POLE 3 -WAY 4 -WAY W -PILOT
A. Hubbell 1221 X 1223 X 1234 X 1221-P1 X
B. P&S 20AC1 X 20AC3 X 20AC4 X 20ACI-CPL
C. Leviton 1223 X 1223 X 1224 X
D. Eagle 2221X 2223X 2224X
2.02 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits FS W -S-896; ac general use snap switch with toggle rocker
handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts ac. Handle: Standard color , to be selected, in all areas.
Screw type terminals only. (Standards color shall include brown, gray, ivory, black or a white for all
devices.)
B. Pilot Light Type: Green pilot handle; handle lighted when switch is ON.
C. Locator Type: Lighted handle.
D. Provide 3 -way and 4 -way switches of matching style, appearance and specification as indicated on
drawings.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
2.03
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
MFGR. C.O.'S
A.
Hubbell 5352 X
B.
P&S 5352 X
C.
Leviton 5352 X
D.
Eagle 5362X
2.04
RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1.
B.
Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-20R. Nylon face: Standard color, to be
selected, in all areas. Emergency receptacles: Red nylon face. (Standarad colors shall include
brown, gray, ivory, black and white for all devices.)
D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in a cast steel box with gasketed,
weatherproof device plate as specified.
E. Specific -use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, brown
nylon face.
F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter.
NEMA Type 5-20R. All units shall be feed -through type for downstream device protection. All
receptacles indicated to be installed in a toilet room, bathroom, roof top, and outdoors or within 6 feet
of a sink, basin, tub or floor sink shall be GFIC protected
2.05 SPECIFIC PURPOSE RECEPTACLES
A. NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings.
B. Isolated Ground Type: Straight blade type 5-20R as indicated on the Drawings. Grey nylon face.
C. Twist lock type. NEMA configuration as shown on the Drawings.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless Steel In all areas. All isolated ground receptacle covers shall bear
the engraved phrase "ISOLATED GROUND".
B. Engraved Plates: Same plate as specified herein. Provide with engraved characters 1/8 inch high
characters (all letters in upper case) with filler of black color.
C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers.
2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS
A. Hubbell.
B. Leviton.
C. Pass and Seymour.
2.08 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Straight -blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking -blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.
C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Oil -resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with
identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations.
WIRING DEVICES 262726-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent
protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down.
B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, or as noted, in a
vertical position with grounding pole to the down.
C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings.
D. Install convenience receptacles in 4 square box in a vertical position with the ground pole down.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 262726-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 2816 -DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Enclosures.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for disconnect switches.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 260526 - Grounding.
B. In the event of conflict regarding individually enclosed low -voltage protective device requirements
between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for
each type of switch);
1. Square D Company
2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES
A. General: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide:
1. Heavy duty switches on 240 and/Or 600 volt rated circuits.
2. HP rated switches on all motor circuits.
2.03 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES
A. Provide heavy-duty type, sheet -steel enclosed switches, fusible or non -fusible as indicated of types,
sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating
spring assisted, quick -make, quick -break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are
visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three phase with solid neutral as
required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating handle which is capable of being
padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, unless noted.
Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits.
2.04 FUSES
A. Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical
requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10
installed but not less than three of any one type and size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install disconnects plumb.
C. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF (Above Finished Floor).
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of connections for disconnects.
END OF SECTION
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262816-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 263215 — AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and install a new 400A. 4 pole 277/480V. three phase four wire automatic transfer switch
New transfer switches shall be capable of controlling existing Generac Gemini generator at the
Central Energy Plant. Provide and install all parts, accessories and cable required by manufacturer
for control of the generator.
1.02 TRANSFER SWITCH EQUIPMENT
A. Complete factory assembled transfer equipment with electronic control designed for surge voltage
isolation, voltage sensors on all phases of both sources, linear operator, permanently attached
manual Handles, positive mechanical and electrical interlocking, and mechanically held contacts.
Equipment rated 1000 amps and less shall include quick -make, quick -break contact mechanisms for
manual transfer under load.
1.03 PROJECT DRAWINGS
A. Refer to the project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment,
withstand
and closing ratings, number of poles, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosures, and accessories.
B. All transfer switch and accessories shall be UL listed and labeled, tested per UL Standard 1008, and
CSA Approved.
PART2 PRODUCT
2.01 TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Main contacts shall be rated for 600 volts AC minimum.
B. Transfer switch shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current continuously in the enclosure.
Circuit
breaker type transfer switch do not meet this specification.
C. Transfer switch shall be continuously rated in ambient temperatures of -40 to +50 degrees C, relative
humidity up to 95% (non -condensing), and altitudes up to 10,000 feet.
D. Transfer switch equipment shall have a withstand and closing rating (WCR) in RMS symmetrical
amperes
greater than the available fault currents shown on the drawings.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Transfer switch shall be double -throw, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and mechanically
held in
both positions.
B. Transfer switch rated through 1000 amperes shall be equipped with permanently attached manual
operating
handles and quick -break, quick -make over -center contact mechanisms suitable for safe manual
operation under load.
C. Main switch contacts shall be high-pressure silver alloy. Contact assemblies shall have arc chutes for
positive
arc extinguishment. Arc chutes shall have insulating covers to prevent interphase Flashover.
D. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by transfer switch position, rated
10 amps 250 VAC.
E. Transfer switch shall be supplied with a switched neutral pole (4 -poles). The neutral pole shall be of
the same construction and have the same ratings as the phase poles. All poles shall be switched
simultaneously using a common crossbar. Equipment using add-on accessary overlapping contacts
are not acceptable.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 263215-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. Enclosures shall be UL listed. The enclosure shall provide NEC wire bend space. The cabinet door
shall be key -locking. Controls on cabinet door shall be key -operated. Provide switch position
indicator lamps and
power available lamps for both sources (four total) on the outside cabinet door.
G. Transfer switch shall be mounted in enclosures as designated on the drawings. Separate enclosures
shall be the NEMA type specified. The cabinet shall provide required wire bend space at point of
entry as shown on the drawings. Manual operating handles and all control switch (other than key -
operated switch) shall be accessible to authorized personnel only by opening the key -locking cabinet
door. Transfer switch with manual operating handles and/or non key -operated control switch located
on outside of cabinet do not meet this specification and are not acceptable.
2.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS
A. Control shall be solid-state and designed for a high level of immunity to power line surges and
transients, demonstrated by test to IEEE Standard 587-1980. The control shall have optically
isolated logic inputs, high isolation transformers for AC inputs, and relays on all outputs.
B. Solid-state undervoltage sensors shall simultaneously monitor all phases of both sources. Pick-up
and drop-out settings shall be adjustable. Voltage sensors shall allow for adjustment to sense partial
loss of voltage on any phase. Voltage sensors shall have field calibration of actual supply voltage to
nominal system voltage.
C. Controls shall be provided with solid-state overvoltage sensors, adjustable form 100-130% of
nominal, to monitor all phases of the standby source. Provide adjustable time delay of 0.5 to 2.2 sec.
D. Controls shall be provided with a solid-state over and under frequency sensor to monitor the standby
source. Pickup bandwidth shall be adjustable from a minimum of +/- 4% to a maximum of +/- 20% of
nominal frequency. Dropout shall be +/- 5% of nominal wider than pickup frequency bandwidth.
Adjustable time delay shall be from 0.1 to 15 sec.
E. Automatic controls shall signal the engine -generator set to start upon signal from normal source
sensors. Solid-state time delay start, adjustable from 0 to 5 seconds (factory set at 2 seconds) shall
avoid nuisance start-ups. Battery voltage starting contacts shall be gold, dry type contacts factory
wired to a field wiring terminal block.
F. The switch shall transfer when the emergency source reaches the set point voltage and frequency.
Provide a
solid-state time delay on transfer, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds.
G. The switch shall retransfer the load to the normal source after a time delay retransfer, adjustable
form 0 to 30
minutes. Retransfer time delay shall be immediately bypassed if the emergency power source fails.
H. Controls shall signal the engine -generator set to stop after a time delay, adjustable from 0 to 10
minutes,
beginning on return to the normal source.
I. Power for transfer operation shall be from the source to which the load is being transferred.
J. The control shall include latching diagnostic indicators to pinpoint the last successful step in the
sequence of
control functions, and to indicate the present status of the control
functions in real time, as follows:
Source 1 OK
Start Gen Set
Source 2 OK
Transfer Timing
Transfer Complete
Retransfer Timing
Retransfer Complete
Timing for Stop
The control shall include provisions for remote transfer inhibit and area protection.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 263215-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
K. Transfer switch as designated on the drawings, shall be equipped with a field adjustable time delay
during switching in both directions, during which time the load is isolated from both power sources, to
allow load residual voltage to decay before closure to the opposite source. The delay feature shall
have an adjustable range of 0 to 7.5 seconds. Phase angle monitor is not acceptable. Transfer
switch supplied without this delay shall have provisions to add it in the field without switch
replacement.
2.04 FRONT PANEL DEVICES
A. Provide devices mounted on cabinet front consisting of:
B. A key -operated selector switch to provide the following positions and functions:
C. Test -Simulates normal power loss to control for testing of generator set. Controls shall provide for a
test with
or without load transfer.
D. Normal - Normal operating position.
D. Retransfer - Momentary position to override retransfer time delay and cause immediate return to
normal
source, if available.
F. Transfer switch position and source available lamps.
2.05 ACCESSORY ITEMS
Transfer switch as shown on the drawings shall be equipped with accessories as follows:
A. Meters: Provide an AC Voltmeter, an Ammeter, and a Frequency meter; 2.5 inch, analog, 2%
accuracy.
Provide a phase selector switch to read L -L voltage and current of both sources.
B. Exerciser Clock: Provide solid state exerciser clock to set the day, time and duration of generator set
exercise/test period. Provide a with/without load selector switch for the exercise.
C. Manual Selector Switch: Provide a manual/automatic retransfer selector switch to provide either
automatic
retransfer time delay, or a manual retransfer when selected by an operator.
D. Signal Module: Provide signal module, to delay the transfer and retransfer of the switch for up to 50
seconds
to provide a pretransfer warning signal contact. Provide signals for the following conditions:
Source 1 available
Source 2 available
Test/exercise
Backup source available
Contacts for these functions are to be form C type, rated for 120 VAC or 30 VDC at 4 amps.
E. Phase Sequence Monitor/Balance Module: Provide Phase Sequence Monitor and Balance module to
protect against inadvertent phase rotation hookup and monitor for voltage phase imbalance between
phases.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 263215-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having
jurisdiction.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the
listing or labeling of UL listed products.
3.02 FACTORY TESTS
A. Transfer equipment factory tests: Each transfer switch supplied shall be factory tested before
shipment. Factory tests shall include a complete functional test of the transfer switch controls,
including calibration of the voltage sensors.
END OF SECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 263215-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 3353 — UNINTERRUPIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. This specification describes the operation and functionality of a continuous duty, three-phase, solid-state,
static Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall utilize a rack -
mounted N+1 redundant, scalable array architecture. The system power train shall be comprised of hot
swappable / user replaceable 10kW/10kVA power modules, which shall operate in parallel, and be
configured for N+1 redundant operation at rated load. Each 10kVA/10kW power module contains a full
rated input rectifier / boost converter (hereafter referred to as Input Converter), full rated output inverter,
and 10% battery charging circuit. The system shall also comprise of a user -replaceable continuous duty
bypass static switch module, hot swappable / user replaceable battery modules, redundant control
modules, redundant logic power supplies, and LCD interface display. All of the above system components
are housed in a standard, 24 inch wide, 36 inch deep, 42 inch high equipment rack (two equipment racks
may be required based on system capacity).
B. In addition, this specification describes the performance, functionality, and design of the UPS Maintenance
Bypass Cabinet, hereafter referred to as the MBC, the Battery System, and connectivity solutions.
C. The UPS and associated equipment shall operate in conjunction with a primary power supply and an
output distribution system to provide quality uninterrupted power for mission critical, electronic equipment
load.
D. All programming and miscellaneous components for a fully operational system as described in this
specification shall be available as part of the UPS.
STANDARDS
A. UL 1778 Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment
B. UL 891 Dead -Front Switchboards
C. UL 1558 Metal -Enclosed Low -Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear
D. UL60950 Information Technology Equipment
E. Where applicable, the UPS shall also be designed in accordance with publications from the following
organizations and committees
1. NFPA- National Fire Protection Associations
2. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
3. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
F. IEEE 519-1992 Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.
G. 180 9001
H. ISO 14001
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.3 MODES OF OPERATION
A. Normal: The input converter and output inverter shall operate in an on-line manner to continuously
regulate power to the critical load. The input and output converters shall be capable of full battery recharge
while simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range
of the UPS specifications.
B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load shall continue being supplied by the output
inverter, which shall derive its power from the battery system. There shall be no interruption in power to the
critical load during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation.
C. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output inverter shall
simultaneously recharge the battery and provide regulated power to the critical load.
D. Static Bypass: The static bypass shall be used to provide transfer of critical load from the Inverter output to
the bypass source. This transfer, along with its retransfer, shall take place with no power interruption to the
critical load. In the event of an emergency, this transfer shall be an automatic function.
E. Maintenance Bypass: The system shall be equipped with an external make -before -break Maintenance
Bypass Cabinet (MBC) to electrically isolate the UPS during routine maintenance and service of the UPS.
The MBC shall completely isolate both the UPS input and output connections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposal Submittals:
1. As bid system bill of materials.
2. Product catalog sheets or equipment brochures.
3. Product guide specifications.
4. System single -line operation diagram.
5. Installation information, including weights and dimensions.
6. Information about terminal locations for power and control connections.
7. Drawings for requested optional accessories.
B. Delivery Submittals:
1. Installation manual, which includes instructions for storage, handling, examination, preparation,
installation, and start-up of UPS.
User manual, which includes operating instructions.
PART 2—PRODUCT
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. The UPS shall be 10OKW frame populated and sized for 40 kVA and 40 kW load.
B. The UPS battery shall be sized for 40kW at a Power Factor of .8 for 10 minutes.
2.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. System Capacity: The system shall be rated for full kW output in the following frame sizes:
3. 40 kVA/kW - Can be configured with up to (5), 10kW power modules for N+1
4. 100 kVA/kW - Can be configured with up to (9), 10kW power modules for N+1
B. Input:
1. AC Input Nominal Voltage: 480 V, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz.
2. AC Input Voltage Window: '/_ 15% of nominal (while providing nominal charging to the battery
system).
3. Short Circuit Withstand Rating: 30,000 Symmetrical Amperes
4. Maximum Frequency Range: 40-70Hz
5. Input Power Factor:
a. Minimum .99 lagging at 50% load
b. Minimum .99 lagging at 100% load
6. Input Current Distortion with no additional filters:
a. < 6% at 100% load
b. < 6% at 50% load
7. Soft -Start: Shall be linear from 0-100% input current and shall not exhibit inrush. This shall take
place over a 15 second time period
C. UPS Output:
1. AC Output Nominal Output: 208V, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz.
2. AC Output Voltage Distortion: Max. 3% @ 100% Linear Load.
3. AC Output Voltage Regulation: �/-1 % For 100 % Linear or Nonlinear Load
4. Voltage Transient Response: +/. 5% maximum for 100% load step
5. Voltage Transient Recovery within <60 milliseconds
6. Output Voltage Harmonic Distortion:
a. <2% THD maximum and 1% single harmonic for a 100% linear load
b. <5% THD maximum for a 100% non-linear load
7. Phase Angle Displacement:
a. 120 degrees �/_ 1 degree for balanced load
b. 120 degrees '/_ 1 degrees for 50% imbalanced load
C. 120 degrees '/_ 3 degrees for 100% imbalanced load
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
2.3
2.4
8. Overload Rating:
a. Normal Operation:
1) 150% for 30 seconds
2) 105% continuous
b. Bypass Operation:
1) 125% continuous
2) 1000% for 500 milliseconds
9. System AC -AC Efficiency: >91.5% at 100% load
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
10. Output Power Factor Rating: The UPS output shall not require derating for purely resistive loads
(PF of 1). The potential kW and kVA ratings of the UPS output shall be equal. For loads exhibiting a
power factor of .9 leading to .8 lagging no derating of the UPS shall be required.
ENVIRONMENTAL
A. Storage Ambient Temperature: -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 700C).
B. Operating Ambient Temperature: +32°F to 104°F (0°C to 400C). (77°F is ideal for most battery types).
C. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% Non -condensing
D. Altitude: Maximum installation with no derating of the UPS output shall be 10,000 feet (3000m) above sea
level.
INPUT POWER CONVERTER
A. The input power converters of the system are housed within the parallel connected, removable power
modules, and shall constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system, to provide
the necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging, and Main Inverter
regulated output power.
B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDi shall be held to 6% or less at full system,
while providing conditioned power to the critical load bus, and charging the batteries under steady-state
operating conditions. This shall be true while supporting loads of both a linear or non-linear type. This shall
be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic devices, or other components.
C. Soft -Start Operation: As a standard feature, the UPS shall contain soft -start functionality, capable of
limiting the input current from 0-100% of the nominal input over a default 15 second period, when returning
to the AC utility source from battery operation. The change in current over the change in time shall take
place in a linear manner throughout the entire operation. (di/dt= constant)
D. Magnetization Inrush Current: The UPS shall exhibit 0 inrush current as a standard product. If provided
with an optional isolation transformer, inrush shall be limited to 6 times the nominal input current of the
transformer.
E. Input Current Limit:
1. The input converter shall control and limit the input current draw from utility to 150% of the UPS
output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS shall be able to support 100%
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
2.6
2.7
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
load, charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains
deviation of up to +/15% of the nominal input voltage.
2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or
less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current shall not exceed 126% of UPS output current, while
providing full battery recharge power and importing necessary power for system losses.
E. Redundancy: The UPS shall be configured with redundant input converters, each with semiconductor
fusing, and logic controlled contactors to remove a failed module from the input bus.
F. Charging:
1. The battery charging shall keep the DC bus float voltage of +/- 220v, +/-1 %
2. The battery charging circuit shall contain a temperature compensation circuit, which will regulate
the battery charging to optimize battery life.
3. The battery charging circuit shall remain active when in Static Bypass and in Normal Operation.
G. Back -feed Protection: The above-mentioned logic controlled contactor also provides the back -feed
protection required by UL1778.
OUTPUTINVERTER
A. The UPS output inverter shall constantly recreate the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the DC
bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT driven bi-directional power converters. In both normal
operation and battery operation, the output inverters shall create an output voltage independent of the
mains input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown -outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages shall
not affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output
inverters.
B. Overload Capability: The output power converters shall be capable of 300% for short-circuit clearing.
Steady-state overload conditions, of up to 150% of system capacity, shall be sustained by the inverter for
30 seconds in normal and battery operation. Should overloads persist past the outlined time limitation, the
critical load will be switched to the automatic static bypass output of the UPS.
C. Output Contactor: The output inverter shall be provided with an output mechanical contactor to provide
physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter shall be removed
from the critical bus.
H. Battery Protection: The inverter shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of
discharge on the battery system.
I. Redundancy: The UPS shall be configured with redundant output inverters, each with semiconductor
fusing, and logic controlled contactors to remove a failed component from the critical bus.
STATIC BYPASS
A. As part of the UPS, a system static bypass switch shall be provided. The system static bypass shall
provide no break transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the static bypass input source
during times where maintenance is required, or the inverter can not support the critical bus. Such times
may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The UPS and static bypass switch shall
constantly monitor the auxiliary contacts of their respective circuit breakers, as well as the bypass source
voltage, and inhibit potentially unsuccessful transfers to static bypass from taking place.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-5
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set November 7, 2014
B. The design of the static switch power path shall consist of Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) with a
continuous duty rating of 125% of the UPS output rating.
C. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to static bypass shall take place whenever the load on
the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from static
bypass back to normal operation shall take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical
bus output of the system. Automatic transfers of load to static bypass shall also take place if for any
reason the UPS cannot support the critical bus.
D. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from static bypass shall be initiated through the UPS
display interface.
E. Overloads: The static bypass shall be rated and capable of handling overloads equal to or less than 125%
of the rated system output continuously. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from
magnetic devices, or short circuit conditions, the static bypass shall be capable of sustaining overloads of
1000% of system capacity for periods of up to 500 milliseconds.
F. Modular: The static bypass switch shall be of a modular design.
J. System Protection:
As a requirement of UL1778, back -feed protection in the static bypass circuit shall also be incorporated in
the system design. To achieve back -feed protection, a mechanical contactor in series with the bypass
SCR(s) shall be controlled by the UPS/static switch, to open immediately upon sensing a condition where
back -feeding of the static switch by any source connected to the critical output bus of the system is
occurring. One such condition could be a result of a shorted SCR.
2.8 DISPLAY AND CONTROLS
A. Control Logic: The UPS shall be controlled by two fully redundant, user -replaceable / hot-swappable
control modules. These modules shall have separate, optically isolated, communication paths to the
power and static switch modules. Logic power for the control modules shall be derived from redundant
power supplies, each having a separate AC and DC input and output. The communication of the control
modules shall be of Controller Area Network (CAN Bus).
B. Display Unit: A microprocessor controlled display unit shall be located on a hinged door in the front of the
system. The display shall consist of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad
consisting of pushbutton switches.
B. Metered Data: The following metered data, shall be available on the alphanumeric display:
1. Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second of occurring events
2. Source Input Voltage
3. Output AC voltage
4. Output AC current
5. Input Frequency
6. Battery voltage
7. Internal Battery temperature
C. Event log: The display unit shall allow the user to display a time and date stamped log
of the 64 most recent status and alarm events.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-6
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Alarms: The display unit shall allow the user to display a log of all active alarms. The following minimum
set of alarm conditions shall be available:
1. Input Frequency outside configured range
2. AC adequate for UPS but not for Bypass
3. Low/No AC input, startup on battery
4. Intelligence Module inserted
5. Intelligence Module removed
6. Redundant Intelligence Module inserted
7. Redundant Intelligence Module removed
8. Number of Batteries changed since last ON
9. Number of Power Modules changed since last ON
10. Number of Batteries increased
11. Number of Batteries decreased
12. Number of Power Modules increased
13. Number of Power Modules decreased
14. Number of External Battery Cabinets increased
15. Number of External Battery Cabinets decreased
16. Redundancy Restored
17. Need Battery Replacement
18. The Redundant Intelligence Module is in control
19. UPS Fault
20. On Battery
21. Shutdown or unable to transfer to battery due to overload
22. Load Shutdown from Bypass. Input Frequency Volts outside limits
23. Fault, Internal Temp exceeded system normal limits
24. Input Circuit Breaker Open
25. System level fan failed
26. Bad Battery Module
27. Bad Power Module
28. Intelligence Module is installed and failed
29. Redundant Intelligence Module is installed and failed
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-7
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
30. Redundancy has been lost
31. Redundancy is below alarm threshold
32. Runtime is below alarm threshold
33. Load is above alarm threshold
34. Load is no longer above alarm Threshold
35. Minimum Runtime restored
36. Bypass is not in range (either frequency or voltage)
37. Backfeed contactor stuck in OFF position
38. Backfeed contactor stuck in ON position
39. UPS in Bypass due to Internal Fault
40. UPS in Bypass due to overload
41. System in Forced Bypass
42. Fault, Bypass Relay Malfunction
43. Q001 open/closed
44. 0002 open/closed
45. Q003 open/closed
46. High DC Warning
47. High DC Shutdown
48. Low Battery Shutdown
49. Low Battery Warning
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
K. Controls: The following controls or programming functions shall be accomplished by use of the display
unit. Pushbutton membrane switches shall facilitate these operations.
1. Silence audible Alarm
2. Set the alphanumeric display language
3. Display or set the date and time
4. Enable or disable the automatic restart feature
5. Transfer critical load to and from static bypass
6. Test battery condition on demand
7. Set intervals for automatic battery tests
B. Adjust set points for different alarms
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-8
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
9. Program the parameters for remote shutdown.
G. Potential Free (Dry) Contacts
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
The following potential free contacts shall be available on an optional relay
interface board:
a. Normal Operation
b. Battery Operation
C. Bypass Operation
d. Common Fault
e. Low Battery
f. UPS Off
H. Communication Interface Board: A communication interface board shall provide the
following communication ports which can be used simultaneously:
RS232 Serial Port #1
RJ -45 Interface port for a Remote Display
2.9 BATTERY
A. The UPS battery shall be of modular construction made up of user replaceable, hot swappable, fused,
battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS
battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry.
B. The battery jars housed within each removable battery module shall be of the Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA) type.
C. The UPS shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each
removable battery module. This system shall notify the user in the event that a failed or weak battery
module is found.
PART 3 — ACCESSORIES
3.1 BATTERY DISCONNECT BREAKER
A. Each UPS system shall have a 250 VDC rated, thermal magnetic trip molded case circuit breaker. Each
circuit breaker shall be equipped shunt trip mechanisms and 1A/1 B auxiliary contacts. The circuit breakers
are to be located within the UPS enclosure or as part of a line -up -and -match type battery cabinet.
3.2 MAINTENANCE BYPASS CABINET (MBC)
A. The maintenance bypass cabinet shall provide power to the critical load bus from the bypass source,
during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The MBC shall provide a mechanical
means of complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The MBC shall be
constructed in a free-standing or wall -mounted NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this
specification.
B. As a minimum, the MBC shall contain the following features and accessories:
1. Circuit breakers or fused disconnects of the appropriate size, withstand rating (30 kAIC rating), and
trip rating for the system.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-9
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
i
I
2. Minimum 1A/1B auxiliary contacts for the purpose of relaying status information of each circuit
breaker/ switch actuator to the UPS and static bypass.
4. Plated copper bus bar (where applicable), braced for the appropriate withstand rating (30 kAIC
rating) of the system.
C. The following minimum options shall also be available for the MBC:
1. Key interlock to prevent out of sequence transfers of MBC from normal operation to bypass
operation.
2. Solenoid Key Release Unit (SKRU)
3. Mimic bus with light indications for power flow.
5. Lights to indicate correct operation of circuit breakers / switch actuators
D. The MBC shall carry one of the following agency listings:
1. UL 891 Dead -Front Switchboards
2. UL1778 Uninterruptible Power Systems
3. UL60950 Information Technology Equipment
3.4 SOFTWARE AND CONNECTIVITY
A. Network Adaptor: The Ethernet Web/SNMP Adaptor shall allow one or more network
management systems (NMS) to monitor and manage the UPS in TCP/IP network environments. The
management information base (MIB) shall be provided in DOS and UNIX "tar' formats. The SNMP
interface adaptor shall be connected to the UPS via the RS232 serial port on the standard communication
interface board.
B. Unattended Shutdown
The UPS, in conjunction with a network interface card, shall be capable of gracefully shutting down
one or more operating systems during when the UPS is on reserve mode.
2. The UPS shall also be capable of using an RS232 port to communicate by means of serial
communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on battery
situation.
3.5 REMOTE UPS MONITORING
A. The following three methods of remote UPS monitoring shall be available:
1. Web Monitoring: Remote monitoring shall be available via a web browser such as
Internet Explorer.
2. RS232 Monitoring: Remote UPS monitoring shall be possible via either RS232 or contact closure
signals from the UPS.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 26 0519 - 10
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a
standard MIB II compliant platform.
3.6 SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
A: The UPS manufacturer shall have available software to support graceful shutdown and remote
monitoring for the following systems:
a. Microsoft Windows 95/98/XP
b. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP6/2000
c. OS/2
d. Netware 3.2 — 5.1
e. MAC OS 9.04, 9.22, 10
g. Digital Unix/True 64
h. SGI 6.0-6.5
j. SCO UNIX
k. SVR4 2.3, 2.41
m. SCO Unix Ware 7.0 - 7.11
n. SUN Solaris 2.6-2.8
o. SUN OS 4.13, 4.14
p. IBM AIX 4.3x -4.33g, 5.1
q. HP -UX 9.x -11.i
Part 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 FACTORY ASSISTED START-UP
If a factory assisted UPS start-up is requested, factory trained service personnel shall perform the
following inspections, test procedures, and on-site training:
A. Visual Inspection:
1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2. Verify installation per manufacturers instructions.
3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4. Inspect Battery Units.
5. Inspect Power Modules.
B. Mechanical Inspection:
1. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal control wiring connections.
2. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet internal power wiring connections.
3. Check all UPS and external maintenance bypass cabinet terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs
for tightness.
C. Electrical Inspection:
1. Verify correct input and bypass voltage.
2. Verify correct phase rotation of all mains connections.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-11
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
3. Verify correct UPS control wiring and terminations.
4. Verify voltage of all battery modules.
5. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly landed.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
6. Inspect external maintenance bypass switch for proper terminations and phasing.
D. Site Testing:
1. Ensure proper system start-up.
2. Verify proper firmware control functions.
3. Verify proper firmware bypass operation.
4. Verify proper maintenance bypass switch operation.
5. Verify system set points.
6. Verify proper inverter operation and regulation circuits.
7. Simulate utility power failure.
8. Verify proper charger operation.
9. Document, sign, and date all test results.
E. On -Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start-up, operational training for site personnel
shall include key pad operation, LED indicators, start-up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass
and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information.
4.2 MANUFACTURER FIELD SERVICE
A. Worldwide service: The UPS manufacturer shall have a worldwide service organization
Available, consisting of factory trained field service personnel to perform start-up, preventative
maintenance, and service of the UPS system and power equipment. The service organization shall offer 24
hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year service support.
B. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the worldwide service organization 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, 365 days a year. The worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts
within 4 working hours or on the next available flight, so that the parts may be delivered to the customer
site within 24 hours.
4.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS
A complete offering of preventative and full service maintenance contracts for the UPS system and the
battery system shall be available. All contract work shall be performed by APC factory trained service
personnel.
4.4 TRAINING
UPS service training workshop: A UPS service training workshop shall be available from the UPS
manufacturer. The service training workshop shall include a combination of lecture and practical instruction
with hands-on laboratory sessions. The service training workshop shall include instruction about safety
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-12
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
procedures, UPS operational theory, sub -assembly identification and operation, system controls and
adjustment, preventative maintenance, and troubleshooting.
END OF SECTION
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 260519-13
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 3560 - Integrated Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS/ SPDs) for Panelboards
PART GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description
This section describes the materials and installation requirements integrated Transient for Voltage
Surge Suppressor (TVSS), also referred to as Surge Protective Device (SPD), in panelboards. These
devices are used to protect AC electrical circuits from the effect of lightning induced currents, substation
switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and or capacitive load
switching.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
B. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters
C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC
Power Circuits; C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in
Low Voltage AC Power Circuits; and C62.45-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for
Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits.
D. NEC 2005, Article 285
PART 2PRODUCT
2.01 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
A. Integral Surge Suppressor
1. TVSS shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 and UL 1283, Electromagnetic
Interference Filters.
2. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449
Second Edition, Revision 2/9/2005 Section 37.3 and 37.4 at the standard's highest short-circuit current
rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current testing that will be effective
2/9/2007.
3. TVSS shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/50µs, 10kA-
8/20µs).
4. TVSS shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L -N, L -G, and N -G in WYE systems.
5. The manufacturer of the TVSS shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and
distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. Also, this distribution equipment
shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards:
UL 67 = Panelboards,
UL 845 = Motor Control Centers,
UL 857 = Busway,
UL 891 = Switchboards,
UL 1558 = Low Voltage Switchgear.
6. Recommended TVSS ratings:
a. Minimum surge current rating shall be 160 kA per phase (80 kA per mode) for service entrance and
80 kA per phase (40 kA per mode) for distribution applications.
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR PANELBOARDS 26 3560 - 1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
b. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE
L -N
L -G
N -G
240/120
800/400V
800/400V
400V
208Y/120
400V
400V
400V
480Y/277
800V
800V
800V
600Y/347
1200V
1200V
1200V
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
c. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C High
transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%.
7. TVSS shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than
115% of nominal RMS voltage.
8. TVSS shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase.
9. Visible indication of proper TVSS connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall
indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each TVSS module shall
be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push -to -test button shall
be provided to test each phase indicator. Push -to -test button shall activate a state change of dry
contacts for testing purposes.
10. TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge current
modules has reached an end -of -life condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the
alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the enclosure.
11. A connector shall be provided along with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow
connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall indicate an end -of -
life condition for the complete TVSS or module.
12. Terminals shall be provided for necessary power and ground connections.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Vendors: Square D/Schneider Electric, Surgelogic IMA Series
END OF SECTION
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR PANELBOARDS 263560-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 26 3565 - Integrated Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS / SPDs) For
Switchboards or Low Voltage Switchgear
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for integrated transient
voltage surge suppression devices (TVSS), also referred to as a surge protective device
(SPD). These devices are used to protect AC electrical circuits from the effect of lightning
induced currents, substation switching transients and internally generated transients resulting
from inductive and or capacitive load switching
1.02 REFERENCES
A. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
B. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters
C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V
and Less) AC Power Circuits; C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on
Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits; and C62.45-2002 -
IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
D. NEC 2005, Article 285
PART 2PRODUCT
2.01 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICE
A. Integral Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
1. TVSS shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 and UL 1283,
Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
2. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with
UL 1449 Second Edition, Revision 2/9/2005 Section 37.3 and 37.4 at the standard's highest
short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current
testing that will be effective 2/9/2007.
3. TVSS shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-
1.2/50ps, 10kA-8/20µs).
4. TVSS shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L -N, L -G, and N -G in WYE
systems.
5. The manufacturer of the TVSS shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance
and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. Also, this
distribution equipment shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards:
UL 67 = Panelboards,
UL 845 = Motor Control Centers,
UL 857 = Busway,
UL 891 = Switchboards,
UL 1558 = Low Voltage Switchgear.
6. Recommended TVSS ratings:
a. Minimum surge current rating shall be 160 kA per phase (80 kA per mode) for service
entrance and 80 kA per phase (40 kA per mode) for distribution applications.
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SWITCHGEAR 263565-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
b. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE
L -N
L -G
N -G
240/120
800/400V
800/400V
400V
208Y/120
400V
400V
400V
480Y/277
800V
800V
800V
600Y/347
1200V
1200V
1200V
c. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C
High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%.
7. TVSS shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not
less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage.
8. TVSS shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase.
9. Visible indication of proper TVSS connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator
lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each
TVSS module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module.
A push -to -test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push -to -test button shall
activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes.
10. TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge
current modules has reached an end -of -life condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided
to silence the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the
enclosure.
11. A connector shall be provided along with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to
allow connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall
indicate an end -of -life condition for the complete TVSS or module.
12. Terminals shall be provided for necessary power and ground connections.
13. The TVSS shall be equipped the following optional items:
a. A transient voltage surge counter shall be located on the diagnostic panel on the front
cover of the enclosure. The counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and battery
backup to retain memory upon loss of AC power.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Vendors: Square D/Schneider Electric, Surgelogic.IMA Series
END OF SECTION
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SWITCHGEAR 263565-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 5100 -LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Interior luminaries and mounting accessories.
B. Lamps.
C. Ballasts.
D. Lighting controls.
E. Emergency lighting equipment.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for lighting fixtures.
1. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 16111 - Conduit
B. In the event of conflict regarding lighting fixture or equipment requirements between this Section and
any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. As described in related sections.
1.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Lenses: Three percent of quantity furnished, minimum of one of each size and type. Total not to
exceed ten lenses of each type.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Fluorescent Luminaires: FS W -F-414; provide hinged frames of minimum 20 gauge steel and 18
gauge end pieces with latches, and minimum 0.125 inch thickness injection molded or extruded
virgin acrylic lenses. Paint with a final baked white enamel finish, minimum interior reflectance of 88
percent.
B. HID Luminaires: Prewired, with integral ballast.
C. Provide fixtures with minimum 18 AWG wiring leads.
2.02 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly with wet label and removable
prewired ballast if exposed to weather or with damp label if installed in building soffit.
B. Provide low temperature ballasts, with reliable starting to minus 20 degrees F.
C. When photocell is mounted on luminaire, provide factory mounted, UL listed unit gasketed for wet
service.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LAMPS
A. Sylvannia. (OSRAM)
B. Contractor shall provide Sylvannia lamps and ballast for Sylvania warrantee.
2.04 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent Lamps: 3500° K; all by same manufacturer.
LIGHTING FIXTURES 265100-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Metal Halide HID Lamps: Clear. Suitable for all burning positions.
2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Sylvannia
2.06 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic type, with less than 20% total harmonic distortion (THD).
2.07 HID BALLASTS
A. HID Ballast: ANSI CA; selected by luminaire manufacturer. Single lamp, high power factor, regulated
output type. Mercury vapor and metal -Halide ballasts: limit lamp wattage variations to 5 percent for a
line voltage change of 10 percent line current during starting and warm up not to exceed normal
operation current, provide separate capacitor protection.
2.08 HID
LED Lamps and Fixtures:
1) Replacement Lamps shall have minimum efficiency of 70 Im / W per LM 79.
2) Integral LED Lamps shall have minimum efficiency of 90 Im / W per LM 79.
3) Provide minimum rated life of 50,000 per LM 80 and LM 70 standards.
4) Color Temperature: 3500k.
5) Provide full spectrum color index of 65.
2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LIGHTING CONTROL
Time Clocks Occuoancv Sensors
A. Tork A. Hubbell
B. Paragon B. Watt Stopper
C. Intermatic C. Sensor Switch
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Verify all ceiling types and coordinate with fixtures and accessories.
B. Furnish and install lamps in luminaries and lampholders.
C. Support surface -mounted luminaries directly from building structure. Install fluorescent luminaries
independent of ceiling framing.
D. Surface mounted fixtures to be approved for mounting on low density ceilings.
E. Support swinging type luminaries with a separate safety cable to structure capable of supporting four
times the vertical load.
F. Provide separate circuit wiring to designated emergency lighting fixtures as required by NEC and
make all circuit connections permanent with conduit and wire.
3.02 RELAMPING
A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Work. Clean paint splatters, dirt,
and debris from installed luminaires.
3.04 LIGHTING CONTROLS COMMISSIONING:
A. Upon completion of all contractor's wiring, and after all fixtures are installed and lamped, the
contractor shall request the services of a factory representative to completely check out the system
prior to energizing the system. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner's representative shall
be thoroughly instructed in the proper operation of the system.
LIGHTING FIXTURES 265100-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. A Certified System Tech shall perform an on-site commissioning of all lighting control devices
including but not limited to custom programming of all zones and fixtures, programming of all time
based controls, including night setbacks, occupancy sensor sensitivities and time delays, daylight
sensor sensitivities etc. These services shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner and
Engineer. 40hrs. minimum.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING FIXTURES 265100-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 6100 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. The Auxiliary Systems of this specification are sections that have numbers between
26 6100 — 26 6900. This specification will include the Auxiliary Sections that are relative to
this project.
B. Each system mentioned herein is a complete system. Each network is a new system, an
extension of an existing and/or a new system that incorporates an existing system into the
new. Whatever the condition, the contractor shall provide all the equipment, materials,
labor, etc. for a complete and operable network. Each system is specified to perform a
definite function. The function and operation of a system is the final objective and
whatever the requirement to accomplish that objective shall be included. If for any
reason the specifications do not complete the network, the bidder and/or manufacturers
representative shall call the deficiencies to the attention of the engineer by facsimile
five (5) days prior to the bid date, so they can be included in the addendum. Failure to
submit this information to the attention of the engineer does not relieve the bidder from
supplying and installing the equipment needed for a complete and operable system.
C. Walk through the system when the project is complete and each auxiliary system has
been tested and ready to be set into operation, the contractor, the owner's and
manufacturer's representative shall test each component of each system for normal
operation and report in writing to the architect and engineer that the system meets all
the conditions and functions of the specifications for normal operation.
1. Example: In the case of the Fire Detection and Alarm System, the people mentioned
above plus the local Fire Marshall (or his representative) shall check out the Fire
Alarm System. Each component (break glass station, heat detector, ionization
detector, alarms, etc.) shall be tested individually to prove their function in the
total system. Any and all defective components shall be repaired and/or replaced.
2. Likewise each of the other auxiliary systems, one by one (sound, F.A., telephone,
computer, etc.) shall be tested and written reports made on the results of the test.
D. Return visits: Six months after the system has been accepted by the owner, the factory
representative shall return to the project and check-out the system to determine the
condition of operation, answer any questions of the operator and/or administrator, make
repairs, etc., to determine if the system is operating to its full potential.
E. The factory representative shall review with the operator and administrator on their
use of the equipment making sure the equipment is used to the ultimate.
F. Each auxiliary system shall carry a one year warranty from the date of acceptance by
the owner.
END OF SECTION
AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 266100/1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 6210 - DATA SYSTEM CABLING
GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.0 See drawings for additional system requirements.
2.0 The following specification and its associated drawings are intended to provide a set of instructions and
materials needed to furnish and install Telecommunications Cabling, within parameters set by industry
standards.
A. The information is modular in nature.
1. Each facility will have one or more of each module discussed.
2. Specifically included in this specification are cables, connecting hardware requirements to
provide a Category 6A compliant link to each data port of the workstations.
B. Some of the information contained in the following is directed to the owner's architects, electrical,
mechanical, and structural engineers. This information points toward ideal conditions and may vary by
site depending on actual conditions.
3.0 Cable and raceway installation and data room layouts shall conform to the 2011 BYUI Cabling standards
with the following EXCEPTION:
1. Contractor shall provide and install all raceway, cable tray, J -hooks, cable, jacks, racks,
patch panels, ladder tray etc. for a complete horizontal cabling system.
2. All data jack faceplates shall be stainless steel with identification windows. Jack quantity
as described on plans.
END OF SECTION
Data Cabling 266210-1
Blank Page
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD
Guidelines and best practices for those who have involvement in the cabling operations on the campus
of BYU-Idaho.
Table of Contents
Section 1: General Requirements for Doing Work on BYU-Idaho Cable Plant..........................................1
1.1 Contractor Requirements.........................................................................................................1
Section 2: BYU-Idaho Students Doing Work on the BYU-Idaho Cable Plant ............................................. 2
2.1 Student Team Members...........................................................................................................2
2.2 Student Tasks............................................................................................................................2
Section 3: Telecommunication Rooms and Building Entrance Facilities...................................................3
3.1 Placement of TR's and Entrance Facilities........................................................................................3
3.2 TR's and Entrance Facilities as Secure and Dedicated Rooms........................................................3
3.3 Equipment Consistency in TR's and Entrance Facilities...................................................................4
3.4 Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) TR Standard Equipment................................................................5
3.5 Minimum SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed Components of a TR or Entrance Facility.................................5
3.6 Size and Dimensions of TR's and Entrance Facilities.......................................................................6
3.7 Guidelines for Cable Pathways Within, Entering, and Leaving TR's and Entrance Facilities .... 6
3.8 Environmental Requirements for TR's and Entrance Facilities.....................................................7
3.9 Power Requirements Inside of TR's and Entrance Facilities..........................................................7
3.10 TR and Entrance Facility Grounding and Bonding Requirements...............................................8
3.11 Work Accessibility in TR's and Entrance Facilities.........................................................................8
3.12 Example TR Layout Diagrams with Minimum Requirements......................................................9
Section4: Backbone Cabling................................................................................................................................10
4.1 Backbone Cable Count Requirements............................................................................................10
4.2 Backbone Cabling in Utility Vaults..................................................................................................10
4.3 Backbone Containing Conduits in Entrance Facilities...................................................................11
4.4 Requirements for Entrance Facilities that Exceed Those of TR's................................................12
Section5: Riser Cabling.........................................................................................................................................12
5.1 Fiber Riser Cable Count Requirements.......................................................................................12
5.2 Copper Riser Cable Count Requirements....................................................................................13
Section 6: Horizontal Station Cabling...............................................................................................................13
6.1 Requirements for Uniform Horizontal Station Cabling..............................................................13
6.2 Horizontal Station Cabling Count Requirements.........................................................................14
6.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Dressing in the TR or Entrance Facility.................................15
6.4 Example of Well Pencil Dressed Horizontal Cable.......................................................................15
Section7: Horizontal Pathways..........................................................................................................................15
7.1 Guidelines for Surface Raceways and In -Wall Installations........................................................16
7.2 Guideline for Using Basket Style Cable Trays...............................................................................16
7.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Runs in Conduits.........................................................................17
7.4 Guidelines for J -Hooks and Cable Saddles as Cable Support......................................................17
Section8: Testing and Test Reports...................................................................................................................18
8.1 Guidelines for Testing........................................................................................................................18
8.2 Guidelines for Submission of Test Reports.....................................................................................19
Section 9: Labeling of Copper and Fiber Optic Cabling....................................................................................19
9.1 Labeling Copper Horizontal Station Cables, Backbone Cables, and Riser Cables.....................19
9.2 Example of Labeling Horizontal Station Cable Faceplates............................................................20
9.3 Guidelines for Labeling of Fiber Optic Cables.................................................................................20
9.4 Example of Labeling Fiber Optic Cabling........................................................................................21
Section 10: Demolition of Cabling and Infrastructure....................................................................................21
10.1 Guidelines for Cable Demolition .................................
Section 11: Miscellaneous ...............
Approved Contractors.........
............................................21
............................................22
....................23
VerificationSheet....................................................................................................................................................24
Section 1: General Requirements for Doing Work on
BYU-Idaho Cable Plant
1.1 Contractor Requirements
Cable contractors that do work on any aspect of the BYU-Idaho cable plant must meet the
following requirements.
• Contractors doing work on campus must be certified members of Building Industry Consulting
Services International (BICSI).
• Have a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) as a member of the staff and
team that actively participates in the work being done on campus.
• Contractors must be Certified SYSTIMAX Structure Cabling System installers of copper and fiber
solutions and be a SYSTIMAX Certified VAR.
• Company must have at least 10 years of experience in the installation of copper and fiber
solutions. This includes but is not limited to termination of fiber and copper ends and splicing of
large count fiber and copper cables.
• Individual technicians must understand and be formally trained in the installation of copper and
fiber cabling and have 5 years of experience in such work. This experience includes but is not
limited to the status of SYSTIMAX Certified Installer.
• On jobs and projects awarded to a contractor a lead technician must be assigned. This lead
technician shall not be replaced or removed from the project until its completion without
coordination with BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure personnel representing the project. BYU-Idaho
also reserves the right to request a new lead technician for unacceptable work during the
process of the project.
• Contractor is required to have a Labor and Performance Bond equal to value of the contract.
• Contractor is responsible for repair or replacement of items damaged by them in the work
process. The repair or replacement must match, meet, or exceed the model, and or quality, and
or value of the item damaged.
• All work performed shall be in accordance to all NEC, NFPA, NESC, ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards, local
codes, this BYU-Idaho Cabling Standard, and all other applicable codes and standards.
• Contractors must provide at least 1 year of warranty on their installation. This warranty assures
that all equipment, materials, and workmanship are in accordance with this document, contract
bid specification documents, and previous and for -mentioned codes in this document.
• Contractor must be capable and authorized to provide manufacturer product warranty including
but not limited to the SYSTIMAX 20 year materials and installation warranty.
• Bidders shall be selected from a list of pre -approved cabling contractors. This list is ever subject
to change based on past performance of contractors and availability of contractors that do this
type of work. The approved list is included in this document. (Refer to page 23 —Approved
Contractors)
• Individuals doing work on the BYU-Idaho campus shall be respectful and considerate of
students, faculty, and staff of this University. This includes using modesty in language and dress
while working on campus.
• When doing work in and around buildings, it may be necessary to temporarily navigate vehicles
on sidewalks for ease of loading and unloading. Effort shall be made to minimize this type of
vehicle traffic. Also, special care will be taken to avoid damage to landscape. Damage to
landscape will be the contractor's responsibility to repair.
• Bidders shall be required to read this document before submission of bid. Potential workers on
the cable plant of BYU-Idaho signify that they understand this document by signature on the last
page. These include outside contractors, student employees, and full time employees of BYU-
Idaho.
Section 2: BYU-Idaho Students Doing Work on the BYU-
Idaho Cable Plant
2.1 Student Team Members
BYU-Idaho employs students as technicians doing work on the various cabling and network systems on
campus. BYU-Idaho considers very valuable the contributions that students make. Students are trained
in the methods and approaches that we use on campus. Students doing work on campus will read and
understand this document before doing work. Work done in deviation from what is outlined in this
document will be done again. Students shall approach their different tasks with consideration to safety.
Student will use best safety practices when working on campus. This includes but is not limited to
proper use of tools and ladders and the use of Personal Protective Equipment such as safety glasses and
hardhats when necessary. There is a lead student who is a resource for questions from other student
team members concerning what are best practices for work on the BYU-Idaho campus. In addition to
the lead student, questions can be directed to members of the IT -Infrastructure team. Questions about
how to best accomplish tasks are not only necessary, but encouraged. Students who are not able and or
not willing to work in accordance to this standard and or not able to follow instruction from members of
the IT Network Infrastructure team will be dismissed.
2.2 Student Tasks
• Demolition of cabling and other infrastructure that is no longer needed or used.
• Pulling of copper horizontal permanent link station cables.
• Termination and testing of copper horizontal permanent link station cables.
• Pulling of fiber cables.
• Termination and testing of fiber permanent link cables.
• Labeling of cables on TR end and station end.
Installation of appropriate pathway components including J -hooks, cable tray, raceways, and
conduits.
• Connection of patch cables to create links between equipment and users.
• Documentation of cables, connections, and infrastructure.
Section 3: Telecommunication Rooms and Building
Entrance Facilities
In this document, and in related discussions, BYU-Idaho uses the term Telecommunication Room or TR
in accord with TIA/EIA and industry standard. We also use the term Entrance Facility to designate a TR
that is allocated for the room where network cabling and other service enter the building from the
outside. Entrance Facilities need to follow the same minimum guidelines as basic TR's with possible
additional guidelines. Special considerations for Entrance Facilities will be outlined in more detail in
Section 4 of this document. Other previously used terms for these types of rooms but not used on this
campus include: BDF, IDF, and closet. Telecommunication Rooms are rooms that provide a secure
location for network and telecommunication cabling and supporting network equipment.
Telecommunication Rooms provide a distribution and connection point between backbone cabling and
distribution cabling. Whenever possible at least 1 TR should be located on each building floor. In new
constructions, careful consideration to network standards and network protocol limitations including
cable length should be made in selection of a location for a TR.
3.1 Placement of TR's and Entrance Facilities
TR placement in new construction should be a decision that is made in close coordination with
representatives from contracted engineers tasked with building design, members of IT Infrastructure,
and members of the Physical Facilities design team. Any deviation from what is outlined in this
document should be agreed upon by all parties involved.
Considerations for placement of Telecommunication Rooms:
• Size of allocated space that will be served by the TR.
• Centrality on floor that TR will be serving.
• Allowance for copper horizontal station cable permanent link runs to be less than 295 feet.
• Accessibility to receive pathway from other parts of building including cable trays and conduits.
• Ability to follow the TR stack approach when another floor serving TR is above or below.
• Accessibility to TR from a common space such as a hall way.
3.2 TR's and Entrance Facilities as Secure and Dedicated Rooms
The secure nature of a Telecommunication Room makes it necessary that it not be a shared space. Only
authorized individuals doing specific tasks should be allowed into the rooms that are considered TR's.
This approach makes it necessary that functionality of the room be limited to activities associated with
moves, adds, and changes to network infrastructure and be performed by personnel in the Network
Infrastructure group. Entrance from other personnel and activities outside of this shall be prohibited.
TR's must be secured with a campus 4165 key. This key should only be in possession of individuals that
have regular need of entering TR's including Network Engineers in the Network Infrastructure group.
Any deviation from this outline of appropriate use of TR spaces should be agreed upon by the members
of the Network Infrastructure group.
TR's can contain but are not limited to containing the following:
• Patch cables
• Permanent link cables
• Cable management components
• Grounding equipment
• Hook-up wire for cross connection.
• Network switching gear
•
Uninterruptable Power Supplies
• Copper Station Cables
• Single mode and multimode fiber cables
• Power Transfer switching gear
• Cabling and ground/lightning protection equipment for outside Emergency Phones
TR's shall not be used for:
• Storage for miscellaneous items from around the building
• Custodial rooms for storage of mops, cleaning supplies, etc.
• Office space
• Electrical / HVAC / Security Systems
• Tool and material storage
• Student study or quiet space at any time of day
• Space for miscellaneous IT equipment connectivity without coordination with IT Infrastructure
• A pass through point for wiring for other systems not related to network infrastructure
• An equipment location for systems not related to network infrastructure without coordination
with IT Infrastructure
3.3 Equipment Consistency in TR's and Entrance Facilities
TR's on campus consist of a uniform combination of equipment, cable management, cable, connectors,
and patch panels. This consistent approach allows us to keep a manageable stock of supplies for scaling
our cable plant and network infrastructure. We have adopted specific manufacturers of parts and
equipment that we accept as standard equipment in TR's on campus. Individuals in IT Infrastructure
have received training in the installation and maintenance of many of these components. Support and
4
warranties are based on the professional installation of these specific components by BYU-Idaho
personnel and approved outside contractors.
3.4 Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) TR Standard Equipment
Minimum Chatswork Products Inc. components of a Telecommunication Room:
• 3 ea. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) 19" x 7' Equipment Rack black in color (See diagram on
page 9)
• 4 ea. CPI 6" Dual -Sided Verticle Wire Manager Black to be installed on both sides of each 19"
rack black in color (See diagram on page 9)
• 3 ea. CPI 19" Horizontal Wire Manager Black in color
• 1 ea. CPI Rack Installation Kit black in color (1 ea. per rack)
• CPI Rack Grounding Kit (1 ea. per rack)
• CPI 18" Cable Runway Ladder Rack w/ appropriate joining hardware. Ladder rack should span
the entire top of the black in color
• CPI 18" Cable radius maintaining waterfall for all locations where cable drops off Ladder Rack
• CPI Ladder Rack stand-off kits for raising ladder rack above tops of 19" racks black in color
• CPI 18" Wall angle support kit for all locations where ladder rack runs to wall
• 8 ea. CPI 6" Cable Retaining Posts black in color
• CPI 18" Rack to Runway mounting plates as necessary to secure rack to stand off kits and
runway black in color
• CPI Ladder Rack Rubber Bumpers to finish cut ends of Ladder Rack where necessary black in
color
• Appropriate hardware to anchor racks to concrete floor and interconnect sections of Ladder
Rack.
3.5 Minimum SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed Components of a TR or Entrance
Facility:
• Systimax 2091 Category 6A rated cabling in new buildings or new TR's. In existing TR's where
cable is being added to an existing cable plant and Category 6 is already installed, SYSTIMAX
2071 cable is adequate. Color of cable in new buildings should be white. Cable added to
existing buildings should match the color of cable currently in TR. (White or green)
• SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed XL X10D 48 port patch panels with cable management rings shall be
installed in new buildings. In existing TR's where cable is being added to an existing cable plant
and Category 6 is already installed, SYSTIMAX XL 48 port patch panels with cable management
rings are adequate.
• Cable retaining clips provided with each SYSTIMAX patch panel will be used on all patch panel
terminations.
• SYSTIMAX plastic label holders will be installed above each bank of six patch panel ports.
5
• SYSTIMAX LIU get parts specific
• SYSTIMAX FIBER (OR CORNING)
• SYSTIMAX PATCH CABLES COPPER
• SYSTIMAX FIBER JUMPER CABLES YELLOW OR ORANGE
3.6 Size and Dimensions of TR's and Entrance Facilities
The size and dimensions of the TR and or Entrance Facility/TR are crucial to accommodating large pieces
of networking gear and often large counts of building cable. Typically larger spaces are needed for
additional Telecommunication Rooms that are also considered Building Entrance Facilities. Close
coordination between contracted engineers, IT Infrastructure, and facilities should occur when planning
a space for a TR or an Entrance Facility/TR.
General layout requirements for the Telecommunications Room include but are not limited to:
• Rooms considered TR's shall be at least 10' by at least 8'. This size requirement may need
expanded based on the circumstantial demands on the room. These special circumstance
demands could include size of floor space served, building occupant needs, future requirements
of expansion and growth, and special network/telecom services used.
• Rooms that are considered Entrance Facilities in addition to Telecommunication Rooms shall
have dimensions of at least 16' by at least 8' to accommodate the extra racks and gear
associated. (Refer to 4.4 for more details on Entrance Facility size)
• The front most protruding portion of any equipment rack within the TR or Entrance Facility/TR
shall not be closer than 4 feet from the front wall of the TR. (See Diagram on page 9)
• The back most protruding portion of any equipment rack within the TR or Entrance Facility/TR
shall not be closer than 3 feet from the back wall of the TR. (See Diagram on page 9)
• It is preferred that no sprinkler heads be installed in TR's or Entrance Facility/TR's. In the event
that code requires sprinkler head(s) a wire protective cage shall be installed to protect the head.
Also, troughs shall be installed under water carrying pipes to prevent water damage to network
equipment.
3.7 Guidelines for Cable Pathways Within, Entering, and Leaving TR's
and Entrance Facilities
Conduits and trays are the preferred form of pathway bringing cables to and from a TR and Entrance
Facility. Within the TR or Entrance Facility Black CPI 18" Ladder Tray is the preferred method for
supporting cables. In special cases cables may be routed inside of the TR using D rings as support.
These cases include the routing of cable for a wall mount TR phone, or the routing of grounding cable.
The smallest D Ring that accomplishes a neat and finished end product shall be used.
Inside TR pathway requirements include but are not limited to:
• A minimum of 4 ea. 4" EMT conduits feeding a TR from the Building Entrance Facility.
• A minimum of 4 ea. 4" EMT conduits from the TR to each of the individual floors that it serves.
• Waterfall style cable management shall be installed to make the transition from the basket
cable tray that enters the TR or Entrance Facility to the 18" Ladder Tray within 36" of the basket
tray entering the TR or Entrance Facility.
• Feeding conduits or conduit sleeves shall enter a TR or Entrance Facility and protrude at least 3".
This 3" protrusion shall be typical of conduits entering through a floor, wall, or ceiling.
• All conduits shall be reamed and have a plastic bushing installed.
• Conduits shall not be left open. All applicable codes shall be followed regarding the installation
of appropriate fire stopping materials including but not limited to UL 1497, ASTM E814, and
ASTM E119. Acceptable fire stopping materials include but are not limited to putty, caulks, and
expanding pillows.
3.8 Environmental Requirements for TR's and Entrance Facilities
• TR's and Entrance Facilities shall be part of an HVAC system that is able to maintain an ambient
temperature between 64 and 74 degrees Fahrenheit.
• Relative humidity in TR's shall be between 30% and 55% non -condensing.
• Positive pressure shall be maintained in TR's and Entrance Facilities with a minimum of one air
change every hour.
• TR's and Entrance Facilities must be part of an HVAC system that can maintain the above
mentioned temperatures and humidity range and air changes 24 hours each day and 365 days
each year.
• Necessary maintenance to HVAC systems and replacement of filters shall be performed on a
regular schedule.
3.9 Power Requirements Inside of TR's and Entrance Facilities
Power needs in the TR's and Entrance Facility change depending on how the space will be used and
special requirements of the network gear that will be housed in the room. Close coordination shall be
made to discuss the individual power needs of each new TR or Entrance Facility with contracted
engineers, representatives from IT Infrastructure and Physical Facilities on new constructions. Below
are minimum requirements for a basic TR without consideration to special needs.
• Each TR and Entrance Facility shall have a dedicated electrical panel that is servicing only of the
TR or Entrance Facility that it is in. This panel shall have circuitry to a building UPS system or to
E -power or to generator power that is considered E -power.
• There shall be a minimum of 4 dedicated 3 wire 120 V 30 A circuits using NEMA L 6-20R.
• There shall be a minimum of 2 ea. 120 V 20 A circuits on normal building power for use of
power tools and testers within the TR.
3.10 TR and Entrance Facility Grounding and Bonding Requirements
• Applicable codes and standards must be adhered to with regard to grounding and bonding
including but not limited to NEC 250, ANSI/NFPA 780, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-607.
• All racks, equipment, and cable shields shall be properly grounded. All cable trays shall be
bonded between sections and tied to ground.
• The minimum cable that shall be used for grounding or bonding shall be of 6 gauge stranded
copper.
• Direct attachment shall be made to the closest grounding point that is considered building
ground on the electrical grounding system of the building. This connection must provide the
necessary proper grounding equalization.
• As mentioned in 3.3 of this document, the preferred manufacturer of parts for constructing a
ground bus bar or ground window is Chatsworth Products Inc.
3.11 Work Accessibility in TR's and Entrance Facilities
Constant network moves adds and changes in a building mandate that TR's and Entrance Facilities be
constructed in a fashion that facilitates adding station cables, demolishing station and riser cable, adding
network electronic equipment, and changing or replacing equipment. Special considerations in the
construction of the room should be made to facilitate this work. This includes but is not limited to:
• Any type of ceiling that hinders the addition of cables to TR or Entrance Facility pathways shall
not be installed. When a ceiling is absolutely required by code the minimum floor to ceiling
height shall be no less than 8' 6". False or drop in grid ceilings are also not preferred.
• TR's and Entrance Facilities shall have fully opening doors that swing outward. Door openings
shall be without thresholds as they make difficult the maneuvering of heavy equipment. In dual
door openings, center posts shall not be installed. Doors shall be a minimum of 36" wide. Door
shall be secured with the 4165 campus key.
• Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be placed with consideration to rack placement. Lights shall
be mounted on walls at least on both sides of rack facing each other when possible. (See TR
diagram) Motion detecting light switches shall be installed. A minimum of 12" of space should
be between any portion of a light or lighting fixture and a cable tray or cable runway. Walls shall
be white to enhance room lighting.
• 3/4" AC grade Fire -rated Plywood shall be mounted on walls where there is a need to mount
multiple and various equipment items on walls. Flush hardware will be used for mounting this
plywood to wall. Plywood shall be painted white to match the rest of the room.
• Floor shall have loading capacity of 100 pounds per square foot. Polished concrete or tile is
preferred for the floor finish. Carpet in TR's or Entrance Facilities is not allowed.
• All TR's and Entrance Facilities shall be equipped with a broom, dust pan, and waste basket.
These items are not to leave the TR or Entrance Facility.
3.12 Example TR Layout Diagrams with Minimum Requirements
—__-_-- Ion.
'sleeves
mama
'sleeves
Section 4: Backbone Cabling
L
Backbone cables typically originate out of the Joseph F. Smith Building and extend through our system of
utility vaults on campus. Entrance Facilities are the point at which these backbone services enter a jI
building. These rooms typically must be larger than a regular TR space because of the higher number of
racks, backbone cabling, and equipment that goes into these rooms. Building Entrance Facilities are the
point where backbone cables entering the building are usually terminated.
4.1 Backbone Cable Count Requirements
I
• Each building on the BYU-Idaho campus shall receive at least 24 single mode fibers. This count
requirement could be increased based on the services that are needed in the building. All fibers
and fiber terminating components shall be of the SYSTIMAX product line.
• Each building on the BYU-Idaho campus shall receive at least 25 pairs of copper backbone
cabling. Outside copper backbone cabling shall be 24 gauge.
• There are multiple large fiber and copper dark cable counts that are available in utility vaults for
splicing and taking cable counts into new constructions. Close coordination with BYU-Idaho IT
Infrastructure, Facilities personnel and contracted engineers and installers should occur when
splicing into existing infrastructure in utility vaults.
• All backbone copper cable counts shall be protected with gas style cable protection fuses on
both ends of the cable.
• All backbone copper cable counts shall be terminated on a 110 style panel in the Entrance
Facility with a separate cable extending the connectivity to a SYSTIMAX patch panel ready for
distribution to other TR's in the building via risers.
I
• All fiber backbone cable counts shall be terminated with LC style connectors that are loaded in
bulkheads and mounted in SYSTIMAX LIU(s).
• Sharp kinks or bends will not be accepted on fiber or copper backbone cables.
• A service loop of at least 20' shall be installed on all backbone cables within the Entrance Facility
and be neatly looped and secured with Velcro and supported on Ladder Racks or attached to a
wall.
4.2 Backbone Cabling in Utility Vaults
• Utility Vaults shall be cabled in a neat and organized manner. L---
• Splice cases that are housed in utility vaults shall not be left on the ground, or hanging, or
suspended from the cables that they are splicing.
• Splice cases shall be labeled according to the cables that they are splicing.
• Angle supports shall be installed with necessary trays and shelves to keep cable loops off the
ground in a neat and organized manner.
10
• Utility vaults on campus are a shared resource with our high voltage plant. Communications
cables shall not weave, cross, or mix in any way with the cables that are for high voltage. As
much distance as possible should be maintained between the two cable types.
• Precautionary safety measures are the responsibility of the individual contractors that will be
doing work in the vaults. Utility vaults are considered a confined space on the campus of BYU-
Idaho. Safety measures should be taken by the contractor to assure a safe working
environment. This includes but should not be limited to testing for adequate oxygen levels in
vaults before entry.
• 20' of service loop shall be installed in a neat manner in each vault that a new cable install
passes through.
• Vaults should be maintained free of water and mud.
• Vaults should be kept secure through the process of work that is happening in them and around
them. Workers shall make certain that all vaults are locked and secure when they are not
immediately attended to.
4.3 Backbone Containing Conduits in Entrance Facilities
• At least 4 ea. 4" conduits shall be installed for the telecommunication systems cables entering
the building.
• Cables shall not be installed between the utility vault or manhole and the Entrance Facility
without inner -duct. Cables pulled through 4" conduits without any type of inner -duct will not
be accepted.
• At least one of the four conduits shall have 4 ea. 1" corrugated inner -duct installed. All conduits
that are cable containing at the time of turnover to owner will be threaded with the maximum
number of 1" inner -ducts to maximize the capacity of the 4" conduit.
• All inner -ducts, fabric or corrugated that do not have cables installed shall be threaded with pull
lines.
• Fabric inner -duct is a viable replacement solution for corrugated inner -duct. If fabric duct is
used, 3 ea. x 3 channel fabrics shall be installed using best practices to mitigate problems with
twist and bind in the fabric. Max Cell is the fabric inner -duct of choice on campus.
• Conduits shall slope to the outside of the building as to not allow possible water drainage into
the building.
• All best practices as defined by BICSI's TDMM, electrical codes, and standards will be used in the
installation of underground conduits that feed Entrance Facilities. To be considered best
practice on BYU-Idaho campus the following is applicable:
o No conduit bends shall exceed 90 degrees.
o The conduit run must extend all the way into the building. No direct buried cable will be
accepted.
o Max bend radius of a 4" conduit is 10 times the inside diameter of the conduit. The max
bend radius of a 4" conduit is 40".
11
o Empty conduits that enter a building shall be plugged with an appropriate fitting that
does not allow water or creatures to enter building.
o All conduit banks shall be encased in red concrete from the point where they leave the
utility vault until they either reach the building or reach the next utility vault.
• outdoor cables entering a building in a conduit must be terminated within 50' of exiting the
conduit.
4.4 Requirements for Entrance Facilities that Exceed those of TR's
• Entrance Facilities must be in a location that is in proximity to the utility vault that will be
feeding the building.
• The minimum size of an Entrance Facility shall be 8'x 16'. This dimension is a minimum size.
The equipment and demands of the room could necessitate that the room be larger.
• 5 CPI equipment racks and corresponding CPI cable managers, CPI Ladder Racks, etc. shall be
typical of each building's Entrance Facility. Refer to 3.4 for list of accepted CPI parts.
Section 5: Riser Cabling
Riser cabling is fiber or copper cabling that is used to extend services and connectivity from the Entrance
Facility to other TR's within the same building.
5.1 Fiber Riser Cable Count Requirements
• In most cases single mode fiber riser cable counts shall match the backbone cable counts to
each of the TR's from the Entrance facility. This means that at least 24 strands of SYSTIMAX
single mode fiber shall be installed from the Entrance facility to each of the other TR's in the
building.
• At least 24 strands of SYSTIMAX 62.5 micron multimode fiber shall also be installed between the
Entrance Facility and each TR of the building.
• All multimode and single mode fiber shall be terminated with SYSTIMAX LC style connectors on
both the Entrance Facility end and the TR end. These terminations shall be loaded in bulk heads
and mounted in the SYSTIMAX rack mounted LIU.
• Fiber risers shall be installed free of sharp kinks or bends
• Fiber risers shall be installed in 1" plenum rated corrugated inner -duct. An alternate method
may be the use of armored cable for the riser.
• In all cases, fiber cables installed between the Entrance Facility and the TR must be
appropriately rated for plenum spaces.
• Refer to 8.3 and 8.4 for information on labeling fiber optic cables.
12
5.2 Copper Riser Cable Count Requirements
In most cases copper riser cable counts shall match the backbone cable counts to each of the
TR's from the Entrance facility. This means that at least 25 copper pairs of 24 gauge shall be
installed from the Entrance facility to each of the other TR's in the building. This cable shall be
of the SYSTIMAX product line.
All copper riser cable counts shall be terminated on a 24 port SYSTIMAX XL patch panel mounted
in the CPI 19" rack with one pair terminated per patch panel port. This patch panel supports
termination positions for 24 pairs. The 25`" pair shall be left coiled and un -terminated on both
ends.
• In all cases, copper cables installed between the Entrance Facility and the TR must be
appropriately rated for plenum spaces.
Section 6: Horizontal Station Cabling
Horizontal cable is the connecting cable that typically extends from the TR to the user or station that it is
providing network connectivity for. Typically this cable is terminated on a patch panel on the TR end
and a jack or information outlet on the user end. Horizontal cabling on the BYU-Idaho campus is part of
a SCS or Structure Cabling System. The manufacturer of choice for our SCS is SYSTIMAX. Lack of cable
connectivity or network jacks in a particular location is solved by installing additional cables to meet the
specific user need. Solutions for lack of connectable ports do not include altering existing terminated
cable, connecting hubs, switches, or wireless devices.
6.1 Requirements for Uniform Horizontal Station Cabling
• Only one Structure Cabling Solution shall be allowed to be installed on campus. The solution
shall be SYSTIMAX SCS.
• Category 6 cabling is the standard for our campus. Category 3, 5, and 5e are not acceptable
grades of cable. They will not be allowed. The BYU-Idaho Center and the Hyrum Manwaring
Building are cabled with Category 6A white cabling. When additional cables are added to these
buildings they shall match in color and grade.
• There are two colors of cables that shall be installed on campus. These colors are white and
green. Cable installed after the initial wiring of the building shall match the color of the rest of
the cable installed; either white or green.
• We use the colors electric ivory and grey for our faceplates, information outlets or jacks. The
color of the jacks shall match the color of the rest of the jacks in the building. In new
constructions the color of the faceplates and jacks shall be coordinated with representatives of
IT Infrastructure, Facilities Management, and the contracted engineer.
13
• The patch panel, cable and jack shall match in grade in all cases. This means that CAT 6 cable
shall be terminated on CAT 6 patch panels and CAT 6 Jacks. Mismatches in grade or
manufacturer of components will not be accepted.
• Styles of faceplates shall be uniform throughout an entire building.
• All cabling shall meet requirements of the space that it is installed in. Spaces that are
considered plenums shall be cabled with plenum rated cables.
• Station cabling shall have at least a 10' service loop inside the TR. The service loop shall be
neatly dressed and managed on the Ladder tray. Loops shall be managed and maintained in the
TR using Velcro. Plastic wire ties will not be accepted.
• Horizontal or vertical orientation of faceplates shall match orientation of existing faceplates or
electrical outlets in the room.
6.2 Horizontal Station Cabling Count Requirements
• Each space that is considered an office at the time of construction shall have at least 2 separate
locations of 3 station cables installed. These locations shall fit with the design of the furniture
that will be installed.
• Each space that is considered for a location for vending machines shall have at least 1 location of
6 station cables installed
• Each space that is considered a location for a wireless access point shall have at least 1 location
of 3 cables installed.
• Each space that is considered for locating mechanical controls or networkable HVAC equipment
shall have at least 1 location of 3 cables installed.
• Each space that is considered for locating electrical controls or networkable electrical
equipment shall have at least 1 location of 3 cables installed.
• Classroom teaching stations or podiums shall have at least 1 location of 6 station cables installed
inside the podium to the standard and specification of our current campus podium design.
• Each location where a TV or monitor would be mounted shall have at least 1 location of 3
station cables installed.
• Each location where a multi -use printer/fax/copier machine will be shall have at least 1 location
of 6 station cables installed.
• Each outdoor location of an Emergency Phone shall have 2 cables pulled in a conduit from the
phone pedestal outside to the nearest TR inside the nearest building to the phone. These cables
shall be of grade suitable for outside exposure, and be protected and grounded.
• Courtesy phone locations shall have a single location of 1 cable installed. The jack shall be
installed in a SYSTIMAX stainless steel faceplate for durability.
• Cabling counts for computer labs and other special needs areas will be addressed on an
individual lab basis. Sensible cabling counts will be installed to accommodate the needs of the
lab.
14
6.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Dressing in the TR or Entrance
Facility
• Cables shall be neatly pencil dressed upon entering the TR or Entrance Facility. This pencil style
dressing shall be maintained until termination at the patch panel.
• Tangled or taught cables within the TR will not be accepted.
• Cables shall be bundled in groups of 48 and Velcro wrapped every 2'. Cables adds shall build off
of partially formed bundles until the bundle reaches the count of 48 cables at which point a new
bundle shall be formed.
• These bundles shall consist of a service loop of at least 10' of horizontal cable.
6.4 Example of Well Pencil Dressed Horizontal Cable
Section 7: Horizontal Pathways
Horizontal pathways dictates how and where cables are routed. This includes the equipment that is put
in place in ceilings and on walls to keep cables managed and contained. Horizontal pathways should
also be engineered to protect cables from damage caused by work done in ceilings by other trades and
harmful effects of EMI on data signals on a copper cable.
15
7.1 Guidelines for Surface Raceways and In -Wall Installations
• In new constructions conduits shall be extended from the jack location through walls to ceiling
spaces and continue to the main cable pathway for the building; usually a cable basket tray.
• Surface raceways should never be the first choice of pathway for extending cable down a wall.
In adding cable to a finished building when possible wall cavities shall be fished to extend cable
to a location. A cut in box or old house box shall be used to attach a faceplate to a dry wall
where cable has been fished through the wall.
• When the wall is unable to be fished the accepted pathway product to use is Wiremold brand
2300 series non-metallic raceway. This raceway shall be electric ivory in color. Components of
this raceway system that must be used include but are not limited to the following:
o Wiremold 2300 Series 5' length pieces
0 2300 Series Entrance End Fitting for butting raceways up to ceiling
0 2300 Series Join Covers to cover all seams in raceway installations
0 2300 Series Deep Device Box for surface mount box installations
o 2300 Series Flat Elbow
o 2300 Series Inside Elbow
o 2300 Series Outside Elbow
• Wiremold 2300 Series raceway shall be installed using wall anchors and not the sticky adhesive
backing.
• The maximum number of cables to be fit in Wiremold 2300 Series raceway is 8.
• All locations in raceway or not in raceway shall extend to the same off the floor distance as the
rest of the power outlets and data outlets in the room unless otherwise specified.
• All raceway installations shall be straight and neat with no exposed cable to be seen.
7.2 Guidelines for Using Basket Style Cable Trays
• Basket Trays are the preferred method of pathway for extending large amounts of cable for long
distances. The preferred model of tray in new constructions shall be CPI FastTrak with all of its
interconnecting components.
• In new constructions basket trays should follow main hallways or corridors that are routes for
large amounts of cable.
• Basket trays shall be installed with a minimum of 12" of clearance of lighting fixtures in ceilings.
• Basket trays and all cable supports shall never make contact with the ceiling grid or use the
ceiling grid support wires for extra support.
• In new construction conduits shall be extended from the location on the wall to a basket tray to
carry the cable the rest of the distance back to the TR.
• Wire ties shall not be used to fasten cables to basket trays.
• Cables shall not route tightly around basket tray intersections and corners, but rather loop
gradually with slack around the corners.
16
• Trays in the ceiling shall be securely fastened to structurally sound members in the ceiling to
avoid sagging and swaying of tray.
• Rough cut and Sharp edges on basket tray shall be filed off to avoid future injury to workers
installing cables.
• Basket trays shall be sized appropriately for the amount of cable they will be supporting. Over
or undersized basket trays will not be acceptable.
• Basket trays installed for support of network cables shall only be used for that purpose. Basket
trays shall not be used as support for other types of ceiling infrastructure.
7.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Runs in Conduits
In new construction conduits shall be used to extend cable runs from their location on the wall
to a cable tray or to the TR.
Conduits feeding cable from cable tray shall extend 2" to 3" inches into the tray.
All conduits installed for the purpose of providing pathway for horizontal cable shall be at least
1" inside diameter regardless of the number of cables called for at the immediate install. Larger
than 1" trade size conduit shall be installed based on cable counts in reference to the table
below.
Inside
Diameter
MM
Trete
$ILe
3.3
(0.13)
4.6
(0.18)
5.6
(0.22)
Cable Outside Diameter
mm (in)
8.1 7A 7.9 9.4
(0.24) (0.29) (0.31) (0.37)
13.5
(0.53)
15.8
(0.82)
1Z8
(0.70)
16
1r2
1
1
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
21
3!4
6
5
4
3
2 2
1
0
0
0
27
1
8
8
7
6
3 3
2
1
0
1.1/4
18
14
12
10
8 4
3
1
1
1
t
41
41
b12
20
18
18
16
7 6
4
2
1
1
53
2
30
28
22
20
14 12
7
4
3
2
63
2.1/2
45
40
36
30
17 14
12
8
3
3
78
3
70
60
g0
40
20 20
17
7
9
B
91
3-112
22
12
7
6
103
4
30
14
12
7
• No more than 6 cables shall be installed in a 1" inside diameter conduit.
• All conduit ends shall be fitted with a plastic bushing.
• Conduit runs shall be installed with appropriate pull boxes and bends that do not exceed 90
degrees for ease and ability of pulling cable.
• Conduits that do not have cable immediately installed shall be equipped with a pull line for
future cable installation.
• Open conduits shall be stopped with fire -stopping putty or caulk in accordance to UL 1479 and
ASTM E814.
7.4 Guidelines for J -Hooks and Cable Saddles as Cable Support
J -Hooks are an acceptable pathway for cable only when a basket tray is not able to be installed,
or doesn't make sense to install because of space and or accessibility limitations.
17
• Erico Caddy CAT32 and CAT425 are the preferred model of cable support to be used on the BYU-
Idaho campus.
• Minimum J -Hook size shall be 2 inches.
• Cable retaining clips shall be installed with all 1 -Hooks to prevent cables from falling out of the
hooks
• Hooks and cable saddles shall be properly and securely fastened using angle hanging brackets
and or beam clamps.
• J -Hooks and or saddles shall be installed every 4' to 5'. With a staggered distance between 4'
and 5' to avoid a harmonic anomaly in the data signal.
• 3 Velcro tie wraps shall be installed between each J -Hook or saddle maintaining a neat and
contained bundle of cable.
• Grid wire, sprinkler pipe, electrical conduit, HVAC duct work, ceiling grid, and ceiling tile are
never acceptable fasteners or supports for cabling.
Section 8: Testing and Test Reports
8.1 Guidelines for Testing
• All Category 6 and 6A horizontal station cables and singlemode and multimode fiber optic cables
shall be tested using Fluke DTX 1800 Cable Analyzer. Contractors who wish to use other test
equipment may do so only with the approval of representatives of IT Infrastructure.
• The Fluke DTX 1800 used for testing shall be within 1 year of its most recent calibration to be
used for certifying cable on campus.
• The Fluke DTX 1800 shall be updated with the latest firmware when testing on our campus.
• The Fluke DTX 1800 shall be set to the SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed cable Auto testing mode.
• Horizontal copper cabling shall be tested only after the finishing faceplate has been put in place.
If for any reason the faceplate is removed and replaced, all horizontal cables at the location shall
be tested and certified again.
• No cable installation is considered finished until a passing test result is achieved.
• Copper riser and backbone pairs shall be tested using a DC continuity test.
• Fiber optic cabling shall be tested in both directions using the correctly referenced and
calibrated Fluke DTX 1800 with fiber modules corresponding to the mode of fiber under test.
• Multimode fiber shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelengths.
• Singlemode fiber shall be tested at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths.
• Each strand's splice loss shall be no greater than 0.2 db. This shall not be an average measure of
all strands tested, but an individual strand requirement.
• Loss per mated connector shall be 0.6 db or less for acceptance. This shall not be an average
measure of all strands tested, but an individual strand requirement.
• No sampling testing will be allowed. All cables installed shall be tested and submitted.
11M
8.2 Guidelines for Submission of Test Reports
• The individual PASS test files shall be saved as the label of the cable that was tested.
• An electronic copy of the test results shall be submitted to a representative of IT Infrastructure
before the install shall be considered complete.
• Test results shall be submitted as .FLW file format for viewing with use of the Fluke Linkware
software.
• On new constructions, as part of the test result submission a certificate noting a Certified
SYSTIMAX install has been performed shall also be submitted by the contractor who did the
installation.
Section 9: Labeling of Copper and Fiber Optic Cabling
Labeling is a crucial component of a finish cable install. Labeling shall be consistent in all building across
campus. An install will not be accepted until cables are properly labeled.
9.1 Labeling Copper Horizontal Station Cables, Backbone Cables, and
Riser Cables
• All labels shall be printed. No hand written labels will be accepted.
• Station cables shall have a wrap style label on the cable jacket behind the faceplate within 1" of
the termination to the jack, and another identical label that is on the jacket 1" from the
termination on the patch panel. This label shall be printed off from a professional model labeler
such as P -Touch, Brady, or Dyno Labeler.
• Installers shall consistently follow the BYU-Idaho cable labeling schemes for copper cables. New
methods and or schemes of cable labeling will not be allowed.
• Labels on SYSTIMAX patch panels shall be inserted into the plastic label holder accessory
available through SYSTIMAX. Gluing, taping, or hanging labels on patch panels will not be
accepted.
• Labels on SYSTIMAX faceplates shall be printed. They shall also neatly and squarely be installed
behind the clear plastic window on the top or far left of the faceplate. The second clear plastic
window shall be inserted in the bottom or right side position available. This label shall have the
TR room number that the cable terminates in. The opaque window strip provided in the
SYSTIMAX faceplate kit shall not be used.
• Backbone cable pairs shall be labeled at the patch panel where they terminate. They shall be
labeled with the four digit call out number that corresponds with its identifying label on the
Smith Building end of the cable. Coordination with BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure personnel shall
be made to determine the sequence of numbers to use.
19
• Backbone cable jackets shall be labeled with their pair sequences as the leave splice cases in
utility vaults.
9.2 Example of Labeling Horizontal Station Cable Faceplates
in reference to faceplate diagram below
• AAA = 3 letter building designation. Each building has a 2 or 3 letter designator. Consult with a
representative of BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure to know the correct building designator.
• ### = Room number that cable location is in. Sometimes a room has a letter designator to go
along with the room number. This letter designator shall be part of the faceplate label.
• 1= Position of faceplate in the room. Rooms with multiple faceplates shall be labeled starting
with the location to the left of the main entrance of the room and rotate around the room
clockwise. A room with three separate face plates would be labeled 1 through 3 clockwise going
around the room.
• ABC = Letter designator for position of individual cable in faceplate.
• An example of a real face plate label could be: TAY -224-1 (this is only an example and shall not
be used verbatim on future installations)
raa�xexi-J
tJ LJ nB nc
0
AMaItA'-t-J
OE) �❑ C
a
9.3 Guidelines for Labeling of Fiber Optic Cables
• A label shall be applied that calls out each strand in a fiber optic cable.
Labels shall be left hanging in the front of the LIU on both ends of the fiber cable.
• Fiber labels shall match on both ends of the fiber.
20
Jackets of fiber optic cables shall be wrap labeled with their sequence and range where they
leave a splice case in the utility vault.
9.4 Example of Labeling Fiber Optic Cabling
AAA -###-BSM -12 3
• AAA = 3 letter building designation. Each building has a 2 or 3 letter designator. Consult with a
representative of BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure to know the correct building designator.
• ### = Designates the TR room or the Entrance Facility where the far end of the fiber is
terminated.
• BSM = Backbone Single Mode. This calls out the mode of the fiber and distinguishes the cable as
either backbone or riser fiber. A fiber designated for Multi Mode Riser use would be RMM for
Riser Multi Mode.
• 123 = Designates the strand count. This would be 123rd strand in that sequence.
• An example of a real single mode backbone fiber 8th strand label in the Taylor building TR might
be: TAY -107 -BSM -008. (this is only an example and shall not be used verbatim on future
installations)
Section 10: Demolition of Cabling and Infrastructure
Cables are typically considered a valuable resource even when they are not connecting a current
network device. Cables that are not connecting devices usually shall be left terminated in place for
possible future use. Arbitrary demolition of cable simply because they are not currently being used shall
not occur. In the event of a remodel or reworking of a space it often becomes necessary to remove old
cabling or unused cabling from a building. When a cabling system becomes outdated and due for
upgrade, the old cabling system must be completely demolished and removed.
10.1 Guidelines for Cable Demolition
• Cable that is to be demolished shall be completely removed end to end. No remnants of the
cable shall be left in the ceilings, walls, pull boxes, or device boxes.
• When a cable system is upgraded no left over components of the old system shall be savaged
and used in the new system. This includes jacks, patch panels, and cable lengths.
• When a contractor is commissioned to do demolition work that contractor shall be responsible
for the complete demo and discard of all aspects of the infrastructure to be demolished.
• Any damage by a contractor to infrastructure during the demolition process shall be the
responsibility of that contractor.
21
• In the event of a building re -cable the cable demo and new cable installation shall be closely
coordinated with representatives of IT Infrastructure to minimize and or mitigate down time to
connected users of the cables in question.
Section 11: Miscellaneous
• BYU-Idaho adheres to any new standards and codes that may be applicable that are not a
current part of this document. Anyone doing work on the BYU-Idaho cable plant is expected to
follow above mentioned new codes and standards.
• BYU-Idaho considers all standards, codes, and best practices applicable that are outlined in the
BICSI Publication TDMM 12. (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 12th Release)
• Any exceptions or suggestions that deviate from this standard must be discussed with and
approved by members of the BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team.
• The BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team desires to take a roll in the overall design of cabling
solutions and network systems of new constructions in conjunction with contracted engineers.
The IT Infrastructure team shall design TR layout, information outlet locations, and network
equipment placement strategies.
• Those who shall understand and adhere to this document include:
o All employees of a cabling contractor doing work on the campus of BYU-Idaho.
o All technical staff of BYU-Idaho that may have dealings in the cable plant.
o All involved with the design, consulting, and implementation of new construction.
Yia
Approved Contractors
Cache Valley Electric
2345 South John Henry Drive
Salt Lake City, LIT 84119
Contact: Brad Christensen
Phone: 801-908-4179
Mobile: 801-870-7198
System Tech Inc.
2854 Featherly Way
Boise, ID 83709
Contact: Jaren Layton
Phone 208-709-7521
23
Verification Sheet
I have read and understand the BYU-Idaho Cabling
Standard. I agree to use this standard along with all applicable local codes and standards in
designing, installing and maintaining the cabling infrastructure of BYU-Idaho. I understand that
any questions regarding this code should be directed to members of the BYU-Idaho IT
Infrastructure team. I also understand that suggestions of changes or new ideas must be
reviewed and accepted by members of the BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team.
Signature
Verification can be sent to:
Travis Williams
525 S. Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83460
Phone: 208-496-7097
Mobile: 208-709-2192
williamstr@byui.edu
24
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 26 6411 -AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART1 GENERAL
A. The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials
and services to furnish and install a complete fire alarm system of the addressable, analog non -
coded general alarm type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and memory
specifically tailored for this installation. All equipment herein specified shall comply with application
standards of Underwriters Laboratories, the National Fire Protection Association and local
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Location of the controls, alarm initiating devices, and alarm indicating devices shall be as shown
on the prints.
C. Electrical Contractor shall include in this bid $3000.00 cash allowance and ten man hours for
miscellaneous additions and/or requirements imposed by local authority having jurisdiction.
1.01 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Installation shall be in accordance with UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES listings, the
manufacturer's recommendations, these specifications and the following standards:
1. NFPA 70 -The National Electrical Code
2. NFPA 72 -Chapters 1 through 9
3. IBC 2009
4. IFC 2009
5. Authorities having jurisdiction
B. Fire Alarm System shall be installed per Data Sheet 5-40, Fire Alarm Systems. The fire alarm
system and all related equipment shall be approved by FM Global.
1.02 GUARANTEE
A. All equipment and systems shall be guaranteed by the contractor for a period of three years
following acceptance by the owner. The guarantee shall include all parts, labor, prompt field
service, pickup, installation and delivery.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of fire alarm and detection equipment
and accessories of the types and sizes required.
B. Installer: The contractor for the automatic fire alarm system shall be a duly licensed fire alarm
contractor by the state of Idaho. The contractor must by regularly engaged in the installation,
testing and maintenance of automatic fire alarm and detection systems. The contractor shall be
fully familiar with all local conditions, codes and requirements.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment
provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Sprinkler waterflow, and supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed by the plumbing
contractor, but wired and connected by the electrical contractor.
2. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, installed wired and connected by the Electrical
Contractor. The contractor shall also furnish necessary duct openings to install the duct
smoke detectors. Provide a monitor module per duct detector and a control module for each
HVAC unit for fire alarm shut down.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUITING GUIDELINES
A. Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but device loading is
not to exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop shall
have Class B operation.
B. Where it is necessary to interface conventional initiating devices provide intelligent input modules
to supervise zone wiring.
C. Each of the following types of devices or equipment shall be provided with supervised circuits as
shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows:
1. Sprinkler valve supervisory switches: Provide one (1) supervisory module circuit for each
sprinkler valve supervisory switch or flow.
2. Emergency generator: provide two (2) supervisory module circuits: one (1) for "Emergency
Generator one"; one (1) for "Fire Pump Power Failure".
3. Dry pipe/deluge sprinkler release valves: Provide one (1) releasing module circuit for each dry
pipe/deluge sprinkler release valve.
4. Computer room smoke alarm control panels: Provide one (1) alarm module circuit for each
computer room smoke alarm control panel.
5. Kitchen hood suppressor system.
D. Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on the
drawings but shall be typically as follows:
1. Audible signals: provide one (1) notification appliance circuit for each twelve (12) alarm bells,
horn strobes, horns, and chimes.
E. Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall be
provided with a form 'C' control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as
follows:
1. HVAC fan systems: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each
HVAC fan system.
2. HVAC supply fans: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each
HVAC supply fan.
3. HVAC return fans: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each HVAC
return fan. .
4. HVAC exhaust systems: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each
HVAC exhaust fan as required.
2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system database
as an event.
1. The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal Display the first
event of the highest priority by type. The priorities and types shall be alarm, supervisory,
trouble, and monitor.
2. The system shall have a labeled color coded indicator for each type of event; alarm -red,
supervisory - yellow, trouble - yellow, monitor - green which shall turn on when active events
exist.
3. For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of events, the type
of event, the time the event occurred and up to a 40 character custom user description.
4. The user shall be able to silence the local signal and review each event by simply selecting
scrolling keys (up -down) for each event type.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
5. New supervisory or trouble events shall sound a silence -able signal at the control panel.
B. Operation of any Alarm initiating device shall automatically:
1. Update the control/display as described above (2.02, A).
2. Sound all alarm signals throughout the building as the evacuation rate.
3. Turn on all strobe lights throughout the building.
4. Turn on a red alarm zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.
5. Operate the alarm relay contacts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a central station
agency via leased telephone lines.
6. Operate addressable control relay contacts to shutdown all HVAC units serving floor of alarm.
7. Operate control relay contacts to return all elevators that serve the floor of alarm initiation to
the ground floor. If the alarm originates from the ground floor, operate control circuits contacts
to return all elevators to the floor above or to a level as directed by the local fire department.
8. Operate control relay contacts to release all magnetically held smoke doors throughout the
building.
9. Visually annunciate the zone of alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual indication
shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
C. Activation of a sprinkler supervisory initiating device shall:
1. Update the control/display as described above and turn on the trouble relay.
2. Turn on a yellow zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.
3. Operate the supervisory relay contacts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a central
station agency via leased telephone lines.
4. Visually annunciate the zone of alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual indication
shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
D. The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and
report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds or disarrangement of
system wiring and shorts across alarm bell/strobe wiring shall automatically.
1. Update the control/display as described above (2.02, A).
2. Operate the supervisory relay contracts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a central
station agency via leased telephone lines.
3. Visually and audibly annunciate a general trouble condition, on the remote annunciator panel.
The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is repaired.
2.03 SUPPORT FOR INSTALLER AND OWNER MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a coded one man walk test feature. Allow audible or silent testing. Signal alarms and
troubles during test. Allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations for alarms from areas not
under test.
B. Provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to display/report the
power, communication, and general status of specific panel components, detectors, and modules.
C. Provide loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault, and Class A
fault. Addressable loop faults include device type changes by location, device additions/deletions
and conventional open, short, and ground conditions.
D. Allow the user to display/report the condition of addressable analog detectors. Include device
address, device type, percent obscuration, and current sensitivity indicator. The sensitivity
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
indicator shall provide the user with a measure of contamination of a device upon which cleaning
decisions can confidently be made.
E. Allow the user to report history for alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, smoke verification, and
restore activity. Include Facility Name, and the time and date of the History Report.
F. Allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, timers and sequences. Protect the
disable function with a password.
G. Allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions and sequences.
H. Allow the service user to enter time and date, reconfigure an external port for download
programming, initiate auto programming and change passwords. Protect these functions with a
password.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS &INSTALLERS
A. The catalog numbers used are those of FCI Inc. and constitute the type and quality of equipment
to be furnished. Acceptable manufacturers are: FCI, by Nelson Fire Systems, No Substitution. To
meet the following specifications.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Fire Alarm Control Panel:
1. The fire alarm control panels shall be Fire Control Instruments (FCI) E3 with Focal Point
Module and shall be a complete networked fire alarm system, with all wiring, programming,
and connections as described on the drawings and this document. The networked system
shall be wired in a supervised, 2 -wire fashion. The network shall include the capability of
utilizing either twisted pair wiring, a pair of fiber optic cables up to 200 microns, or both, to
maximize flexibility in system configuration. The system shall be a true peer to peer network
and shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, and necessary modules and components
in a semi -flush mounted cabinet. The operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall
be located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and
all zone locations shall be identified. The assembly shall contain a base panel, system power
supply and battery charger with optional modules suitable to meet the requirements of these
specifications. The control panels shall have the capability to accept firmware upgrades via
connecting with a laptop computer, without the requirement of replacing microchips.
2. System circuits shall be configured as follow: Addressable analog loops Class B; Notification
Appliance Circuits Class B.
3. Single stage operation.
4. The system shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with expansion
modules to serve up to 198 detectors and 196 remote modules, and multiple notification
appliance circuits (NACs) convertible to power risers to serve remote multiple NAC modules
for zoned signal applications.
5. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile
memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact.
6. The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address all
system devices and provide a minimum default single stage alarm system operation with
support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.
7. The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program by means of a Field
Configuration Program (FCP). It shall support programming of any input point to any output
point.
8. The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following
operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, environmental compensation, pre -
alarm, normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator bases.
9. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for
placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of "same type" devices
without the need of addressing and impose the swapping of the "location" parameters on
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop and
clear the trouble when the new device is addressed and defined into the system.
10. The system shall automatically test each analog smoke sensor a minimum of three times
daily. Failure of a sensor shall activate the system trouble circuitry, display a "test failed"
indication, and identify the individual unit.
11. The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100%
compliment of detector isolator bases.
12. All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or
removed.
13. The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.
14. The system evacuation signal rate shall be Temporal pattern.
15. Provide a signal silence inhibit feature set to enter integer time between 0-99 minutes and an
automatic signal silence timer set to enter integer time between 0-99 minutes. Audible
notification appliances shall be affected by signal features.
16. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and standards,
and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
17. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations.
18. The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to
automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic
battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. All outputs shall be power limited.
The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal
current plus general alarm for 5 minutes.
19. The LCD Display shall be membrane style construction with a 2 line by 40 character Liquid
Crystal Display. The LCD shall use backlighting for high contract visual clarity. In the normal
mode display the time, the date, and provide 40 characters of user defined text. In the alarm
mode display space for user custom messages. The module shall have visual indicators for
the following common control functions; AC Power, alarm, supervisory, trouble, disable,
ground fault, cpu fail, and test. There shall be common control keys and visual indictors for;
reset alarm, silence, trouble silence, and drill. Provide Three pairs of display control keys for
selection of event display by type (alarm, supervisory, and trouble) and forward/backward
scrolling through event listings. The operation of these keys shall be integrated with the
related common control indicators to flash the indicators when undisplayed events are
available for display and turn on steady when all events have been displayed. Allow the first
event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire fighters can view
the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system function keys; status, reports, enable,
disable, activate, restore, program, and test. The module shall have a numeric keypad, zero
through nine with delete and enter keys.
20. The Basic System Module shall contain the power supply, microprocessor, memory, system
operating software stored on a non-volatile EPROM, system configuration memory stored on a
non-volatile EEPROM, and the circuits necessary to support a fire alarm system. Volatile
memory shall not be acceptable. The module shall function as the system control center,
processing all messages from the field devices (supervisory, trouble, alarm). The
microprocessor shall execute all supervisory programming to detect and report the failure or
disconnection of any module or peripheral device.
The microprocessor shall access the system program, for all control -by -event (CBE) functions.
The system program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and secondary power. The
basic system module shall provide communication with all analog/addressable devices
(initiation/control) connected to the 7100 via two (2) signaling line circuits. Each signaling line
circuit shall communicate with a maximum of ninety-nine (99) analog sensors and ninety-eight
(98) addressable monitor/control devices.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -5
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
The basic system module shall contain a real-time clock capable of monitoring all real-time I
programming and all time control functions.
21. Two independent notification appliance circuits shall be provided on the basic module,
polarized and rated at 1.5 amperes DC per circuit, individually overcurrent protected and
supervised for opens, grounds, and short circuits.
22. Operate a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) mounted in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel for automatic transmission of the specific zone AlarmrTrouble to a Digital Alarm
Communicator Receiver station. The DACT shall support dual telephone lines, 20 PPS 3/2,
4/2 or ADEMCO Contact ID communications and configure for dual tone multi -frequency
(DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to delay AC power failure reports, and auto test
call. Selection of a central monitoring station agency, it's equipment, its fees and fees for
telephone lines are the responsibility of the owner or his representative.
B. Peripheral Devices
1. Analog Ionization Smoke Sensor, FCI model ASD -IL
a. Analog ionization sensors shall have a low profile and contain dual ionization chambers.
Each sensor shall be capable of being set at seven (7) sensitivity settings ranging from
3.0 to 1.0 %/ft equivalent obscuration, with a predefined setting of 3.0%.
b. Automatic and manual functional sensitivity and performance tests shall be possible on
all sensors without the need for generating smoke.
c. Two LED's providing 360- degree visibility of operating status and alarm indication shall
be provided on each sensor. The LED's shall pulse periodically indicating that the sensor
is receiving power and communication is taking place. This feature shall be field
programmable. Upon alarm, these LED's shall light continuously. An alarm output shall
be available for remote annunciation.
d. The system shall check the sensitivity of each sensor periodically. If a sensor alarm
threshold sensitivity has changed, due to aging and/or dust accumulation, the system
shall automatically compensate for this change (drift compensation).
e. Each sensor shall allow for setting of two sensitivity levels. These levels may be
programmed so that when the building is occupied, a sensor will be less sensitive than
when the building is unoccupied. This feature permits the sensors to be more reliable
and at the same time reduces/minimizes unwanted alarms. This feature shall also
incorporate programmable weekend days, where the sensor will remain at unoccupied
sensitivity levels.
f. The sensor screen and cover assembly shall be removable for field cleaning.
2. Addressable Thermal Sensor, FCI model ATD-RL
a. Addressable thermal sensors shall have a low profile and operate on the combination
"rate of rise" and "fixed temperature" principles with the fixed temperature set point at
135 degrees F. They shall contain dual thermistor sensing circuitry for fast response.
b. Two LED's providing 360- degree visibility of operating status and alarm indication shall
be provided on each sensor. The LED's shall pulse periodically indicating that the sensor
is receiving power and communication is taking place. This feature shall be field
programmable. Upon alarm, these LED's shall light continuously. An alarm output shall
be available for remote annunciation.
3. Monitor Modules
a. Addressable Monitor Module, AMM -2
An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit wired Class B, Style B shall be
furnished to provide an address for individual, normally open (N.O.) contact devices.
b. Addressable Dual Monitor Module, AMM -21
An addressable monitor module with two (2) initiating circuits wired Class B, Style B shall
be furnished to provide two addresses for individual, normally open (N.O.) contact
devices.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -6
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Addressable Monitor Module, AMM -4S
An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit capable of being configured with
Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B shall be furnished to provide an address for an
individual, normally open (N.O.) contact device, or a collective address for a group of
such devices.
The AMM -4 module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent mode
and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide
quiescent status indication, if so desired.
d. Addressable Subloop Monitor Module, AMM -4S
An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit capable of being configured eith
Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B shall be furnished to provide a collective address for
up to twenty (20) conventional two -wire smoke detectors.
The AMM -4S module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent mode
and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide
quiescent status indication, if so desired.
e. Addressable Output Module. AOM•2R/S
An addressable output module shall be connected to the same signaling line circuit as the
analog/addressable monitor devices and shall provide a DPDT relay output (2
form "C" 2 amp @ 24 VDC, resistive only) for the AOM -2R. The AOM -2S shall provide a
notification appliance circuit output (1 amp @ 24 VDC, requiring separate power input) or
a solenoid energizing circuit or releasing service.
The AOM-2R/S module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent
mode and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to
provide quiescent status indication, if so desired.
f. Fault Isolator Module, Model (M500X)
This module enables part of the signaling line circuit to continue operating when a short
circuit occurs on a section of it. An LED flashes in the normal condition and lights during
a short circuit condition. The module automatically restored the entire circuit to the
normal condition when the short circuit is removed. This module may be used in multiple
ways, in any combination with other modules, providing circuit operation similar to that of
NFPA Style 7. It does not require an address on the signaling line circuit.
4. Manual Fire Alarm Station, MS -2
a. Furnish and install a manual station (MS -2) as indicated. Each station shall be of the non -
coded, double action type, requiring an outer door to be lifted to expose the actuator door.
Upon pulling forward of the actuator door, the unit shall lock into a readily observable
"alarm" position.
b. The station shall be constructed of aluminum (6063/T5), equipped with a break glass rod
feature, and require a key to reset. This key shall be keyed alike with the control cabinet.
The stations shall employ a highly reliable action to activate an alarm. This feature shall
provide an exceptionally high resistance to accidental operation.
5. Duct Smoke Detector, ASD-RP200
a. A duct smoke detector shall be furnished and installed where required on HVAC units.
Each duct smoke detector shall be provided with two (2) form "C" relay rated @ 10
amperes.
b. The ASD-RP200 shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent mode and
light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide
quiescent status indication, if so desired.
C. FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans:
a. Horns shall be manufactured by Wheelock, NS series. In -Out Screw terminals shall be
provided for wiring. A sound output level of 103 dBA Peak shall be provided.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -7
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
b. Horn/Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, NS series, model NS24-MCW-FW.
They shall provide synchronized flash strobe output, and 100 dBA Peak sound output j
level from the horn. Provide strobe outputs as indicated on drawing.
c. Mini-Horn/Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, MIZ series. They shall provide
strobe output, and 91 dBA Peak sound level output from the horn. Provide strobe outputs
as indicated on drawing.
d. Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, RSS series. They shall provide
synchronized flash output. Provide strobe outputs as indicated on drawing.
e. Speaker/Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, E70 series for wall mount
applications and Wheelock E90 series for ceiling mount applications. In -Out screw
terminals shall be provided for wiring. Provide speaker/strobes as indicated on the
drawings.
f. All notification appliances shall be white in color with red lettering.
D. FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE POWER BOOSTER, FCI Model SNAC-4
1. Furnish and install where shown on plans;
a. Furnish and install FCI SNAC-4 power booster for surface or semi -flush mounting as
shown on the plans. The power booster shall have four (4) Class'A' or Class 'B'circuits.
The power booster shall use a switching power supply. The output circuits may be
activated in groups of two or four at a time. The power booster shall be fully supervised
for ground faults, short circuits, open circuits, and low battery. Any fault condition shall
transmit a trouble signal to the main panel. The power booster shall have an integral
battery charger. The power booster shall have a 10 hour delay on transmission of trouble
for AC power failure.
E. ANCILLARY DEVICES;
1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans;
a. Furnish and install magnetic door holder, FCI FM series, for flush wall mounting as
shown on the plans. The housings and contact plates shall have a brushed zinc finish. All
units shall have a holding of force of approximately 25 Ib. ft.
F. Tie panel to direct phone line for control station monitoring.
2.06 AUDIO EVACUATION SUBSYSTEM
A. Provide a tone and voice evacuation fire alarm subsystem as indicated below. The system shall be
an extension of and integral part of the building fire alarm system. This subsystem shall be
activated, monitored, and controlled by the building fire alarm system. This subsystem shall be
U.L. listed with the fire alarm system as one system. It shall not be a stand alone evac system not
listed with the FACP.
B. The subsystem shall be provided with a tone and voice evacuation control panel to be located as
shown on the drawings. 100 watts minimum rms audio amplifiers shall be provided along with all
necessary 24 volt DC power supplies. Provide battery back up as required in other sections of the
specification.
C. This subsystem shall be provided with the following features and functions.
1. Supervised System Microphone
2. Built-in Tone Generator
3. Minimum 3.5 Amp regulated Power Supply with battery charger
4. Two Digital 50 watt Audio Amplifiers
5. 25 volt rms Audio output
6. Auxiliary Audio input for Public Address Microphone
7. Minimum two supervised Speaker Circuits expandable to a total of 6 Circuits
8. All -Call -Switch
9. Trouble Silence Switch
10. Remote Reset Input
D. System shall be provided with a Digital Message Repeater. This module shall provide pre-recorded
voice evacuation messages and tones. System shall provide for an alert tone followed by a
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-8
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
programmed message with the message repeated up to 7 times. The message shall be followed
by a temporal alarm tone.
2.07 RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM
A. Receiver/Gateway System, Radionics Model 6600.
The supplier shall provide as indicated within this specification a Radionics 6600 Digital Alarm
Communicator Receiver (DACR). Monitoring Automation Software Package; Phoenix 2000
Desktop
B. The supplier shall provide as indicated within this specification a Phoenix 2000 Desktop
automation software package including all necessary on-site and off-site training. The automation
software shall be installed on a supplier provided computer station which shall meet the
specifications provided herein. The computer shall be installed per the owners specified location.
B. The Receiver/Gateway specified herein shall incorporate Digital Signaling Processing (DSP)
techniques to receive and analyze different communication data formats, receive multiple formats
from multiple communication paths and provide the flexibility to handle a wide range of
communication requirements.
1. RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM FEATURE/CAPABILITY SUMMARY
The following indicates system software/hardware capabilities, capacities and formats:
Telephone Network (PSTN) Communications: The Telephone Network (PTSN)
Communications shall include the following features:
a. Receives signals on up to 32 phone lines simultaneously
b. Independently configurable communication format settings for each phone line
c. A standard of 4 phone lines per card for each line card
d. Visual front panel LED indicators for on-line and line -fault status conditions. LANIWAN
Gateway Communications:
2. The LAN/WAN Gateway Communications shall include the following features:
a. Supervised network automation computer links
b. Supports up to 3200 network accounts (depending on supervision interval)
c. Supports Ethernet or Token Ring configurations
3. Programming Software: The Programming Software shall include the following features:
a. Serial or LAN/WAN connection with Receiver/Gateway
b. Fully configurable user authority level control
c. Receiver/Gateway parameter editing and storage
d. Receiver/Gateway software upgrade ability
e. Event history buffer uploading
4. Central Processing Unit (CPU): The CPU shall include the following features:
a. Re -programmable FLASH memory for software upgrades and future product
enhancements
b. Direct interface to automation computers
c. Event acknowledgement can be automation or manual push-button
d. 10,000 event history buffer
5. Inputs and Outputs: The Inputs and Outputs shall include the following features:
a. Three serial ports
1. RS232 - DB9 connector
2. 2 Com ports - standard
3. 1 Com port—optional
b. One parallel port
1. DB25 connector
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -9
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
c. Two programmable inputs
d. Two programmable outputs
e. 1/0 signals isolation and transient suppression
6. Separate telephone line terminator cards for isolation and transient suppression
7. Front panel LCD display for manually reviewing status and event information
8. Front panel access for easy service of CPU card and line cards
9. PC-based platform design for future expandability
2.08 RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
A. All Installations: The Receiver/Gateway shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical
Code, the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72 and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B. UL Installations: The Receiver/Gateway shall be installed in accordance with the following UL
requirements:
1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 827 requires that any central station listed for NFPA
72, Central Station Protective Signaling, UL Central Station Burglary and/or Police Station
Connect Service must have a redundant receiver on premises to be used in the event
that the primary receiver malfunctions.
2.. UL Standard 827 also states that the Receiver/Gateway operator must be able to switch from
one receiver to a standby receiver within 30 seconds.
3. NFPA 72 requires that if more than eight telco lines are used, then receiving equipment must
be completely duplicated so switch -over can be accomplished in 30 seconds. (Per NFPA 72-
1996 4-5.3.2.2.1.1)
4. Burglar Alarm Applications: The Receiver/Gateway is intended to be installed in accordance
with UL Standard 827 for Central Station Burglar Alarm Systems. To supervise certificated
accounts, this receiver must be used in a central station that has backup AC power per UL
827.
5. Fire Alarm Applications: The Receiver/Gateway is suitable for Central Station Signaling when
it is installed and used in compliance with NFPA 72.
C. SYSTEM HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
1. Receiver/Gateway System: The Receiver/Gateway shall be provided, at minimum, with the
following components. Additional accessories shall be provided based on the quantities and
features required for the application.
a. D6600 Communication Receiver/Gateway
b. D6610 CPU Card
c. D6615 CPU Terminator Card
d. D6640 Telephone Network Line Card
e. D6645 Telephone Network Line Terminator Card
D. Minimum Specifications for Automation System Management Configuration:
1. PHOENIX 2000 Desktop Software Package
2. Pentium class processor or equivalent
3. 128 MB RAM
4. 10 GB Hard Disk
5. CD ROM Drive
6. 3.5 Floppy Drive
7. 17" color monitor (1024x768 resolution)
8. Keyboard/Mouse
9. Two Serial Ports
10. 1 Parallel Port
11. 56K baud Internal Modem
12. Ethernet Network Card
13. Windows NT Workstation/Win 98/2000 Professional
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-10
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Supplier shall provide at no cost to the owner eight (8) hours minimum on-site training. Supplier
shall also provide all necessary off-site training including transportation, lodging, meals, and
training manuals.
2.09 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Upon activation of any initiating device within the building, the building fire alarm evacuation
indicating appliances shall operate. This includes the voice evacuation subsystem described
herein. Upon alarm all indication devices will activate. Upon manual command from the
annunciators or fire alarm control panel, all evacuation tones and signals will cease. Panel will
reset upon reset command initiated at fire alarm annunciators
B. The FACP shall cause any existing sound or P.A. system to cease operation while the audio Evac
system takes priority and after three rounds of the repeats the designated message until silenced
by authorized personnel.
C. The FACP shall transmit a digital signal via Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) to a
central station receiver for dispatch of appropriate personnel.
D. Voice Evacuation
1. The voice evacuation subsystem shall be provided with a microphone allowing for local paging
from the evacuation panel.
2. Provide high output UL listed fire alarm speakers as indicated on the plans. Speakers shall be
provided with aluminum projectors and shall be capable of a minimum of 116 dba sound
power at 15 watts.
3. All system components and interfaces shall be provided per UL 864.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation and
testing. All fire alarm junction boxes must be clearly marked (painted red) for easy identification.
B. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) Article 760
and the following:
1. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, panels, detectors, alarm devices, etc. shall be
mounted and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the
entire system.
2. No wiring other than that directly associated with the fire alarm and detection systems shall be
permitted inside the fire alarm conduits.
3. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the maximum extent possible, if needed, they must be
made only in junction boxes. Transposing or changing wire color coding of the wires shall not
be permitted.
3.02 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Provide one year testing and maintenance, conducted by the qualified, factory trained fire alarm
equipment supplier. The testing shall consist of the following, as a minimum:
1. Semi-annual testing of each automatic (heat, smoke) fire detector and manual fire alarm
station.
2. Semi-annual testing of each supervisory signal device.
3. Tests and written reports which certify that all initiating and indicating devices have been
tested and are operational shall be submitted bimonthly to the owner and engineer.
4. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall offer a testing and maintenance agreement providing
the same service, as described above, to commence after expiration of the above program.
B. Final test and inspection shall be held in the presence of the engineer, the owner, and the
authority having jurisdiction to their satisfaction. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall conduct
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411-11
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
the tests. The contractor shall supply the personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the
testing at no additional cost to the owner.
C. All fire detection devices shall be marked in nominal 1/2" high letters with the zone and device
number (for example 1-20, indicates zone 1, device number 20).
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. The equipment shall be manufactured by a firm having an established reputation and experience,
who shall have produced similar equipment for a period of at least five years. The equipment
supplier shall be able to refer to similar installations providing satisfactory service within the state
of Idaho.
B. Part numbers and functions described herein are used to describe the levels of quality, features,
and performance required by this specification. It is not the intent of these specifications and plans
to eliminate approved competitive equipment.
PART 4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
4.01 PRELIMINARY
A. Within thirty days after the contract award and prior to the purchase of any equipment, the fire
alarm system contractor shall submit for approval six (6) copies of the following:
1. A list of materials that are to be used on the project, including manufacturer, model number
and technical information.
2. Preliminary circuit diagrams showing interconnection of all modules, detectors, horns, panels
and wiring counts. Diagrams are to be 11" x 17" done in a good workmanlike manner.
3. Technical manuals for all of the equipment that is to be used on the project.
4. Submit shop drawings and calculations to the local authority having jurisdiction. Obtain a
written Letter of Acceptance of the proposed system. Include with shop drawings submittal to
engineer.
4.02 TESTS AND REPORTS
A. The contractor shall perform all of the electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment
manufacturer. All test reports shall be submitted as part of the Acceptance Test Procedure
required by these specifications.
4.03 FINAL
A. Before final acceptance of the work, the fire alarm system contractor shall deliver eight (8) copies
of the operating and maintenance manual of this system to the Electrical Contractor for inclusion in
the Div. 16 O & M manuals. Each manual shall contain as a minimum the following:
1. As built circuit drawing.
2. Technical manuals containing information on the testing and maintenance of all equipment.
3. Recommended testing and maintenance schedule for all equipment including a recommended
spare parts list.
4. The name, address, and telephone number of the person and/or firm to be contacted in the
event of equipment failure.
5. The one year guarantee including effective date and the equipment that is covered.
6. Provide complete FA system database on disk to be stored with the Owner's Manual at the job
site.
7. Provide complete site map with zone addresses to be posted at the FACP for quick
identification of device conditions.
8. Provide training for the Owner, at his convenience. No less than four hours of training shall be
provided.
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -12
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
9. Provide training for the owner to the extent he desires. He should be completely comfortable
with the operation of the system when training is complete.
END OF SECTION
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 266411 -13
Blank Page
w o vvn wl nlGu Vci I I1UVU111UCI /, LU 14
AUDIO SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install complete and operational sound systems as described in Contract Documents
to include all equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure
complete and operational systems.
2. Assist Audio / Video Consultant with commissioning and equalization of system and provide
necessary test equipment for sound system tests. Correct problems found at time of
commissioning of system.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 26:
a. Raceways, boxes, and fittings.
2. Audio/ Video Consultant will perform commissioning, system balance, and equalization.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before
Consultant's commissioning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Itemized list of equipment to be supplied with product data sheets in order shown on drawings
2. Shop drawings
3. System programming
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual:
a. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1) Equipment Manufacture's manual
2) Sound system operation and maintenance instructions.
3) List of equipment provided, including portable equipment, showing make, model, and
serial number.
b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include copy of final, executed warranties.
c. Record Documentation:
1) As -built drawings
2) Software and Programming: Copies of all manufacturers' software used for
programming various components and functions of the system shall be furnished to the
Owner:
a) Original source codes and compiled codes used for system control, audio setup
and any other computerized functions of the system including screen layout
generation, configuration and layouts and any other related computer files shall
also be furnished to the Owner.
b) In each and every case, all programming, code generation, configuration files,
layout files and any other software and/or code written and generated of the setup
and operation of this system are the property of the Owner of the system and not
of the consultant, contractor or integrator.
Audio Systems 275115-1
byu wano science at 1 ecnnology ou wing
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I VIlIV1IIIuu out I IVVVQIIIUCI /, LV 14
A. Qualifications:
Requirements is not limited to following:
1. Installers
Qualifications:
a. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of sound
system.
1)
Avidex: (801) 973-6483
2)
Cache Valley Electric: (801) 908-2670
3)
General Communications: (801) 266-5731
4)
Marshall Industries: (801)266-2428.
5)
Poll Sound: (801) 261-2500.
6)
Professional Systems Technology, Inc. (801)649-6696
7)
TPI: (801)702-8242
8)
Bids submitted by non -pre -qualified bidders will not be accepted.
b. Installer's Qualifications:
1)
The work of this section will be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Sound
Installer for undivided responsibility.
2)
The Sound Installer must be experienced in the installation of professional sound
systems and have completed within the past five years at least five sound system
projects of a size and scope comparable to the project described herein.
3)
The Sound Installer shall have capabilities and in-house facilities for installation, shop
fabrication and repair service of professional sound systems.
4)
The Sound Installer shall have on his full-time payroll at least one staff engineer having
five years minimum experience as an Audio engineer. In place of a qualified staff
engineer, the Sound Installer may retain a consulting engineer to direct the project.
Prior to bid acceptance, the qualifications of the consulting engineer shall be submitted
for the approval of the Audio / Video Consultant. Said staff or consulting engineer shall:
a) Provide all technical liaisons between the Sound Installer and the Consultant.
b) Represent the Sound Installer at meetings and conferences, and be present at the
job site for final inspection/
c) Be responsible for supervision of all technical and engineering work required
executing the contract, and in particular, approving and signing of all shop
drawings.
5)
Must be a dealer or distributor of equipment included in bid and provide documents
from manufacturers stating such.
6)
Outline the general scope of past project, normal staffing levels, and union status of
shop and field installation personnel.
7)
List a minimum of three (5) projects of similar scope successfully completed, indicating
the location, type of system installed, total contract amount, date completed, and
include persons and telephone number to contact.
8)
Submit confirmation of current state or local contracting licenses, as required to perform
the work under this section.
2. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
a. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of sound system components and accessories for
more than 5 years.
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty:
1. Provide complete warranty repair or replacement for one year from commissioning at no cost to
Owner, except in case of obvious abuse.
2. Honor component warranties for term established by Manufacturer if greater than one year.
3. Activate all manufacturers' equipment warranties in Owner's name to commence on the date of
acceptance.
4. Replace defective equipment and faulty workmanship within 72 hours of discovery at no cost to
the Owner during the warranty.
5. If, during the warranty period, any component is out of service for more than one week due to
unavailability of parts or service, supply and install an identical new component. If an identical
component is not available, substitute equivalent equipment, but only with approval of the Owner.
Audio Systems 275115-2
a� -•••-•••a vUiuvnucu OUL 11NVVU111UU[ r, LU 14
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Performance:
1. Capabilities:
a. Installations with equalizers shall meet following performance parameters:
1) From 100 Hz to 2 kHz, flat within plus or minus 2 dB.
2) Above 2 kHz, slope down along an approximate 3 dB per octave slope to 8 kHz.
b. No noise, hum, RFI pickup or distortion shall be audible under normal operating conditions.
c. Sound systems shall reproduce program material at level of 80 to 85 dBA without audible
distortion.
d. All input levels shall be pre-set so system may be operated without going into feedback
under normal conditions.
e. Seat -to -seat variations in the 2kHz octave band shall not exceed plus or minus 2 dB.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD COOPERATION
A. Cooperate at all times and to the fullest extent with all trades during work to the end that lost time,
work stoppages, interference, and inefficiencies do not occur.
3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of systems prior to fabrication:
1. System functional block drawings including all equipment names and model numbers.
2. Provide full scale drawings of all custom plates and panels indicating exact lettering, critical
dimensions, and finish.
3. Provide a list of test equipment, including manufacturer, description and model number of the test
equipment expected to be employed in the test and adjustment of the systems.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Verify compliance with following items before beginning work of this Section.
a. No cables spliced.
b. Isolated grounds run back to electrical panel from all equipment cabinets.
c. Specified conduit, cables, speaker enclosures and equipment cabinets are properly installed.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment
1. Provide new equipment that shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the
manufacturer in all respects as specified in the Equipment List on the drawings.
2. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment.
3. Color of devices shall be reviewed and approved by the architect.
B. Speakers:
1. Maintain uniform polarity in speakers and wiring.
2. Employ no positive stop in rotation of speaker volume controls. Controls shall be capable of
continuous rotations in either direction.
Audio Systems 275115-3
tsru mann oclence a Iecnnoiugy ouiming 1 U111Uillfuu out 1 IVUVu111VuI r, cu 14
3. Neatly mount speaker grilles, panels, connector plates, control panels, etc., tight, plumb, and
square unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
4. Aim speakers as shown on the drawings.
5. Provide adequate fastenings and supports with a safety load factor of at least three and adhere to
all seismic requirements.
C. Equipment Cabinet:
1. Install vent panels at top and bottom of equipment cabinets for maximum ventilation. Locate
amplifiers at top of cabinet if convection cooled or at the bottom if amplifier contains fans. Locate
digital signal processors in the middle of equipment cabinet, separated by several blank panels.
2. Securely fasten equipment plumb and square in place. Utilize all fastening holes in front of
cabinet.
3. Securely fasten in place equipment that is not rack mounted, including relays and other small
components. Do not use sticky -back tape.
4. Install balancing / isolation transformer when balanced and unbalanced components are
connected.
5. Wire XLR-type connections with pin 2 hot, pin 1 shield.
6. Connect powered components to 120 VAC outlets on voltage suppressors or power bars. Do not
connect to outlets on other components.
7. Identification:
a. Legibly identify user -operated system controls and system input / output jacks using
engraved, permanently attached laminated plastic plates or imprinted Lexan labels. Label
equipment and controls within equipment cabinets using similar labels or printed labels from
a label maker or laser printer.
b. Affix label to rack panel inside cabinet listing name and telephone number of installer.
Appropriate warranty instructions may be included.
D. Cables:
1. Leave sufficient service loops of uniform length on cables to allow for future equipment
replacement.
2. Make parallel connections or splices on standard barrier terminal blocks, or on equipment
terminals using appropriate connection type. Do not attach more than three wires under any one
screw terminal.
3. Strip and heat shrink tubing on wires installed in Euroblock or Phoenix connectors so 1/16 inch (2
mm) of wire is exposed outside connector when wire contacts back of connector:
a. Secure wires using screwdriver with blade of same width as screw slot and handle 3/4 inch
(19 mm) minimum diameter and of length to allow applying sufficient torque to prevent wires
from becoming disconnected.
4. Terminate conductors with proper mating connectors:
a. Do not use adapters.
b. Use proper crimp tool as recommended by Connector Manufacturer.
5. Male CAT -6 connectors shall be grey -smoked or blue -smoked RJ -45's.
a. After installing RJ -45 connectors, test CAT -6 cables for shorts, opens, and cross -pairing with
two-piece wire -mapping continuity tester.
6. Secure cables to equipment cabinet with wire ties to ensure neat installation:
7. Ground both ends of each cable shielded within equipment cabinet only. Ground microphone
cables only at mixer.
8. Label within 6" of both ends of cables with source and destination. Use Hellermann Tyton Tag
49L-105 or similar label types.
a. Example 1: PULPIT MIC: MIXER IN 1.
b. Example 2: DSP OUT B: CC1 AMP IN.
c. Group all cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal
contamination, form separate groups for the following cables:
1) Microphone cables
2) UTP, sound system control, telephone, video or ATC cables
3) Loudspeaker cables
4) Antenna cables
5) Power cables at least a foot away from the above.
9. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.
Audio Systems 275115-4
-- �, -••....•a �V1F1Unneu Jel I ivovemDer r, ZU14
10. Grommets and other devices shall be used to insure the integrity of the cable now and in the
future.
11. Bundle multiple cables in Tech Flex if in full view of the owner,
12. Use plenum rated cable, tie -wraps, and supports when conditions require it.
13. Free wire cable shall be supported every 4 feet and not lay on top of ceiling or other objects in the
plenum space.
E. Equipment installed in millwork shall be cut in with the upmost care and aesthetic value. Verify that
adequate cooling for the electronics is sufficient.
F. During installation if surfaces become damaged intentionally or unintentionally they shall be repaired in
a professional manner at no cost to the owner.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Installer Testing:
a. After completion of installation but before commissioning by Audio / Video Consultant,
perform following:
1) Conduct system tests and make necessary corrections for proper system operation
including, but not limited to, following:
a) Output level uniformity.
b) Polarity.
c) Shock, strain excited hum, and oscillation.
d) Clipping, hum, noise, and RFI in all system configurations.
e) Speaker line impedances.
f) Loose parts and poor workmanship.
2) Sweep speaker systems with high-level sine wave noise source. Correct causes of
buzzes or rattles related to speakers or enclosures. Notify Contractor and Audio /
Video Consultant of external causes of buzzes or rattles.
3) Aim speakers as shown on drawings and verify coverage.
4) Rough Balance: Balance system well enough that it can be used before
commissioning.
b. Complete documentation and submit to consultant 5 days prior to Substantial Completion.
1) Written notification with settings and as -built drawings.
2) Electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual.
B. Field commissioning:
1. Audio / Video Consultant commissioning:
a. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum
before Consultant's visit.
b. Have copy of redlined record documents available 5 days prior to Substantial Completion.
c. Have loose equipment (microphones, cables, etc.) available at time of commissioning.
d. Assist Audio / Video Consultant in the commissioning of completed systems.
e. Provide following test equipment in good working order:
1) Laptop computer, 100 MHz Pentium or better, with 16 bit sound card, software, and
interfacing adapters for microprocessor controlled equipment in system.
2) 1/12 octave real-time audio spectrum analyzer with SPL meter, and precision
microphone.
3) Digitally generated random pink noise generator, 20Hz-20KHz, minimum 2 hour
repetition rate or 10 minutes minimum of equivalent signal.
4) Direct reading audio impedance meter, minimum 3 frequencies, and 10 percent
accuracy.
5) Digital Volt -Ohmmeter.
6) Audio oscillator, variable frequency, 20 Hz to 20 KHz.
7) MP3 player, with pre-recorded speech and music program material.
8) Necessary chargers, cables, test leads, adapters, and other accessories for test
equipment.
9) Tools and spare parts for making adjustments and corrections to system.
Audio Systems 275115-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building uonrormea ser I Novemoer r, zui4
10) CAT -6 / RJ -45 continuity tester similar to Ideal 62-200 or Amprobe DCT -300.
Correct minor items so Audio / Video Consultant may certify satisfactory completion during
his visit.
C. Training
1. Provide training in the operation and maintenance of the systems by a qualified instructor or
equipment manufacture for personnel designated by the Owner.
2. Training shall be after the systems are operational but before the commissioning.
3. Provide two DVD recordings of the training to the owner.
3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. System acceptance tests shall not be performed until the initial system checkout has been completed.
The system acceptance tests shall be supervised by the Consultant and shall consist of the following:
1. Take a physical inventory of all equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract
documents.
2. Demonstrate the operation of all system equipment.
3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to determine compliance
with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified by the Consultant for these tests.
4. Provide all final, "as -built" drawings, manuals, instruction video (DVD format) and other required
documents.
B. In the event that the systems are not completely installed or further adjustment is required, or defective
equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the
Consultant. The Consultant's return trip shall be paid for by the installer prior to the Consultants return.
1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing,
continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall
include, but not be limited to, readjustment of loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system
equalizers, programming changes to the control system, if in the judgment of the Consultant,
these adjustments are required.
2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment
does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Consultant for all time and expenses of the
Consultant for these tests during any extensions of the acceptance -testing period.
3.7 CLEANUP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of the work, remove all refuse and rubbish from and about the premises daily, and
shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair any damage
caused to the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner.
3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work
against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Audio Systems 275115-6
-11 vv„ v,,,,OV JUL I ivvvcinuci 11 cV I9
VIDEO SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install complete and operational video systems as described in Contract Documents
to include all equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure
complete and operational systems.
2. Assist Audio / Video Consultant with commissioning of systems and provide necessary test
equipment for video system and partition noise isolation tests. Correct problems found at time of
commissioning of system.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 26:
a. Raceways, boxes, and fittings.
2. Audio / Video Consultant will perform commissioning, system balance, and equalization.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before
Consultant's commissioning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Itemized list of equipment to be supplied with product data sheets in order shown on drawings
2. Shop drawings
3. System programming
Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual:
a. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1) Equipment Manufacture's manual:
2) Video system operation and maintenance instructions.
3) List of equipment provided, including portable equipment, showing make, model, and
serial number.
b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include copy of final, executed warranties.
c. Record Documentation:
1) As -built drawings
2) Software and Programming: Copies of all manufacturers' software used for
programming various components and functions of the system shall be furnished to the
Owner:
a) Original source codes and compiled codes used for system control, video setup
and any other computerized functions of the system including screen layout
generation, configuration and layouts and any other related computer files shall
also be furnished to the Owner.
b) In each and every case, all programming, code generation, configuration files,
layout files and any other software and/or code written and generated of the setup
and operation of this system are the property of the Owner of the system and not
of the consultant, contractor or integrator.
Video Systems 275117-1
tSYu ioano omence a iecnnoioyy Dummy uvnwnucu oVL I INUV01 ,uc1 r, cv 1v
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
Requirements is not limited to following:
1. Installers
Qualifications:
a. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of video
system.
1)
Avidex: (801) 973-6483
2)
Cache Valley Electric: (801) 908-2670
3)
General Communications: (801) 266-5731
4)
Marshall Industries: (801)266-2428.
5)
Poll Sound: (801) 261-2500.
6)
Professional Systems Technology, Inc. (801)649-6696
7)
TPI: (801)702-8242
8)
Bids submitted by non -pre -qualified bidders will not be accepted.
b. Installer's Qualifications:
1)
The work of this section will be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Video
Installer for undivided responsibility.
2)
The Video Installer must be experienced in the installation of professional video
systems and have completed within the past five years at least five video system
projects of a size and scope comparable to the project described herein.
3)
The Video Installer shall have capabilities and in-house facilities for installation, shop
fabrication and repair service of professional video systems.
4)
The Video Installer shall have on his full-time payroll at least one staff engineer having
five years minimum experience as an Video engineer. In place of a qualified staff
engineer, the Video Installer may retain a consulting engineer to direct the project.
Prior to bid acceptance, the qualifications of the consulting engineer shall be submitted
for the approval of the Consultant. Said staff or consulting engineer shall:
a) Provide all technical liaisons between the Video Installer and the Consultant.
b) Represent the Video Installer at meetings and conferences, and be present at the
job site for final inspection/
c) Be responsible for supervision of all technical and engineering work required
executing the contract, and in particular, approving and signing of all shop
drawings.
5)
Must be a dealer or distributor of equipment included in bid and provide documents
from manufacturers stating such.
6)
Outline the general scope of past project, normal staffing levels, and union status of
shop and field installation personnel.
7)
List a minimum of three (5) projects of similar scope successfully completed, indicating
the location, type of system installed, total contract amount, date completed, and
include persons and telephone number to contact.
8)
Submit confirmation of current state or local contracting licenses, as required to perform
the work under this section.
2. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
a. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of video system components and accessories for
more than 5 years.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty:
1. Provide complete warranty repair or replacement for one year at no cost to Owner, except in case
of obvious abuse.
2. Honor component warranties for term established by Manufacturer, if greater than one year.
3. Activate all manufacturers' equipment warranties in Owner's name to commence on the date of
acceptance.
4. Replace defective equipment and faulty workmanship within 72 hours of discovery at no cost to
the Owner during the warranty.
5. If, during the warranty period, any component is out of service for more than one week due to
unavailability of parts or service, supply and install an identical new component. If an identical
component is not available, substitute equivalent equipment, but only with approval of the Owner.
Video Systems 275117-2
-' ' -- - a�-•-•••a vvnwllllou OWL I IVUVC111oer r, 4V 14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Performance:
1. Capabilities:
a. No noise, hum, RFI pickup or distortion shall be seen under normal operating conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD COOPERATION
A. Cooperate at all times, and to the fullest extent with all trades during work to the end that lost time,
work stoppages, interference, and inefficiencies do not occur.
3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of systems prior to fabrication:
1. System functional block drawings including all equipment names and model numbers.
2. Provide full scale drawings of all custom plates and panels indicating exact lettering, critical
dimensions, and finish.
3. Provide a list of test equipment, including manufacturer, description and model number of the test
equipment expected to be employed in the test and adjustment of the systems.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Verify compliance with following items before beginning work of this Section.
a. No cables spliced.
b. Isolated grounds run back to electrical panel from all equipment cabinets.
c. Specified conduit, cables, and boxes are properly installed.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment
1. Provide new equipment that shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the
manufacturer in all respects as specified in the Equipment List on the drawings.
2. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment.
3. Color of devices shall be reviewed and approved by the architect.
B. Equipment Cabinet:
1. Install vent panels at top and bottom of equipment cabinets. Securely fasten equipment plumb
and square in place. Utilize all fastening holes in front of cabinet.
2. Securely fasten in place equipment that is not rack mounted, including small components. Do not
use sticky -back tape.
3. Connect powered components to 120 VAC outlets on voltage suppressor or power bars. Do not
connect to outlets on other components.
4. Identification:
a. Legibly identify user -operated system controls and system input / output jacks using
engraved, permanently attached laminated plastic plates or imprinted Lexan labels. Label
equipment and controls within equipment cabinets using similar labels or printed labels from
a label maker or laser printer.
Video Systems 275117-3
BYU Ioano science & i ecnno ogy ttuuamg i.onrormea oet 1 rvovemoer r, Lu t4
b. Affix label to rack panel inside cabinet listing name and telephone number of installer
Appropriate warranty instructions may be included.
C. Cables:
1. Leave sufficient service loops of uniform length on cables to allow for future equipment
replacement.
2. Terminate conductors with proper mating connectors:
a. Do not use adapters.
b. Use proper crimp tool as recommended by Connector Manufacturer.
3. Secure cables to equipment cabinet with wire ties to ensure neat installation:
4. Label within 6" of both ends of cables with source and destination. Use HellermannTyton Tag
49L-105 or similar label types.
a. Example 1: PULPIT MIC: MIXER IN 1.
b. Example 2: DSP OUT B: CC1 AMP IN.
c. Group all cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal
contamination, form separate groups for the following cables:
1) Microphone cables
2) UTP, video system control, telephone, video or ATC cables
3) Loudspeaker cables
4) Antenna cables
5) Power cables at least a foot away from the above.
5. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.
6. Grommets and other devices shall be used to insure the integrity of the cable now and in the
future.
7. Bundle multiple cables in Tech Flex if in full view of the owner.
8. Use plenum rated cable tie -wraps and supports when conditions require it.
9. Free wire cable shall be supported every 4 feet and not lay on top of ceiling or other object in the
plenum space.
D. Equipment installed in millwork shall be cut in with the upmost care and aesthetic value. Verify that
adequate cooling for the electronics is sufficient.
E. During installation if surfaces become damaged intentionally or unintentionally they shall be repaired in
a professional manner.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests:
1. Installer Testing:
a. After completion of installation but before commissioning by Audio / Video Consultant,
perform following:
1) Conduct system tests and make necessary corrections for proper system operation
including, but not limited to, following:
a) Output level uniformity.
b) Polarity.
c) Shock, strain excited hum, and oscillation.
d) Hum, noise, and RFI in all system configurations.
e) Loose parts and poor workmanship.
2) Introduce test signal patterns and adjust system for highest quality.
b. Complete documentation and submit to consultant 5 days prior to Substantial Completion.
1) Written notification with settings and as -built drawings.
2) Electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual.
B. Field commissioning:
1. Audio / Video Consultant commissioning:
a. Coordinate final inspection schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum
before Consultant's visit.
b. Have copy of redlined record documents available 5 days prior to Substantial Completion.
Video Systems 275117-4
�+ -- •••a vvnIUIIIIdU JCL I IVUVUffluer r, 4ui4
c. Have loose equipment available at time of inspection.
d. Assist Audio / Video Consultant in commissioning of completed system.
e. Provide following test equipment in good working order:
1) Video test generator similar to Extron VTG 300R
2) Oscilloscope
3) Test DVD similar to Digital Video Essentials Professional Edition
4) Tools and spare parts for making adjustments and corrections to system.
5) Blank cassette tape for testing cassette recorder.
6) CAT -6 / RJ -45 continuity tester similar to Ideal 62-200 or Amprobe DCT -300.
f. Correct minor items so Audio / Video Consultant may certify satisfactory completion during
his visit.
C. Training
1. Provide training in the operation and maintenance of the systems by a qualified instructor or
equipment manufacture for personnel designated by the Owner.
2. Training shall be after the systems are operational but before the commissioning.
3. Provide two DVD recordings of the training to the owner.
3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. System acceptance tests shall not be performed until the initial system checkout has been completed.
The system acceptance tests shall be supervised by the Consultant and shall consist of the following:
1. Take a physical inventory of all equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract
documents.
2. Demonstrate the operation of all system equipment.
3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to determine compliance
with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified by the Consultant for these tests.
4. Provide all final, "as -built" drawings, manuals, video (DVD format) and other required documents.
B. In the event that the systems are not completely installed or further adjustment is required, or defective
equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the
Consultant. The Consultant's return trip shall be paid for by the installer prior to the Consultants return.
1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing,
continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall
include, but not be limited to, changes to or installation of resistive pads, readjustment of
loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system equalizers, programming changes to the control
system, if in the judgment of the Consultant, these adjustments are required.
2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment
does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Consultant for all time and expenses of the
Consultant for these tests during any extensions of the acceptance -testing period.
3.7 CLEANUP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of the work, remove all refuse and rubbish from and about the premises daily, and
shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair any damage
caused to the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner. �— —
I
3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work
against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Video Systems 275117-5
Blank Page
BYLI Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 310516 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Furnish and place non -frost susceptible aggregate base material for overlying concrete slabs and asphalt
pavement.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. When reference is made to the "Idaho Standard Specification", it shall be understood to mean the Idaho
Division of Highways "Standard Specification for Highway Construction" (latest edition) and all
supplements thereto.
1.03 TESTING OF MATERIALS
A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain and pay for the services of an approved materials
testing laboratory to perform all sampling and testing of materials to assure that the density requirements
of this specification are met. The Contractor shall provide test reports for aggregate suitability specified
under Part 2.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit three (3) copies of all aggregate test reports of crushed aggregate
1.05 DENSITY REQUIREMENTS
A. The in-place density tests shall indicate that the following density requirements have been met:
MINIMUM DENSITY REQUIREMENTS
Material
Crushed base aggregate
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Percent of Test
Maximum Method
98 ASTM D-698
Number
of Test
One Test Per 200 SY
of Surface
A. Products listed herein shall meet the requirements of Section 312000 Earth Moving, unless noted
otherwise below.
2.02 CRUSHED BASE AGGREGATE
A. Material shall consist of both fine and coarse crushed gravel blended (if required) to produce a final
product conforming to the requirement of this specification.
B. The crushing process shall result in a product that has at least one fractured face of 50 percent of the
particles in that portion of the material that passes the 2 -inch sieve, but is retained on the No. 4 sieve as
determined by Idaho T-71.
C. The blended material shall have a loss of 50 percent or less at 500 revolutions as determined by
AASHTO T-96 and shall have a sand equivalent not less than 30. The material incorporated in the work
shall conform to the following gradation:
EARTHWORK 310516-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Particles having diameters less than .02 millimeter shall not be in excess of 3 percent by weight of the
total sample tested.
E. The portion of any blended component passing the No. 40 sieve shall be either nonplastic or shall have a
liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BASE COURSE
A. After the subbase material is shaped to the final cross-section shown on the drawings, the base material
shall be rolled and shaped to the grade and cross-section shown on the drawings. The material shall be
blended with water to maintain the moisture content near optimum. The material shall be rolled until the
density requirements of the specification are met.
3.02 TESTING
A. General: Test in-place base course for surface smoothness after rolling is complete.
B. Surface Smoothness: Furnished surface of the base course shall not vary more than .04 feet above or
below the designed grade.
C. Density: If density tests indicate that the requirements of Paragraph 1.05 above have not been met,
rework and recompact the aggregate until the density tests indicate the compaction requirements have
been met.
END OF SECTION
EARTHWORK 310516-2
BASE AGGREGATE GRADATION
(Non Frost Susceptible)
Percent Passing
Sieve Size
By Weight (See Notes A & B)
1 -inch
100
3/4 -inch
90-100
#4
40-65
#8
30-50
#40
12-25
#200
0-7
D. Particles having diameters less than .02 millimeter shall not be in excess of 3 percent by weight of the
total sample tested.
E. The portion of any blended component passing the No. 40 sieve shall be either nonplastic or shall have a
liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BASE COURSE
A. After the subbase material is shaped to the final cross-section shown on the drawings, the base material
shall be rolled and shaped to the grade and cross-section shown on the drawings. The material shall be
blended with water to maintain the moisture content near optimum. The material shall be rolled until the
density requirements of the specification are met.
3.02 TESTING
A. General: Test in-place base course for surface smoothness after rolling is complete.
B. Surface Smoothness: Furnished surface of the base course shall not vary more than .04 feet above or
below the designed grade.
C. Density: If density tests indicate that the requirements of Paragraph 1.05 above have not been met,
rework and recompact the aggregate until the density tests indicate the compaction requirements have
been met.
END OF SECTION
EARTHWORK 310516-2
t3YU Idano Science & Technology Building
SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
B. Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Removing existing vegetation.
2. Clearing and grubbing.
3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
4. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements.
5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for site demolition.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and
soil organisms.
B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site.
1. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place
surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.
D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.04 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's
property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site
improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by site clearing.
1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or
other plants designated to remain.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
SITE CLEARING 311000-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises Insert location.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
D. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.02 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of
soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion -
and sedimentation -control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that Flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not
enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation -control measures during construction until
permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
D. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire suppression,
plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security and utilities sections and
Section 02 4119 "Selective Structure Demolition"
3.04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
3. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
3.05 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other
waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other
objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
SITE CLEARING 311000-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape
stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be
stockpiled or reused.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.06 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new
construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut along line of
existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw- cut faces
vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating,
following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain
exposed.
3.07 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING 311000-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, and pavements.
2. Drainage course for slabs -on -grade.
3. Subbase course for concrete walks.
4. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
5. Geofoam polystyrene insulation board.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures,
site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -
grade improvements and utilities.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over bedding to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and cement concrete.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Bedrock: for the purposes of this Project, Overlying reasonably solid layer of volcanic rock,
approximately 2 to 3 feet thick, or the volcanic rock under this solid layer that is generally very jointed,
fractured and broken into boulder and cobble -sized particles which is still intact, with few, in any,
significantly thick fractures or seams filled with soil.
E. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
F. Drainage Fill or Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward
capillary Flow of pore water.
G. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines
and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and
dimensions without direction by Architect.
a. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without
additional compensation.
H. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock
material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation
EARTH MOVING 312000- 1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and
performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late -model, track -mounted hydraulic
excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- wide, maximum, short -tip -radius rock bucket; rated at not less
than 138 -hp flywheel power with bucket -curling force of not less than 28,090 Ibf and stick -crowd
force of not less than 18,650 Ibf; measured according to SAE J-1179.Bulk Excavation: Late -
model, track -mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 -hp flywheel power and developing a
minimum of 48,510-Ibf breakout force with a general- purpose bare bucket; measured according to
SAE J-732.
J. Structures: footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances,
or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
K. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement meeting a
specific gradation.
L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Filter fabric.
3. Geofoam.
B. Samples: 12 -by -12 -inch Sample of filter fabric.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed
for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
D. Seismic Survey Report: For record purposes; from seismic survey agency.
E. Preexcavation Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,
including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations.
Submit before earthwork begins.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data indicating subsurface conditions has been made available to the
Contractor for convenience and may not serve as a reliable representations of site conditions. All
locations that may require excavation may not have been probed. The Owner will not be held
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the provided data.
B. Excavation Requirements: Extend building excavations below slabs to levels specified.
Remove loose, fractured, or disturbed pieces of bedrock along near -vertical faces if applicable.
1. Where horizontal surfaces of bedrock exceed slope of 1 foot rise per 10 feet at base of
excavations, either step or flatten surface of bedrock.
C. Site Utility Information: Record data on known existing utilities is indicated on the Drawings and has
not been verified. Contractor will confirm actual locations of existing utilities and identify possible
coordination requirements.
D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Contractor and University not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
EARTH MOVING 312000-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
E. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a
combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 5 inches in any dimension, debris, waste,
frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter as approved by soils inspector.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according
to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, 6
inch minus uncrushed aggregate base.
1. Uncrushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
6 inch 100%
No. 4 15% -
60% No. 200 0-7%
2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion
passing the No. 40 sieve.
3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be less than 25.
4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6.
5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 25.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone, and/or crushed
sand; 3/4 minus crushed aggregate base.
1. Crushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1 inch
100%
3/4 inch
90%-100%
No.4
40% -
65%
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
No.8
30% -
50%
No. 200
3%-9%
2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion
passing the No. 40 sieve.
3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be less than 25.
4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6.
5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 30.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not
more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand.
1. Type 1 bedding material: 3/4 inch, 60% crushed or fractured (at least on one side) gravel and
sand meeting the following gradation requirements:
EARTH MOVING 312000-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1 inch
100%
3/4 inch
80%-100%
3/8 inch
20% -
70% No. 4
5% - 20%
No. 8
0-5%
No. 200
0-3%
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
H. Drainage Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5
percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural
sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1- inch sieve and
0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
K. Structural Backfill: well graded 4 inch minus granular material as approved by testing agency.
L. Fill and Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials.
2.02 FILTER FABRIC
A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle -punched geotextile, manufactured for
subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50
percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 Ibf; ASTM D 4632
2. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 Ibf; ASTM D 4632.
3. Tear Strength: 56 Ibf; ASTM D 4533.
4. Puncture Strength: 56 Ibf; ASTM D 4833.Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM
D 4751. Permittivity: 0.1 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500
hours' exposure; ASTM 4355.
B. Subgrade Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven or woven Geotextile manufactured for subgrade
separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50%, complying
with ASTM D4632 and the following measured properties and their test method:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 510 Ibf; ASTM D 4632
2. Tear Strength: 180 Ibf; ASTM D4533
3. Puncture Strength: 180 Ibf; ASTM D4833
4. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30 sieve, maximum; ASTM D4751
5. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D4491
2.03 GEOFOAM
A. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type VII, 2.20-Ib/cu. ft. density, 60 -psi
compressive strength.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking
and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a
description of the utility; colored as follows unless indicated otherwise in Campus standards (Verify with
Campus standards):
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Data/Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
EARTH MOVING 312000-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site
Clearing."
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site
Clearing," during earthwork operations.
3.02 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in
excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system
components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
3.03 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be
classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-
sectioned by Architect.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground
structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other
materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
B. Over -Excavation Requirements: All footings are intended to bear on sound bedrock. Where over -
excavation occurs, footings may be poured thicker or the foundation walls may be extended as
approved by Architect. Over -excavated areas below concrete slabs are to be filled with engineered
compact fill. It is the responsibility of the contractor to confirm existing subgrade elevations and provide
additional fill and/or concrete where required and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 1 foot. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Clean bottom of excavation and place lean- mix
concrete fill. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing lean -mix concrete fill.
2. Excavation for Underground Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations
and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 6 inches. Do not disturb bottom
of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.06 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes
and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and
EARTH MOVING 312000-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along
trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple- duct
conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed
subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support
bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches below invert elevation of utility lines and 2 feet wider than outside
diameter of pipe, but not less than 3 feet minimum trench width unless otherwise indicated on
drawings. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
4. Excavate trenches 12 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing
material to allow for bedding course.
3.07 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Soils Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Owner determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Authorized additional excavation will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices as
indicated herein.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.08 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,
with 28 -day compressive strength of 2000 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
2. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures, as required by the Architect.
3. Unauthorized excavations are to be at no cost to the Owner or Architect.
3.09 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees. Stockpile where directed by Owner.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Accepted construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, waterproofing,
and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork where required.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill
unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division
3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
EARTH MOVING 312000-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Place and compact bedding of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 6 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
1. Coordinate backfilling with testing of utilities.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below
subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.12 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material or satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material fill.
4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.13 GEOFOAM INSULATION BOARD
A. Place a leveling course of sand, 2 inches thick, over subgrade, unless indicated otherwise.
Finish leveling course to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge.
1. Place leveling course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by hand -operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches
of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of
backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.
D. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
EARTH MOVING 312000-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch Insert tolerance.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot
straightedge.
3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in-place concrete slabs -on -
grade as follows:
1. Install subdrainage geotextile filter fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact
each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95
percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency
to perform field quality -control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be
based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM
D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and
frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at
least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3
tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or
less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or
less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction
operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
EARTH MOVING 312000-8
tsyu Nano Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil off site.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
EARTH MOVING 312000-9
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 312333 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Provide all excavation of trenches, bedding, and backfilling work for construction of piping.
1.02 EXCAVATION CLASSIFICATION
A. Excavation of trenches shall include all material excavated or removed regardless of type, character,
composition or condition of the material.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Pipe bedding material shall be used to backfill all pipe.
B. Pipe bedding material shall be a uniformly graded crushed stone, pea gravel, or coarse sand, which
conforms to the following gradation.
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
3/4 inch
100
#4
40-65
#200
8 max
2.02 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Backfill material for trenches where excavated material is shown on the plans shall be material
excavated from the trench and shall be free of organic material, frozen material, and shall contain no
rock larger than 6".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Trenches shall be excavated to lines and grades shown on the drawings, with a maximum width at the
top or crown of the pipe not to exceed the nominal inside diameter of the pipe plus 2'. In the event the
Contractor should over excavate in width or depth without the Engineer's approval, he shall provide pipe
bedding for the full length of the over excavation.
B. Trench shall be kept free from water at all times to facilitate fine grading, proper laying and joining of
pipe, and prevention of damage to completed joints.
C. The Contractor shall conduct trench operations in such a manner as to provide adequate safety
precautions for workmen, adjacent property, or the public at all times by use of adequate sheeting,
shoring, or bracing to sustain stability of the trench Floor and walls. The Contractor shall furnish, place,
and maintain such shoring as may be required to support sides of the trench. Costs of shoring and
bracing shall be considered incidental to trench excavation and backfill.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. Bedding material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6" and compacted with mechanical tamper.
TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-1
f
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. All backfill shall be placed in lifts of 12" maximum and compacted.
C. All trench sections not under roadways shall be compacted with mechanical tampers to 90 percent of
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698.
D. Trenches under building, reservoir, or roadways shall be compacted to 98 percent of maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D-698.
3.03 CLEANUP
A. Surplus excavated material or stripped material not salvaged as topsoil and excavated material not
meeting the requirements for backfill shall become waste. All waste material shall be disposed of by the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 312333-2
t3YU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and
construction loads.
1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures,
and site improvements adjacent to excavation.
4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified land surveyor.
B. Other Informational Submittals:
1. Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might
be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of
excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.
2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, or mechanical conditions.
a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system including, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Geotechnical report.
b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
C. Proposed excavations.
d. Proposed equipment.
e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system.
f. Working area location and stability.
g. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission.
B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing
buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as
benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks,
maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original
elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if
cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with
continuous interlocks.
1. Corners: Site -fabricated mechanical interlock or roll -formed corner shape with continuous interlock.
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required
for application.
E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
F. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during
excavation support and protection system operations.
1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,
walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed
or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming
and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.
D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as
excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure
that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection
systems.
3.02 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING
A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to
depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more
than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required
to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.
C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.
3.03 SHEET PILING
A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a
continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise
recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet
piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches
from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to
uniform elevation at top of excavation.
3.04 TIEBACKS
A. Tiebacks: Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. Test load -carrying capacity of each tieback and
replace and retest deficient tiebacks.
1. Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of
excavation support and protection system.
2. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral soil and
hydrostatic pressures.
3.05 BRACING
A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If
necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.06 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to
support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing
underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below
overlaying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 312000
"Earth Moving."
3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by
removing excavation support and protection systems.
B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000-3
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 -GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and place asphalt pavement patching as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. When reference is made to the "Idaho Standard Specification" it shall be understood to mean the Idaho
Division of Highways "Standard Specification for Highway Construction" (latest edition) and all
supplements thereto.
1.03 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit for approval test reports on aggregates prior to incorporation in the work.
B. Submit for approval the proposed laboratory designed job -mix formula for the asphalt concrete prior to
production of hot plant mix pavement material.
C. Submit copies of the asphalt loading certificates showing the refinery, Contractor, project, type and grade
of asphalt, type and amount of anti -stripping additive and temperature.
D. In-place density tests for base refer to Section 310516 — Earthwork. For asphalt concrete pavement,
perform tests at a frequency of one test per 400 square yards for each layer of asphalt pavement.
1.04 DENSITY REQUIREMENTS
A. The in-place tests specified under paragraph 1.03, D above shall indicate that the following density
requirements have been met:
In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.
a. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results
from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site,
prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix
specifications.
b. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core
samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
1) One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed
pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.
2) Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined
by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
B. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
C. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 321216-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ASPHALT CONCRETE
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Asphalt concrete shall be hot plant mix consisting of a mixture of crushed aggregate, mineral filler, if
required, asphalt cement and anti -stripping additive. Production of hot plant mix pavement shall conform
to the requirements of the Idaho Standard Specification for Highway Construction for Class III Hot Plant
Mix Pavement.
1. Asphalt cement shall be viscosity grade AC -10 conforming to the requirements of AASHTO
designation M226-80, Table 2.
2. Anti -stripping additive shall be Kling HS -BETA 1000-3, No -Strip ACRA 500, Dehydro H86C or
equal. Anti -stripping additive shall be added to the asphalt at the refinery at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0
percent as determined by laboratory tests.
3. Aggregate for asphalt concrete pavement shall consist of crushed gravel combined with mineral
filler (if required) to conform to the requirement of this specification.
B. The crushing process shall result in a product that has at least two fractured faces on 70 percent of the
particles in that portion of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve.
C. Material shall have a loss of 40 percent or less at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T-96 and
shall have a sand equivalent not less than 30.
D. The material shall conform to the following gradation when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-11 and
AASHTO T-27.
AGGREGATE SINGLE TEST AND MOVING AVERAGE GRADATION
Percent passing
Sieve Size
Single Test
Moving Average
1 -inch
100
100
3/4 -inch
90-100
95-100
3/8 -inch
60-85
65-80
#4
40-65
45-60
#8
25-50
30-45
#200
3-9
3-7
E. Mineral filler shall be limestone dust, hydrated lime or Portland cement. Limestone dust and Portland
cement shall conform to AASHTO M-17. Hydrated lime shall have a minimum of 85 percent calcium
hydroxide and shall conform to the following gradation.
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
# 30
100
# 80
95
# 200
65
F. Job -Mix formula: No asphalt concrete mix shall be produced until a laboratory designed job -mix formula
has been approved. Asphalt concrete mix properties of the job -mix formula shall conform to the following
Marshall Design criteria:
Property
Stability, pounds, minimum
Flow, unit of .01 inches
Air voids, percent
Immersion Compression -
Retained strength, percent
dry compressive strength,
psi, minimum
Void in mineral aggregate
percent, minimum
Value Test Method
1000 ASTM D1559
8-10 ASTM D1559
3-5 Asphalt Institute Manual MS -2
ASTM D1075
70
rIr
14
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 321216-2
cru ioano ocience zx I ecnnology twiloing
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
The mix gradation and asphalt content at the mixing plant shall conform to the approved job -mix
formula with the following tolerance:
Aggregate Passing
Sieve Size
1 -inch thru No. 4
No. 8 thru No. 100
No. 200
Asphalt content
Maximum Tolerance
Plus or Minus
from Job -Mix Formula
7 percent
4 percent
2 percent
0.4 percent
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 321216-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BASE COURSES
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Subbase Course: After the subgrade is complete and the density requirements of the subgrade have
been met the subbase material shall be spread, rolled and shaped to the grade and cross-section shown
on the drawings. Water shall be added only in an amount necessary to obtain the required compaction.
B. Base Course: After the subbase material is shaped to the final cross-section shown on the drawings and
the density requirements have been met, the base material shall be spread, rolled and shaped to the
grade and cross-section shown on the drawings. The material shall be blended with water to maintain
the moisture content near optimum. The material shall be rolled until the density requirements of the
specification are met.
3.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. After the base courses are complete and the density requirements have been met, the asphalt concrete
material shall be placed to the grade and cross-section shown on the drawings.
B. Mix, haul, spread and finish the asphalt concrete material in accordance with the requirements on the
Idaho Standard Specification for Highway Construction.
END OF SECTION
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 321216-4
BYu loano Science & I echnology Building
SECTION 321300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls and planter walls.
3. Slabs -on -grade in planters.
4. Bridge slab and walls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade.
2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete walkways, curbs, and gutters.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly
ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance
with requirements.
B. Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of completed structure or
building and that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified
high quality architectural appearance. All exposed concrete shall be high quality architectural concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar
arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring
removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
2. High Quality Architectural Concrete Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction
including form -facing joints, construction and contraction joints, form jointsealant details, form tie
locations and patterns, inserts and embedments, cutouts, cleanout panels, and other items that
visually affect cast -in-place architectural concrete.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with
requirements:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete
due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form -release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Bonding agents.
6. Adhesives.
7. Semirigid joint filler.
8. Joint -filler strips.
9. Repair materials.
10. Steel producer's certificates of mill analysis including physical and chemical analysis of reinforcing
steel.
I. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances.
J. Field quality -control test and inspection reports.
K. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -certified
Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
Installer is to have completed concrete Work with a minimum of 10 year record of successful in-service
performance and similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1. Submit copy of Flatwork personnel certifications and years' experience for each with current firm
and other firms.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and
that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities"
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from
a single manufacturer.
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Sections 1 through 5 and
Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.
F. Mockups: Cast concrete formed -surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture,
tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab -on -grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the
location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. For any exposed concrete walls,
configure the Class A tolerance wall to include one 90 degree outside chamfered corner, one cold
construction joint, one form joint, and other features as may be applicable.
2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
3. Demolish mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect.
4. See Section 32 1313 for mockups required for concrete sidewalks.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site (in conjunction with preinstallation
conference for concrete paving as specified in Section 32 1313 "Concrete paving) to comply with
requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination."
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. At least 20 days prior to submitting design mixtures, conduct a meeting to review concrete design
mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Review requirements
for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work
progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require
representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in-place concrete to attend, including the
following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
C. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
d. Agency responsible for field quality control.
e. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer.
f. Concrete subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control,
concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures,
construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, anchor rod and anchorage device
installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness
measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of masonry anchors with masonry system installers.
B. Obtain written approval from the appropriate waterproofing and thru-wall flashing manufacturers prior to
installation of form coatings, form release agents, sealers, curing agents, surface coatings, concrete
treatments, and other products applied to concrete surfaces indicated to receive waterproofing or thru-
wall Flashings. This includes manufacturers of floor waterproofing treatments above occupied space.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Special Guarantee: On form approved by Architect, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer
agrees to promptly repair or replace all components of concrete that fails in materials or workmanship,
including material and labor, within specified guarantee period.
1. Failures include pitting, spelling, cracking, honeycombing, surface color and texture irregularities,
air bubbles, rock pockets, fns and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Failure includes installation that does provide
indicated slope to drain. Immediately repair or replace concrete and place in satisfactory condition
in every particular, any guaranteed work upon written notice from the Project Manager or Architect
and make good all damage to the buildings and grounds caused by said work, without cost to the
Owner.
2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Guarantee for New Replacement Work: Provide similar, new 2 -year guarantee from date of completion of
replacement work.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2.02 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Provide form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Forms for Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: For concrete designated to receive direct finishes
such as carpet, tile, EIFS skim coats, etc., provide
a. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and
as one of the following:
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1) High-density overlay undamaged plywood, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent
treated and edge sealed, 3/4 -inch thick.
2) B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
2. Forms for Smooth -Formed Architectural Finished Exposed Concrete: Form -facing panels that will
provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to
minimize number of joints.
a. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and
as one of the following:
1) Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge
sealed.
2) B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight ft.
C. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation.
D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to
support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
G. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials.
H. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spelling of concrete on
removal.
1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
2. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.
2.03 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
A. High Quality Architectural Concrete: Quality of all exposed -to -view concrete and all concrete surfaces to
receive waterproofing is of primary importance. Quality of all exposed -to -view concrete is to be
consistent in appearance and is to have no less than the following characteristics:
1. Proper and consistent alignment of form panels and form ties.
2. Absence of staining from form leakage.
3. Absence of honeycomb or excessive segregation due to improper vibration or form leakage.
4. Correct placement of rustication or other detail treatment as shown on drawings.
5. Truly square and plumb corners unless clearly directed otherwise.
6. Absence of markings from formwork (i.e. use MDF or plastic forms.)
7. Surfaces to receive waterproofing or thru-wall flashings are free of coatings, form release agents,
sealers, curing agents, treatments, and similar materials, unless written prior approval of the
products used is obtained from the specified waterproofing or thru-wall flashing manufacturer.
2.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, or ASTM A 934/A
934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12 -inch bar length.
D. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
2.05 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-4
BYU Idaho science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M
epoxy coated.
C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive
strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2. For epoxy -coated reinforcement, use epoxy -coated or other dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar
supports.
2.06 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray.
B. Test aggregate for the mix for expansion in accordance with AASHTO T 303.
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory
service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious
materials.
1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
3. For exposed surfaces, and surfaces receiving EIFS skim coats, do not use fine or coarse
aggregates which may cause stains on concrete surfaces or that contain substances that cause
spelling.
4. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulphides, pyrite,
marcasite, or ochre which can cause stains on concrete surfaces.
D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.07 ADMIXTURES
A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Water -Reducing Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed
cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions
with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
1. Products:
a. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon CIA.
C. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
d. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete CNI.
e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
D.1. The proposed aggregate for the mix shall be tested for expansion and Alkali -Silica Reaction (ASR)
in accordance with AASHTO T 303. Where testing indicates aggregates are reactive, the contrac-
tor shall use fly ash admixture to produce a concrete mix that successfully mitigates ASR. Contrac-
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
for shall provide test results of successful mitigation using ASTM C 1567, with results showing a
linear expansion at 14 days not exceeding 0.10 percent when tested.
2. Fly ash may be used to replace a portion of the Portland cement in the concrete mix. The fly ash
used shall not exceed twenty five percent of the total cement material in the mix. The cement ma-
terial in the mix includes both Portland cement and fly ash."
2.08 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
1. Products:
a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.
C. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E -Con.
d. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confihn.
e. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A, moisture loss not more
than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1. Products:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; A -H 3 Way Sealer.
b. Burke by Edoco; Spartan -Cote.
C. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Conspec #1.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucocure.
e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
I. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Masterkure.
g. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CS -309.
h. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure.
I. Sonneborn, Div. ofChemRex; Kure -N -Seal
2.09 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM 0 1 75 1 , asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. Construct
isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such
as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations as indicated
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type 11, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab
anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined
in ASTM C 2 19.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 41 00 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C
109/C 109M.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an
independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs
based on laboratory trial mixtures.
2. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-6
t3YU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Limit water-solnble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required,
for placement and workability.
2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and
concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F.
5. Use high -range water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, architectural concrete, concrete
required to be watertight, and concrete with water -cement ratios below 0.50.
6. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the
following limits:
a. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or
hydraulic pressure: 6.0 percent for 3/4 -inch maximum aggregate.
b. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a
surface hardener: 2 to 3 percent air.
7. Use lithium compound admixture to produces concrete mix with linear expansion at 14 days not
exceeding 0.10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1567.
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when warranted
by characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances. Submit
laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results to Architect and obtain Architect's
acceptance before using in Work.
1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions,
prepare test specimens as specified in ACI 301 and in accordance with ASTM C 1 92 and conduct
strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39.
2. . Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete
proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301.
3. If suitable data from field experience or laboratory trial batches cannot be obtained, concrete
proportions may be established by use of the water -cement ratio limits table and the limiting
restrictions of ACI 301.
4. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete
production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or
the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 3 0 or more tests, representing similar materials and
project conditions.
5. Standard Deviation: If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available,
select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required
compressive strength of concrete.
6. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACJ 2 14 methods
of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of tests more
than 500 psi below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100, and that the probable
frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not
exceed 1 in 100.
2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. General: Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 1 5
days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been
reviewed by Architect.
B. Footings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 t o 4 inches before adding
high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 . 5 percent at point o f delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal
maximum aggregate size.
C. Walls, Foundations Walls, and Planter Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 2 8 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
D. Slabs -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 611 Ib/cu. yd. (6.5 sacks @ 94lbs ea)
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, maximum.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 .5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished Floors to exceed 3 percent.
E. Suspended Slabs at Bridge: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitions Materials Content: 611 Ib/cu. yd. (6.5 sacks @ 94lbs ea)
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, maximum.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 .5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.13 FABRICATING
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"
2.14 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and
furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 - 1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
2. Include at least the following information on each batch ticket:
a. Name of ready -mix batch plant.
b. Serial number of ticket.
C. Date and number of truck.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Specific designation of job (name and location).
f. Volume of concrete (number of cubic yards).
g. Time batch was dispensed to truck.
h. Reading of revolution counter at first addition of water.
i. Signature or initials of ready -mix representative.
j. Type and brand of cement.
k. Amount of cement (can be indicated by weight or quantity).
I. Total water content by producer (can be indicated by weight or quantity).
M. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials (can be indicated by weight or quantity).
n. Admixtures and amount of same.
o. Maximum size of aggregate.
p. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates.
q. Indication that all ingredients are as previously certified or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and other related materials with placement of forms and
reinforcing steel.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that all silt, loose rock, and deleterious material has been removed from the building area prior to
concrete pouring. Evaluate site prior to bidding to determine if any additional topsoil removal may be
required. Do not use this material as fill.
1. Bear all footings on approved sound bedrock or approved lean mix concrete.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-8
esru iaano science a I echnology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.03 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads. Use camber in the formwork as required for anticipated deflections.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 1 1 7.
C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected materials to obtain required
finishes.
1. Provide surveys in addition to those required for general lines and levels to check the lines and
levels of completed formwork for exposed work before concrete is placed.
D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces and high quality architectural surfaces
including surfaces exposed to view and surfaces to receive waterproofing, carpeting, or vinyl tiling.
Comply with ACI 303.1 limits on form -facing panel deflection.
2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces.
E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material.
3. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust -preventative material.
G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off
templates or compacting -type screeds.
H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
I. At construction joints, overlap forms over hardened concrete at least 6 inches.
J. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required
in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Accurately place and
securely support items built into forms.
L. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
M. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
N. Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -release agent, according
to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
1. Form coatings: Coat forms prior to placement of reinforcing steel. Do not allow excess form coating
material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with surfaces which will be bonded to fresh
concrete. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions.
0. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using
strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds.
3.04 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in
Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of
concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other
conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
4. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work, or for its
support, prior to concreting.
3.05 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24
hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form removal operations
and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved 100 percent of its 28 -day design compressive
strength or for 28 days, whichever is longer.
a. Determining numbers of cylinders, testing dates, and costs associated with field cured
cylinders.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores. Do not remove form -facing material less than 4 days after placement.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release
agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fns and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved
by Architect.
3.06 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. Where concrete construction extends to more than one floor level, extend shoring or reshoring over both
stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
D. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 28 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if required, until
concrete has attained its required 28 -day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have
been removed.
3.07 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. I
1. Do not tack weld reinforcing bars.
2. Do not bend reinforcing steel after embedding in hardened concrete, unless authorized by Owner.
3. In the case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcing steel.
4. Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress.
5. Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: C
a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication limits.
b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings.
�— C. Bars with reduced crass -section due to excessive rusting or other cause. ,
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce
bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
D. Secure reinforcement bars with wire ties at all points of intersection unless the spacing is less than 12
inches in each direction, in which case tie alternate points of intersection Set wire ties with ends directed
into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-10
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Install precut insulation board forms and spacers. Use a horizontal spacer to establish the
envelope width. Hold the board forms away from the pipe by temporary spacers which are
to be removed as the insulation is installed and compacted. The side forms must not
extend above the finished compacted level of the insulation enveloped.
4. Backfill and compact the surrounding sand simultaneously with the insulation on both sides
of the empty forms. Compact the sand backfill behind the forms to pipe height.
5. Place the insulation around the pipe. To minimize dust, empty the bags near the pipe with
as little "free fall' as possible. Fill the forms in three inch lifts to mid -pipe height and
compact, paying attention to fully load the underside of the pipe. Remove intermediate pipe
supporting spacers as the work progresses.
6. Add additional insulation in layers, and compact each layer to the specified density. Use a
rod -type concrete vibrator with a 1-1/2" to 2" diameter head to compact the insulation.
Insert the head of the vibrator into the insulation and pull along slowly.
7. Provide the minimum depth of insulation of 6-8-10" compacted over the highest part of the
pipe (varies to 10" - see detail). the minimum bury depth of the insulation should be not
less than 2-1/2 feet between the top of the insulation and the finish grade level.
Place a 6 — 8 foot wide sheet of 10 mil Vis -queen over the insulated pipe in the trench
tapered out and away to intercept vagrant ground moisture and shunt it away from the pipe
conduit. See details.
8. Complete the compaction of the sand backfill behind the forms. When the insulation is fully
installed and compacted, place a layer of Flattened empty insulation bags on top of the
insulation envelope. Walk over the bags to fully flatten the bag cover. Place the 2"
insulation board over the trench. Hand apply a 6" sand backfill over the board and bags to
anchor the board and bags. Complete backfilling and compacting to grade level or to the
level of a protective overpad without delay.
END OF SECTION 336310
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-8
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.6. PIPING TESTS:
A. Prior notification of at least 10 days will be required for an intent to perform hydrostatic testing. The
Contractor's notice shall be reviewed and approved by the Project Manager prior to
commencement of the required testing.
B. Complete piping tests prior to painting, insulating, or covering the pipe.
C. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before
insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each
natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate
sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and
pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
1. Required test period is 4 hours.
2. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is
observed.
3. Test medium, low pressure steam and condensate lines at 175 psig (hydraulic) and in
accordance with ANSI B31.
D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re -installation,
using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak
compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
F. X -Ray Testing: Test a minimum of 5% of all welds. If a weld is found to be bad then additional
welds shall be tested until a satisfactory number has been found to be free of defects. In addition
to the 5% minimum, x-ray testing of 100% of joints not capable of being pressure tested shall be
performed; furnish copy of test results from an approved test laboratory for Engineer/Owner's
review. Test to be in accordance with ASME requirements. Cost of all x-ray testing is borne by the
Contractor.
G. Startup testing: Since the steam and condensate piping will move on warmup and during operation,
some initial leakage at Flanged joints may be encountered. Tighten any joints found to be leaking.
Verify that forces imposed on gaskets are guided straight and do not impose a moment force on
the connection.
3.7. UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A. Procurement and installation of the direct bury insulation system shall adhere to the requirement
contained herein and the details shown on the drawings. The installation shall allow adequate
space for free movement of the piping without stress or abrasion.
1. Complete all piping tests and obtain approval before installing the direct bury insulation.
2. Store insulation materials on wood platforms. Follow manufacturers instructions for safe
stack height and product protection. Insulation damaged while under Contractor's
jurisdiction shall be replaced as directed by the Owner's Representative at no additional
cost to the Owner.
B. Excavation, Application of the Insulation, and Backfill: Note the excavation and backfill
requirements of Section 02200. Additionally, the following requirements apply to direct bury
insulation.
1. The trench bed, walls, and cover which will surround the insulation system shall be a
mixture of fine clay and fine sand, with a maximum of 5% rock not exceeding 3/4" diameter.
2. Where applicable, when there is enough trench depth and space for final cover, re -use
existing concrete pad under the pipe, grade and compact the trench next to the existing
under -pipe pad as needed to provide the required space for the insulation system. Clean
dirt and debris from the pipe and pad.
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-7
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Welded:
1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.
2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C) where possible, with
minimum pipe preheat to 50°F.
Bevel pipe ends at a 37.50 angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
slag, metal particles and dirt.
Use pipe clamps or tack -weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8
welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".
Build up welds with stringer -bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will
ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow -holes and
non-metallic inclusions.
Do not weld -out piping system imperfections by tack -welding procedures; refabricate to
comply with requirements.
At Installer's option, install forged branch -connection fittings wherever branch pipe is
indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.
D. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression
of gaskets.
3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEAM AND RETURN CONDENSATE PIPING:
A. Where new piping follows same path as removed piping, match existing piping elevations, spacing,
etc., except where indicated and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
B. Where new piping follows a new path, field verify exact routing, elevation, etc., to avoid conflict with
existing underground utilities, power lines, etc. Install piping in accordance with applicable codes
and regulations.
C. Provide pipe guides as indicated on the plans.
D. Condensate piping:
1. Install condensate piping to return steam condensate collection as indicated.
E. Fabrication and installation of steam and condensate piping components:
1. General: Fabricate and install piping components in accordance with applicable
requirements of ASME B31.9, and, where not otherwise indicated, comply with recognized
industry practices to ensure that components serve intended function.
2. Drip -Legs: Provide new drip -legs as indicated on the drawings.
3.5. CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING:
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare
for application of specified coatings (if any). Inspect each run of each system for completion of
joints, supports and accessory items.
B. All new piping systems for steam shall be thoroughly flushed and cleaned before being placed into
service.
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-6
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Insulate all new piping exposed in steam vaults, inside buildings and in expansion elbows, loops,
etc. buried in accordance with this section.
C. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation both previously damaged, or damaged
during this construction. Use insulation of same thickness as specified herein. Install new
aluminum jacket over insulation inside manhole.
D. Applied Piping Insulation Materials for Piping Inside Steam Vaults & Buildings:
Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, pre -formed fiberglass with all -service
self sealing jacket, mitered for fittings unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation
materials of one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div.
C. CertainTeed Corp.
d. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
e. Manville Products Corp.
f. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
g. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
h. Rubatex Corp.
E. Piping Insulation Materials for Piping in Trench:
1. Granular Insulation:
Contractor shall furnish (purchase and install) the direct bury granular insulation for this
contract. Include all costs of purchasing and placing the material and guarantying the work
in this contract. Install material in accordance with the drawings, manufacturer's
recommendations, and these specifications. Material to be equivalent to Gilsulate 500 XR.
Order 5% more material than calculated and turn excess over to the Owner at the
completion of the insulation work.
2. Board Insulation:
As detailed on the drawings use 2" thick, Dow "Blue Board", foamed (not beaded)
construction grade for sideforms and top cover of steam and condensate piping in the
trench. Maintain a full 6" or more thickness of granular insulation between the pipe and the
board.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam and condensate piping materials and
products are to be installed. Correct, or see that unsatisfactory conditions are corrected, before
proceeding with the work.
3.2. INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: After piping installation, insulation, and jacketing is complete, label steam and condensate
piping with two inch high lettering indicating service, pressure and temperature. Use a black high
temperature paint system. Prepare the substrate properly with cleaner and primer.
3.3. PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:
A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp
dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male
threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-5
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
PARTII- PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. GENERAL: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products, valves and fittings,
steam and condensate specialties, insulation materials, etc., which have been manufactured in the
U.S.A., of sizes, types, ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and
products complying with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping where applicable, base
pressure rating on steam and condensate system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and
types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings and materials which match pipe
materials used in steam and condensate piping systems. Where more than one type of material or
product is indicated, selection is at Installer's option. Provide piping materials and factory -
fabricated, piping products, valves and fittings
2.2. BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. GENERAL: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with and in accordance with the following
listing:
B. HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (125 TO 250 PSI): Not applicable.
C. MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM (15 TO 125 PSI):
Use ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40, black steel, pipe. For 2" and smaller, use
pipe Schedule 80.
2. Fittings shall be seamless forged black steel ASTM A-234, ASA B16.9, ASA B-10 of grade
and schedule of pipe to which connected. Provide flanged fittings with AFlexitallic type
CGI@ gaskets for piping 2-1/2" and larger. Provide threaded fittings for piping 2" or less. All
fittings shall be rated for minimum 150 psig. Other than demountable joints, the system
shall be an all welded assembly.
3. Use pipe and fittings manufactured in the United States of Ameraca..
D. LOW PRESSURE STEAM (15 PSI OR LESS): Not applicable.
E. CONDENSATE PIPING:
1: Schedule 40 Stainless Steel.
2.3. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
A. WELDING MATERIALS: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined
by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
2.4 PIPING GUIDES: See details on drawings.
A. Provide a complete guide support system for all steam and condensate system installation.
Accommodate expansion, contraction, line offsets, etc.
2.5 INSULATION FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES:
A. Pre -Qualified Installers:
Listed below are the only mechanical contractors which are allowed to bid the mechanical
insulation work on this project. No exceptions taken:
a. Mountain States Insulation
b. Rivers West Construction
C. Jencc Mechanical Insulation
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
1.5 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS:
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the Owner, recorded
and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required.
1.6 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES:
Pay for all permits, fees and licenses required for the conduct of the specified work and be responsible for
all criteria associated with the same. Comply with requirements for inspection, certifications, etc.
1.7 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
A. Prepare and submit drawings for steam vault construction including reinforcing steel placement,
grating assembly, sleeving and anchorage.
B. Use a marked up construction print to indicate intended location of piping supports, guides, anchors
and expansion loops. Present for review in an early weekly construction meeting. Work from
reviewed drawings.
1.8 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE:
Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with
other trades, determine the Owners acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to
accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to
the Campus Construction Coordinator not less than 7 days prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then
be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval
to go ahead with the shutdown or re -schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as
necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption. See Supplemental General Conditions for
more details. Steam system shutdowns may require more than a 7 day lead time.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Provide factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end -caps
through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof
wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or
by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
D. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.
E. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
1.10 PURCHASING CONSTRAINT: Contractor is to procure equipment and materials only from vendors who
are willing to itemize items which are sold, with a price for each item or collective group of similar items,
which line item costs add up to the total sum of the proposed offer. This will allow Contractor to work with
bid -time unit prices if work is to be added or subtracted from the contract. A vendor may offer a package
price for all listed items, but it shall be recognizable as the sum of the component unit prices. This will also
facilitate buying around quasi -proprietary items which might be used to lock up a non -itemized package.
The Spirax-Sarco thermo-dynamic steam traps with sensors and the steam/condensate valves in general,
are particular items which should be priced on a line item basis.
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. MANUFACTURERS SUPERVISION: Manufacturers involvement is required regarding the
installation of the direct bury dry powder insulation system (Gilsulate 500XR).
1. Install the insulation material with the styrofoam blueboard forms as a system according to
manufacturer's instructions, and after a project specific training session for all workers,
training to be conducted by an authorized Gilsulate manufacturer's representative.
2. Prior to installation, the manufacturer's representative shall inspect the installed pipe and
support system for compliance with the recommendations and procedures.
3. Backfilling operations shall be witnessed by an Owner's representative.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. PRODUCT DATA:
1. Submit manufacturer's data sheets for materials and components used in the work. See list
below. Includes most components of the work.
B. WELDING CERTIFICATIONS: Applies to all welders employed on this project.
1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months.
2. The test shall be conducted by an authorized agency and conducted in accordance with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME
Section VIII, and ANSI 313.
3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at the
job site.
4. The Contractor shall submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the
Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be employed
on the project until so certified.
C. SHOP DRAWINGS: For all steam system components.
1. Pipe and pipe fittings
2. Valves
3. Strainers
4. Steam traps and specialties
5. Gaskets
6. Field fabrications, anchors, guides, insulation techniques
7. Pipe insulations and jacketing
D. RECORD DRAWINGS: Use a protected copy of the contract documents and maintain and protect
a complete red -line record of changes to the work and actual final conditions including dimensions
and coordinates.
E. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION: Provide for all manufactured items, with parts lists, instructions,
sources of parts, etc.
F. INSULATION GUARANTEE: In addition to the comprehensive Contractors warranty for materials
and installation involved in this work, provide a written guarantee for the material and installation of
the new and revised construction, including the dry insulating powder system (Gilsulate), in force
for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by the Owner, against deterioration of
insulating value, compaction, or water leakage under normal operating conditions. (Vendor will
provide written guarantee for material to Contractor to allow a comprehensive single source.
G. SAFETY: Note that medium pressure steam at 350°F and 100-150 psig is inherently hazardous,
and that steam vaults are by definition enclosed spaces. Establish a plan, conduct training and
maintain records to confirm that workers are competent, knowledgeable and trained in working with
steam systems such as this. Provide required supervision, gear and installation to assure a safe
working environment. Let no worker work alone or untended in an enclosed vault environment.
Provide ventilation for all work in an active vault or enclosed space work environment.
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 336310 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS AND REVISIONS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. See Section 024119, "Selective Demolition", for other requirements.
B. See Section 330500 "Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water Utilities" and
Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities", for excavation and backfill and concrete
required for steam and condensate systems repairs.
C. Extent of steam and condensate piping valves, specialties, insulation work as indicated on
drawings and by requirements of this section. Includes runs of underground distribution piping, and
reconstruction of piping, valves and fittings to a complete end, in steam vaults.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of steam and
condensate piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years and are located in the U.S.A.
B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firm with at least 5 years in business, and 10 or more complex
projects of successful installation experience with steam and condensate piping, valves and
insulating work similar to that required for this project. Mechanical project foreman/superintendent
to be an experienced master/journeyman with specific experience with steam/condensate systems
and pipeffting.
C. INSULATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: Use experienced insulation subcontract firms for pipe
insulation and jacketing, and only firms recommended by Owner at that. Do not suppose that
insulation work is of little concern. Do not use any firm, or anyone unskilled in the work for this
assignment.
D. CODES AND STANDARDS:
1. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install steam and condensate piping in
accordance with ASME B31.9 "Building Service Piping".
2. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install steam and condensate piping in
accordance with the IMC "International Mechanical Code" and ASME Standards
pertaining to Pipe Welding.
3. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9 or ANSI and ASTM, as applicable, for shop and project site welding
of piping work.
4. Idaho State Plumbing Code
5. International Building Code
6. Industry Standards:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI B31.1 piping)
b. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
C. Ame rican Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
d. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
e. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL)
f. Hydronics Institute (HI)
g. Idaho Safety Standard (OSHA), Idaho State Industrial Council
h. Hydraulic Institute (HI)
I. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA)
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 336310-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
6. If additional panels are required on same row, cut away 4 inches of installed panel core, install new
panel against installed panel, and overlap new panel with installed panel fabric.
7. If additional rows of panels are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches of fabric.
8. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches below finish grade.
9. For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches for overlap.
K. Do not use drainage panels as protection for waterproof membrane unless approved by factory -
authorized service representative of waterproofing membrane manufacturer. Submit approval if so used.
L. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course . Place material in loose -depth layers not
exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away
from building.
3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken
continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and
couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5
percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and
with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being
connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
3.07 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell -and -spigot joints.
3.08 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage:
1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes
in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
2. In nonvehicular -traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser
extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast -in-place concrete anchor, 12 by
12 by 4 inches in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch above grade.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid -wall -piping storm drainage system.
C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation Subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation
of green warning tapes directly over piping.
1. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow
before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
satisfactory.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of
uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION
SUBDRAINAGE 334600-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
2.06 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330
gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle -punched continuous filament.
2. Style(s): Flat and sock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving.
3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Underground Subdrainage Piping:
1. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell -and -spigot joints.
3.04 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS
A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping:
1. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts.
3.05 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have
been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches
deep and 12 inches wide.
B. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to
compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with
adhesive or tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform
tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing
and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat -style geotextile filter fabric.
I. Place layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4
inches.
J. Install vertical drainage panels as follows:
1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.
2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing. Install as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation"
Article. Do not install aggregate.
3. Separate 4 inches of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches of core. Wrap fabric around
end of remaining core.
4. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe.
5. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of pipe. Place core side of panel against
wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place nails
from 2 to 6 inches below top of panel, approximately 48 inches apart. Construction adhesives,
metal stick pins, or double- double -sided tape may be used instead of nails. Do not penetrate
waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer.
SUBDRAINAGE 334600-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following:
1. Foundations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 waterproofing Sections for molded -sheet drainage panels.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
B. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Perforated -wall pipe and fittings.
2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
B. Approval of waterproofing manufacturer's service agent for use of drainage panels against and for
waterproofing membrane protection.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.03 PERFORATED -WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell -and -spigot ends, for loose joints.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub.
2.05 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31
Section "Earth Moving."
SUBDRAINAGE 334600-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Joints
1. Bell and spigot pipe: Follow manufacturer's instructions for assembling PVC pipe with bell and
spigot ends using elastomeric seals.
2. HDPE Pipe: HDPE pipe shall be joined by in -field heat fused joints. Heat fusion welding of
polyethylene pipe shall be 100 percent efficient by forming a joint with a weld strength equal to or
greater than the tensile strength of the pipe itself. Pipe shall be jointed into continuous length on
the job site above ground. The jointing method shall be a heat fusion, butt weld method and shall
be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturers recommendations. The fusion equipment shall
meet the pipe manufacturer's requirements for fusion alignment, heat and fusion pressure.
a. Heat fusion machine operators shall have at least one year of experience in operation of
fusion equipment in the field making fusion joints in large diameter HDPE pipe. Before
starting the fusion of HDPE pipe in the main pipe line, the contractor shall make two on-site
test fusions to verify the fusion machine and the operator of the machine is qualified to make
the on site fusions of HDPE pipe. The test fusions shall include one bend test and one
hydrostatic test. Follow the pipe manufacturer's guidelines in performing the bend and
hydrostatic tests on the test fusions. Fusion of the main line pipe shall not start until the test
fusions have successfully passed the bend and hydrostatic tests. The pipe manufacturer
shall provide visual guidelines for inspecting the butt, saddle and socket fusion joints.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test all storm drain pipe according to ISPWC 2003 edition section 601 paragraph 3.5.
END OF SECTION
STORM DRAIN 334112-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 334112 - STORM DRAIN
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Scope: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install pipe, fittings and related items for the Storm Drain
complete as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings.
B. Drawings: The drawings indicate the general arrangement and location of pipe and fittings. The
CONTRACTOR shall verify the location of all items furnished, installed or connected by him to fit specific
site conditions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
A. General: All pipe and fittings shall be of the type and size as specified herein. Unless specifically
shown otherwise on the drawings, pipe materials shall be as specified below:
B. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Gravity Sewer pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D-3034 SDR 35
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Gravity Sewer Pipe. Pipe shall be fabricated from PVC plastic
having a cell class 12454-B as defined in ASTM D 1784. Joints shall be integral bell and spigot
fabricated so the gasket is compressed radially on the pipe spigot to form a watertight seal in accordance
with ASTM D 3212. Gaskets: ASTM F477, elastomeric seal.
C. High-density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe (HDPE) conforming to ASTM D3350, F 714, DR
17, Pressure Class 100 psi. The material used in the manufacture of the pipe shall conform to ASTM
D3350 cell class 345444C. The pipe shall be manufactured to IPS pipe outside diameter sizes. Pipe
shall be fabricated with a permanent green color strip pattern along the outside of the pipe. The green
stripe pattern shall consist of at least four equally spaced stripes and shall be added at the extrusion
process. Connection between lengths of pipe shall be made using on-site heat fusion process.
1. Fittings shall be fabricated by the pipe manufacturer using a heat fusion process to fabricate the
fittings to a pressure rating to match the connecting pipe using butt fusion joints. Molded fittings
shall be manufactured in accordance with either ASTM D2683 (for socket fused joints) or ASTM
D3261 (for butt fused joints). Connection of HDPE Pipe concrete manholes and structure shall be
embedded HDPE anchor rings or bolted flanges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: The methods employed in handling and placing of pipe, fittings, and equipment shall be such
as to ensure that after installation and testing they are in good condition.
1. The backfilling of buried pipe is specified in Trenching and Backfill.
2. Fittings shall be manufacturers standard fittings. Any additional deflection shall be made by
deflecting pipe at the joints. Deflections per pipe section shall not exceed manufacturers
recommendations.
3. All piping and appurtenances shall be installed in the positions and to accurate lines, elevations
and grades as shown on the plans.
STORM DRAIN 334112-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances
specified.
3.17 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.
END OF SECTION
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-11
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place.
Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of
abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods
suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use
one procedure below:
1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12
inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.
C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.14 PAINTING
A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, chalk,
dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. Paint the
following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer:
1. Concrete Manholes: All interior.
B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC-PA 1 and paint according to SSPC-PA 1
and SSPC-Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry -applied, corrosion -resistant coating.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation
of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
C. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for
leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Gravity -Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, UNI -B-6, and the following:
a. Exception: Piping with soiltightjoints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
C. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.
6. Force -Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and
anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating
pressure, but not less than [150 psig] <Insert other>.
a. Ductile -Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section.
b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-10
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. Install constructed -in-place dry wells according to the following:
1. Install brick lining material dry and laid flat, with staggered joints for seepage. Build to diameter
and depth indicated.
2. Install block lining material dry, with staggered joints and 20 percent minimum of blocks on side for
seepage. Install precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes for seepage. Build to diameter
and depth indicated.
3. Extend lining material to height where top of manhole will be approximately [8 inches] <Insert
other> below finished grade.
4. Backfill bottom of inside of lining with filtering material to level at least [12 inches] <Insert other>
above bottom.
5. Extend effluent inlet pipe [12 inches] <Insert other> into lining and terminate into side of tee fitting.
6. Backfill around outside of lining with filtering material to top level of lining.
7. Install manhole over top of dry well. Support cover on undisturbed soil. Do not support cover on
lining.
3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.
3.11 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners,
and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.
F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints.
G. Embed channel sections in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity -flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in
Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Connect force -main pressure piping to building's storm drainage force mains specified in Division 22
Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Terminate piping where indicated.
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire Wye fitting, plus 6 -inch
overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6
inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground
manholes and structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of
concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through
pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise
indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of
concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Use epoxy -bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping
materials.
4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while
making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
C. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors."
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities"
Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or
ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints.
2. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal joints or
ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.
C. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.
3.05 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated.
B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated.
C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated.
3.06 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.
1. Use light-duty, top -loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas.
2. Use medium -duty, top -loading classification drains in paved foot -traffic areas.
3. Use heavy-duty, top -loading classification drains in vehicle -traffic service areas.
4. Use extra -heavy-duty, top -loading classification drains in roads areas.
B. Embed drains in 4 -inch minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.
E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.
Embed trench sections in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
3.07 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891.
C. Construct cast -in-place manholes as indicated.
D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast -in -place -concrete manholes are to be built.
E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops
3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
3.08 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.09 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.
1. Install filter fabric around outside of unit.
2. Install filtering material around outside of unit.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
4. Cover: Precast, reinforced -concrete slab, designed for structural loading according to ASTM C 890
and made according to ASTM C 913. Include slab dimensions that will extend 12 inches minimum
beyond edge of excavation, with bituminous coating over entire surface. Cast cover with opening
for manhole in center.
5. Manhole: 24 -inch- diameter, reinforced -concrete access lid with steel lift rings. Include bituminous
coating over entire surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure sewer
piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.
C. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between
smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force -main joints.
B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings
with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range:
1. PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific
installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings
according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation
requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections
unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking,
or a combination of both.
F. Install gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
3. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
G. Install corrosion -protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping according to
ASTM A 674 orAWWA C105:
1. Hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. Ductile -iron pipe and fittings.
4. Special pipe fittings.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Curb Inlets: Vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions indicated.
F. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty
frames and grates.
G. Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions indicated.
Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
H. Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated.
2.11 STORMWATER DETENTION STRUCTURES
A. Cast -in -Place Concrete, Stormwater Detention Structures: Construct of reinforced -concrete bottom,
walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy -traffic, structural
loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.
1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation.
2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced -concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match
24 -inch- diameter frame and cover.
3. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1
step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 -
to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of structure to finished grade is less than 60
inches .
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile -iron castings designed for heavy-
duty service. Include 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch minimum width flange, and 26 -inch -
diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover.
2.12 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast -in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.
B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone
for Erosion and Sediment Control."
1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-3, screen opening 2 inches.
2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches.
3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, screen opening 5 inches.
C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. FS -2, No. 4
screen opening, average -size, graded stone.
D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1,
3 -ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.
2.13 DRY WELLS
A. Description: ASTM C913, precast, reinforced, perforated concrete rings. Include the following:
1. Floor: Cast -in-place concrete.
2. Cover: Liftoff -type concrete cover with cast -in lift rings.
3. Wall Thickness: 4 inches minimum with 1 -inch diameter or 1 -by -3 -inch- maximum slotted
perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis of ring.
a. Total Free Area of Perforations: Approximately 15 percent of ring interior surface.
b. Ring Construction: Designed to be self -aligning.
4. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel.
B. Description: Manufactured PE side panels and top cover that assemble into 50 -gal. storage capacity
units.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Flo -Well Products, Ltd.
2. Side Panels: With knockout ports for piping and seepage holes.
3. Top Cover: With knockout port for drain.
4. Filter Fabric: As recommended by unit manufacturer.
5. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel.
C. Description: Constructed -in-place aggregate type. Include the following:
1. Lining: Clay or concrete bricks.
2. Lining: Concrete blocks or precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes.
3. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Sloped -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components:
1. Channel Sections: Interlocking -joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4 -inch inside
width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number,
sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth.
a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate.
2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in
channels.
a. Material: Galvanized steel.
3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated.
4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections.
D. Narrow -Width, Level -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components:
1. Channel Sections: Interlocking -joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 5 -inch inside
width and 9 -3/4 -inch- deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with NPS 4 outlets in number and
locations indicated.
2. Grates with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels.
a. Material: Galvanized steel
3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated.
4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections.
E. Wide -Width, Level -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components:
1. Channel Sections: Interlocking -joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 8 -inch inside
width and 13 -3/4 -inch- deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with outlets in number, sizes,
and locations indicated.
2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels.
a. Material: Fiberglass.
3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated.
4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections.
F. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Channel -Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer.
2.09 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,
with provision for sealant joints.
1. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
2. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, 48 -inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth
indicated.
3. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or Flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of
cone of size that matches grade rings.
4. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching
catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
6. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced -concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match
24 -inch- diameter frame and grate.
7. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1
step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 -
to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than
Winches.
8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base
section.
2.10 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.
B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility
standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions
according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
D. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Overall Width(s): 12-1/3 inches.
a. Grate Openings: 3/8 inch circular or 3/8 -by -3 -inch slots.
2.06 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,
with provision for sealant joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as
required to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of
cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1
step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 -
to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60
inches
9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching
manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
10. Grade Rings: Reinforced -concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole
frame and cover.
11. Protective Coating: Plant -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15 -mil minimum
thickness applied to exterior surfaces.
12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch- minimum width
flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover,
using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Protective Coating: Foundry -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 15 -
mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.07 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-
cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
2.08 POLYMER -CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Description, General: Modular system of precast, polymer -concrete channel sections, grates, and
appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number
of units required to form total lengths indicated.
B. Manufacturers:
1. ABT, Inc.
2. ACO Polymer Products, Inc.
3. Innovative Plastics Products. Inc.
4. Mea-Josam Div.; Josam Company.
5. Strongwell; Lenoir City Div.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion -
resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco Inc.
C. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
e. NDS Inc.
f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion -
resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.
b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
E. Ring -Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to ft inside bell of larger
pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to ft inside ring.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco Inc.
b. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
F. Nonpressure -Type Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical
coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
2.05 DRAINS
A. Gray -Iron Area Drains: ASME Al 12.21.1 M, round body with anchor flange and round secured grate.
Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Top -Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty.
B. Gray -Iron Trench Drains: ASME Al 12.21.1 M, 6 -inch- wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor
flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular secured grate. Include units of total length indicated
and number of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Company.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
C. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.
f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Top -Loading Classification(s): Extra -heavy duty.
C. Steel Trench Drains: Factory fabricated from ASTM A 242/A 242M, welded steel plate to form
rectangular body with uniform bottom slope of 2 percent down toward outlet, anchor flange, and grate.
Include units of total length indicated, bottom outlet of size indicated, outlet strainer, acid -resistant
enamel coating on inside and outside surfaces, and grate with openings of total free area at least two
times cross-sectional area of outlet.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.
2. Plate Thickness(es): 1/4 inch.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames and covers,
design calculations, and concrete design -mix report.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench
and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between
manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1
inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and
piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.
E. Field quality -control test reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150 for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric
seals.
1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints
and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile -iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push -
on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets.
2.04 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion -
resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber.
2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gravity -flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following
components:
1. Special fittings for expansion and deflection.
2. Backwater valves.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Drains.
5. Corrosion -protection piping encasement.
6. Precast concrete manholes.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic.
B. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene -monomer rubber.
C. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic.
D. LLDPE: Linear low-density, polyethylene plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
H. RTRF: Glass -fiber -reinforced, thermosetting -resin fltting.
I. RTRP: Glass -fiber -reinforced, thermosetting -resin pipe.
J. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage -Piping Pressure Rating: 10 -foot head of water or equivalent Pipe
joints shall be at least silttight, unless otherwise indicated.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Special pipe fittings.
2. Backwater valves.
3. Drains.
4. Channel drainage systems.
5. Storage and leaching chambers.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers
2. Catch Basins and Stormwater Inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames,
covers, and grates.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Purge air and refill with water.
d. Disconnect water supply.
e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.
I. Option: Test ductile -iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section
Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -
B -6, and the following:
a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.
b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924.
7. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances
specified.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material. Flush with potable water.
END OF SECTION
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-10
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
b. Use epoxy -bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping
materials.
4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap
connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
Connect to grease interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors."
3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place.
Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of
abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods
suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Manholes: Excavate around manhole as required and use either procedure below:
1. Remove manhole and close open ends of remaining piping.
2. Remove top of manhole down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches of top
with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.
C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.11 PAINTING
A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, chalk,
dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. Paint the
following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer:
1. Precast Concrete Manholes: All interior.
B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC-PA 1 and paint according to SSPC-PA 1
and SSPC-Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry -applied corrosion -resistant coating.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation
of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.
1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground manholes.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
C. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for
leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and the following:
a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during
24-hour period.
b. Close openings in system and fill with water.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
3.05 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Construct cast -in-place manholes as indicated.
D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast -in -place -concrete manholes are to be built.
E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
G. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops
3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install manhole cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.
3.07 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated.
B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated.
C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. Secure units to
sidewalls.
3.08 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe
fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts.
Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use light-duty, top -loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas.
2. Use medium -duty, top -loading classification cleanouts in paved foot -traffic areas.
3. Use heavy-duty, top -loading classification cleanouts in vehicle -traffic service areas.
4. Use extra -heavy-duty, top -loading classification cleanouts in roads
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in -place -concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set
with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity -flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in
Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping"
B. Connect pressure, force -main piping to building's sanitary force mains specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Terminate piping where indicated.
C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire Wye fitting, plus 6 -inch
overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire Wye with not less than 6
inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground
manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be
packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure
wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of
pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12
inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
a. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless
otherwise indicated.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific
installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings
according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation
requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking,
or combination of both.
F. Install gravity -Flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Install piping below frost line.
3. Install hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook."
4. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook."
5. Install ductile -iron, gravity sewer piping according to ASTM A 746.
6. Install ductile -iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
7. Install stainless-steel drainage piping according to ASME Al 12.3.1.
8. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
9. Install PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
10. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
11. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
12. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668.
13. Install nonreinforced -concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe
Installation Manual."
14. Install reinforced -concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe
Installation Manual."
G. Install corrosion -protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping according to
ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105:
1. Hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. Ductile -iron pipe and fittings.
4. Special pipe fittings.
H. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain
swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping
at end of day and when work stops.
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing"
Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent -cemented
joints.
2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or
ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints.
3. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal joints or
ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Manhole Cover Inserts: Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame and cover and
designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing.
1. Manufacturers:
a. FRW Industries; a Syneco Systems, Inc. company.
b. Knutson Enterprises.
C. L.F. Manufacturing, Inc.
d. Parson Environmental Products, Inc.
2. Type: With drainage and vent holes.
2.11 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix,
4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and
benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides
to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 8 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum
water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Paint: SSPC-Paint 16.
B. PE Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, with at least 8 -mil thickness or other equivalent, impervious material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure sewer
piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.
C. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between
smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force -main joints.
S. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings
with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range:
1. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness.
3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness or high-density, crosslaminated PE film of
0.004 -inch minimum thickness.
4. Material: High-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch minimum thickness.
5. Calor: Black
2.10 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,
with provision for sealant joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as re-
quired to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type, unless concentric -cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of
cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connec-
tion.
8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1
step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 -
to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60
inches.
9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching
manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
10. Grade Rings: Reinforced -concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole
frame and cover.
11. Protective Coating: Plant -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15 -mil
minimum thickness applied to interior surfaces.
12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch- minimum width
flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover,
using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Protective Coating: Foundry -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 15 -
mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16
(ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy -traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with
provision for sealant joints.
1. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole
as required to prevent flotation.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
3. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connec-
tion.
4. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1
step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 -
to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60
inches
5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching
manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
6. Grade Rings: Reinforced -concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole
frame and cover.
7. Protective Coating: Plant -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15 -mil minimum
thickness applied to interior surfaces.
8. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch- minimum width
flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover,
using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Protective Coating: Foundry -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 15 -
mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Ductile -Iron Expansion Joints: Three-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained -
type, ductile -iron, bell -and -spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include
rating for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for expansion indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
b. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
C. JCM Industries.
d. Smith -Blair, Inc.
2.07 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Gray -Iron Backwater Valves: ASME Al 12.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Company.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
C. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.
f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub -and -spigot ends.
3. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve,
and hub -and -spigot ends.
4. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet.
B. PVC Backwater Valves: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check
valve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Canplas Inc.
b. IPS Corporation.
C. NDS Inc.
d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Zurn Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2.08 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray -Iron Cleanouts: ASME At 12.36.2M, round, gray -iron housing with clamping device and round,
secured, scoriated, gray -iron cover. Include gray -iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and
countersunk, tapered -thread, brass closure plug.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
e. Wafts Industries, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.
g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2. Top -Loading Classification: Extra -heavy duty.
3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings.
B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout
of same material as sewer piping.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Canplas Inc.
b. IPS Corporation.
C. NDS Inc.
d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Zurn Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2.09 CORROSION -PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT
A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
1. Form: Tube.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion -
resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.
b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
E. Ring -Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger
pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to ft inside ring.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco Inc.
b. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
F. Nonpressure -Type, Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical
coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
2.05 PRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Reducing or transition, metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, forjoining underground
pressure piping. Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating and ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined.
B. Tubular -Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.
b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Romac Industries, Inc.
f. Smith -Blair, Inc.
g. Viking Johnson.
2. Center -Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard
3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material.
C. Split -Sleeve Couplings: With split sleeve with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt
fasteners.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Brico Industries.
2. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard
3. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating.
4. Gasket Material: O -rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material.
2.06 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Ductile -Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical -
joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball -joint sections and 1 or
more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for offset and
expansion indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
b. Romac Industries, Inc.
C. Star Pipe Products.
B. Ductile -Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint, flexing section, gaskets, and
restrained -joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum
working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection.
1. Manufacturers:
a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1
inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and pip-
ing. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.
F. Field quality -control test reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
2.03 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric
seals.
1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 6: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints
and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile -iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push -
on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets.
B. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, minimum wall thickness SDR 35, with
bell -and -spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2.04 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion -
resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber.
2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion -
resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco Inc.
C. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
e. NDS Inc.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 333113 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gravity -Flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following
components:
1. Adjust list below to suit Project.
2. Special fittings for expansion and deflection.
3. Backwater valves.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Corrosion -protection piping encasement.
6. Precast concrete manholes.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Retain abbreviations that remain after this Section has been edited.
B. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic.
C. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene -monomer rubber.
D. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic.
E. LLDPE: Linear low-density, polyethylene plastic.
F. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
G. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
I. RTRF: Glass -fiber -reinforced, thermosetting -resin fitting.
J. RTRP: Glass -fiber -reinforced, thermosetting -resin pipe.
K. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage -Piping Pressure Rating: 10 -foot head of water or equivalent
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Special pipe fittings.
2. Backwater valves.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers
C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench
and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between
manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
D. Retain paragraph below if profiles are not shown on Drawings.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 333113-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWAMIT
D. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and
equipment.
C. Connect water -distribution piping to utility water main Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve
D. Connect water -distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire -suppression piping.
E. Connect waste piping from concrete vault drains to storm -drainage system. See Division 33 Section
"Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for connection to storm -sewer piping.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have
hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system.
Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one -and -one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test
pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more
hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quads per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with
new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.
C. Prepare reports of testing activities.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground
water -distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes
are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water -service piping, on main
electrical meter panel. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for identifying
devices.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water -distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new water -distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is
not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as
follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with one of following water/chlorine solutions:
1) containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours
2) containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours
b. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water
coming from system.
C. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if
biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.
6. Install curb valve in water -service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
D. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.
E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 60 inches, with top at least 12 inches below level of
maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:
F. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that
cannot be disturbed.
G. Extend water -service piping and connect to water -supply source and building -water -piping systems at
outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water -service piping at building wall until building -water -piping systems are installed.
Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to
building -water -piping systems when those systems are installed.
H. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing"
I. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
J. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use
restrained -joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie -rods and clamps, and other supports.
3.06 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Make pipe joints according to the following:
1. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints
with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD,
and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
3.07 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water -distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained -
joint types that may be used include the following:
1. Concrete thrust blocks.
2. Locking mechanical joints.
3. Set -screw mechanical retainer glands.
4. Bolted flanged joints.
5. Heat -fused joints.
6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include
anchorages for the following piping systems:
1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile -Iron, Water -Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.
2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water -Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.
3. Fire -Service -Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.
C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion -resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous
anchorage devices.
3.08 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with
stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
C. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet.
3.09 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or
thrust blocks, and support in upright position.
B. Wet -Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
a. Standard: AWWA C502.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
3. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-
iron caps with steel chains.
4. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat.
5. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise.
6. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd -gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may
be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
D. Flanges, unions, grooved -end -pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints
indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
E. Underground Combined Water -Service and Fire -Service -Main Piping shall be the following:
1. PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe listed for fire -protection service; PVC fabricated or molded fittings of
same class as pipe; and gasketed joints.
3.03 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Application: Use mechanical -joint -end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation.
Use threaded- or flanged -end valves for installation in vaults. Use corporation valves and curb valves
with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.
B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient -seated gate
valves with valve box.
3.04 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping -system common requirements.
3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Water -Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size
and in location indicated.
B. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP -60.
2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping
machine and connect water -service piping.
4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP -60. Install valve with stem pointing up
and with valve box.
C. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:
1. Install service -saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement
required by utility company standards.
2. Install service -saddle assemblies on water -service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for
corporation valves.
3. Use drilling machine compatible with service -saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole
in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water -service piping.
4. Install corporation valves into service -saddle assemblies.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.
3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
2.05 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping -Sleeve Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
C. Flowserve.
d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.
g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
a. Standard: MSS SP -60.
b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile -iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged
outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material
being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.
C. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient -seated gate valve with one raised face
flange mating tapping -sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable
extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section
with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee -handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest
buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
2.06 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation.
b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.
C. Milliken Valve Company.
d. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.
e. Pratt, Henry Company.
f. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.
2. Description: Resilient -seated eccentric.
a. Standard: MSS SP -108.
b. Body: Cast iron.
C. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum CWP.
d. Seat Material: Suitable for potable -water service.
2.07 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div.
C. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
d. American Foundry Group, Inc.
e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.
I. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
j. Troy Valve; a division of Penn -Troy Manufacturing, Inc.
k. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 2-1/2 outlets, 5 -1/4 -inch main valve,
drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical -joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550.
Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression -type valve opening against pressure and closing
with pressure.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
5. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or
AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and
steel bolts.
2.02 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials.
B. Plastic Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Tubular -Sleeve Pipe Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc.
e. JCM Industries.
f. Smith -Blair, Inc.
g. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets,
end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.
a. Standard: AWWA C219.
b. Center -Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic
rubber.
C. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
d. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material.
C. Split -Sleeve Pipe Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Victaulic Depend -O -Lok.
2. Description: Metal, bolted, split -sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing pad and
closure plates, 0 -ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners.
a. Standard: AWWA C219.
b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard
C. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating.
d. Gasket Material: 0 -rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated.
e. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material.
2.04 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA, Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div.
C. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.
I. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div.
j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
k. NIBCO INC.
I. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate,
resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
1) Standard: AWWA C509.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.
E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire -service -main
products.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and
hydrant supervision for fire -service -main piping for fire suppression.
G. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable -water -service piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water -service piping and specialties for domestic water.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew -point
temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is
necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling
to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of
floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water -Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary water -distribution service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water -distribution service without Owner's written permission.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end.
1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire -service mains if indicated.
2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell -and -spigot or double -bell ends.
Include elastomeric gasket in each bell.
3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell -and -spigot or double -bell ends. Include
elastomeric gasket in each bell.
4. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or
AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C1 11. rubber.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 331113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water -distribution piping and related components outside the building for combined
water service and fire -service mains.
1. Utility companies usually provide water meters and bill charges directly or through Contractor to
Owner. Contact utility company serving the site for information. Delete paragraph below if water
meters are provided by utility company or Contractor. If utility company furnishes water meters,
identify the company here and specify what it will do; then edit text to suit Project.
B. Utility -furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NPS: Nominal Pipe Size
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field
assembly, and components.
1. Retain subparagraph below if equipment includes wiring.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms.
3. Retain first paragraph below if Drawings do not include detailed plans or if Project involves unusual
coordination requirements.
C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area,
drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and
elevations.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and
backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable -water -service piping, including
materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire -suppression water -service piping,
including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331113-1
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Increase pressure in 25 psi increments and inspect each joint between
increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour, decrease to 0 psi. Slowly
increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour.
D. Chilled Water Communications Duct Installation: Sleeving through the east pit wall, run
the two three inch PVC communications ducts to the east alongside the chilled water
piping. Place a pre -cast concrete pull box at the point of turn to the north, (avoid conflict
with the thrust block) and continue the run across to the new Science and Technology
Building. Sleeve and seal into Science and Technology Building. Seal watertight.
END OF SECTION 330660
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 330660-4
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Valve Boxes: Provide valve boxes as indicated, constructed of 2 piece cast iron
5-1/2" shaft screw type (M&H Valve and Fitting Co. Cat No. 562.S). Provide
18"x18" collar around valve cover. Refer to drawings for additional detail.
PART III - EXECUTION - CHILLED WATER
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which system's materials and products
are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Chilled Water Pipe Installation:
1. After excavation, using styrofoam board, form a trench 10 — 12 inches wider than
the pipe pair. Place and compact a 4 — 6" layer of sand along the length of the
trench. Concurrently fill behind the forms with pea gravel as the work and fill
progresses. Prepare for guides and thrust blocking at points indicated.
2. Ductile -Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "Standard for
Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances". Place
additional sand up to the mid line of the pipe and compact. Place additional sand
up to and over the piping to a depth of 4 — 6" over and compact. Place a layer of
2" Styrofoam board over the top of the trench, form to form.
3. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 42 - 48" below finished
grade including sand, gravel and insulation board.
4. Service Termination: Terminate piping inside building where indicated. Provide
sleeve cast into building wall, and double water -tight sleeve seal (Linkseal).
Provide anchor and blind flange or grooved joint for connection by Division 23.
5. Reference details on drawings for required sand bed and additional trenching,
anchoring, etc. requirements.
6. At points of crossover with electrical ductbank, installation may be modified to
minimize conflict. Ductbank may protrude into chilled water bank, but do not
threaten plastic ducts with physical damage from settlement, etc.
7. Thrust Block: Provide thrust blocks at each elbow, tee, valve, etc. using 4,000
psi reinforced concrete. Refer to drawings for additional detail.
B. Installation of Gate Valves:
1. General: Install valves as indicated with stems pointing up. Provide valve box
over underground valves.
2. Anchorage: Anchor all valves into concrete thrust block, poured in place.
C. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blocks have
sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing, and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
1. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2-hrs.
(175 psi minimum)
2. Test fails if leakage exceeds 2 -qts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints, irrespective
of pipe diameter.
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 330660-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Piping: Provide pipes of the following materials, of weight/class indicated. Provide pipe
fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining method
as indicated.
Ductile Iron Pipe System:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe with bell and spigot joints: AWWA C151; Class 51 Use
only in non -traffic areas, unless otherwise indicated. In traffic areas use
Class 53 or heavier.
b. Fittings: Ductile -iron complying with AWWA C110, with rubber gaskets
conforming to AWWA C111.
2. Alternate Ductile Iron Pipe System:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe with grooved joints: AWWA C151; Class 53 or heavier.
b. Fittings: Victaulic ductile iron with machined flexible or rigid grooved
ends to suit.
C. Couplings: Victaulic Style 31 with Coal Tar enamel coating, with
stainless steel bolts and nuts, with Victaulic "FlushSeal" Grade "S" nitrile
gaskets
C. Insulation System:
Insulating Board: 2" thick Styrofoam 'Blue Board." Cut to suit.
2. In -trench fill: Clean sand, minimum 6 inches all around and between pipes.
D. Chilled Water System Control Communications Ducts
1. Duct material: Two 2" underground grey PVC conduits with long radius fittings.
2. Pull boxes: 24" x 24" precast concrete boxes, depth to suit, used to pull and turn
long runs of HVAC controls data and communications wiring.
2.2 VALVES:
A. Gate Valves 12" and Smaller: AWWA C500, 175 psi working pressure. Provide
threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configurations to suit size of valve and piping
connection. Provide inside screw type for use with curb valve box, epoxy coated, iron
body, bronze -mounted, rubber encapsulated ductile iron wedge, non -rising stem.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gate valves of
one of the following:
a. American Flow Control Series 500
b. Waterous Co.
B. Gate Valve Accessories:
1. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, caps, bends
and valves. After installation, apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable
corrosion -retarding material to surfaces of ferrous anchorages.
a. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: Steel, ASTM A 506.
b. Rods: Steel, ASTM A 575.
C. Rod Couplings: Malleable -iron, ASTM A 197.
d. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A 307.
e. Cast -Iron Washers: Gray -iron, ASTM A 126.
f. Thrust Blocks: Concrete, 4,000 psi.
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 330660-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
SECTION 330600 — UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this
section. Work is primarily related to running chilled water lines between the capped lines
in West Campus Drive to the new Science and Technology Building. Relates to
distribution system chilled water, supply and return. Also includes a pair of PVC data
communications conduits for HVAC related control.
B. Earthwork for excavation and backfill. Provide complete for this work. Comply with
Section 330500 "Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water
Utilities" and Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities".
C. "Concrete Work". Provide complete for this work for anchors, thrust blocks, etc. Comply
with Section 330500 "Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water
Utilities" and Section 330500 "Common Work Results for Utilities'.
D. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition', for other requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified
materials of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years. Use domestically manufactured pipe and
fittings.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Licensed firm with at least 3 years of successful installation
experience on projects with local area underground water work similar to that required for
project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for insulation materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for underground piping systems showing piping
materials, size, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures,
connections, thrust blocks, and anchors. Show interface and spatial relationship between
piping and proximate structures.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed water system
piping and products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for system materials and
products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
PART II - PRODUCTS - CHILLED WATER
2.1 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types,
pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 330660-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
2.05 MANHOLE JOINT SEALANT
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Flexible butyl resin sealant suitable for sealing joints between manhole sections exposed to internal
water pressure.
2.06 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANT
A. For the exterior joint sealant, use a flexible Butyl resin, bonded to a geotextile material, with an integral
bonder to bond the sealant strip to manhole concrete joint.
PART 3 • EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE BASES
A. Level area under base to within 1/2 inch of true grade, provide base materials as shown, and compact to
96 percent of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D-698.
B. Construct concrete base for the manhole so that the first section of the precast manhole section will have
uniform bearing throughout the full circumference of the section wall, extending at least 3 inches into the
concrete base forming a completely watertight joint.
C. Use precast concrete manhole bases.
3.02 BARREL SECTIONS
A. Place precast manhole sections vertical and true to line and grade as established by the ENGINEER.
B. Construct manholes so they are absolutely watertight both in the floor and for the full height of the walls.
Seal all joints watertight using flexible joint sealant. Fill pick holes with grout.
3.03 MANHOLE EXTENSIONS
A. Do not use more than three grade rings. Fabricate manhole sections the proper length to set the top of
manhole cover to finish grade. Manhole frames shall be sealed and grouted to the top slab to resist
water infiltration.
3.04 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Cast, mortar or attach steps by mechanical means to meet the loading and testing requirements of
ASTM C 478 and Test Method C 497.
3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Seal space between the hole in the manhole and the pipe entering the manhole using neoprene boot
seals at all pipe penetrations. Grout inside of manhole at seal boots to fill seal space.
3.06 JOINT SEALING
A. Seal all joints in manhole sections using double seals. One seal compressed in the joint between
manhole sections and the second seal wrapped around the outside of the manhole joint. Seal all joints
in all manholes. Grout pack grade rings between the top of the manhole and cover frame.
END OF SECTION
MANHOLES 330513-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 330513 — MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install precast manholes, including precast barrel sections and top slab, cast iron frame and
cover as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCE
A. ASTM C-478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
B. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for materials to be installed under this section.
B. Manufacturer's certification that manholes and appurtenances meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. Installation instructions, to be maintained at job site.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Provide manholes with barrel sections fabricated in maximum lengths possible to minimize joins
between sections.
B. Conform to ASTM C-478.
C. Use flat slab covers where specified.
2.02 FRAME AND COVER
A. ASTM A48 cast iron, 24 inch opening.
B. All castings to be planed or ground where necessary, to ensure complete contact between ring and
cover.
C. Provide vented covers on sewer and storm drain manholes where shown on the drawings.
D. Provide Neenah R -3430-A covers or equal on standard catch manhole.
2.03 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Steps shall be No. 4 deformed steel reinforced bar, covered with a polypropylene plastic, per Idaho
Standards for Public Works Construction SD -509. Product shall be Kor-N-Seal by NPC, Inc. or
approved equal.
2.04 PIPE PENETRATION SEALS
A. Seal all pipes entering manholes with elastomeric seals cast into the manhole section and having a
neoprene boot to fit the pipe. The boot shall have a collar with a stainless steel band clamp to seal the
pipe at the boot. The seal shall provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole.
MANHOLES 330513-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
3.09 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of base.
3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete"
3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.11 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and
anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500- 9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
J. Pressure -Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain -end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting
with proprietary crimping tool according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according
to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 28461D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings
according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings
according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. Plastic Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain -End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
0. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each
piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.
3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease
fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.07 PAINTING
A. Painting of piped utility systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.
2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot
noninsulated piping.
3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion,
pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on the Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or
parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core -drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches
above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements.
3.04 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe
fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is
specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do
not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.121D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved -end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder
alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,,
using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock
with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility
identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for
proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name
are indicated.
2.06 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.07 FLOWABLE FILL
A. Description: Low -strength -concrete, flowable-slurry mix.
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland.
2. Density: 145-Ib/cu. ft..
3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse.
4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine.
5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly -ash mineral.
6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
7. Strength: 200 psig 28 days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure
Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill, and cap or
plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and
store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment
and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove
damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.02 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Dielectric flanges or dielectric flange kits.
B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric nipples.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8: Dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits.
4. NPS 10 and NPS 12: Dielectric flange kits.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1.
Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational
instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd -gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may
be in pressurized spray -can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Snap -on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap -on type. Include
color -coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pressure -Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color -coded, pressure -sensitive -
vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers, extending 360
degrees around pipe at each location.
G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe markers, at
least three times letter height and of length required for label.
H. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect.
I. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application
length.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of
flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color -coded, pressure -sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least
3 mils thick.
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2 inches for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 -inch
sequenced numbers. Include 5/32 -inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032 -inch- thick, polished brass
2. Material: 0.0375 -inch- thick stainless steel.
3. Material: 3/32 -inch- thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer.
4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
5. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S -hooks.
M. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic -resin -laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units.
4. Fasteners: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and
speed.
7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
b. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric -Flange Kits:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum
b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
C. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. Description: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3
and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
b. End Connections: Threaded.
Dielectric Nipples:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Victaulic Company.
2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.
2.04 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast -Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 33 Sections. If more than
single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith -Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling for underground pressure piping.
D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Spears Manufacturing Co.
2. Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent -cement -joint or threaded end.
E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
b. NIBCO INC.
C. Spears Manufacturing Co.
2. Description: MSS SP -107, CPVC and PVCfour-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel
threaded end, solvent -cement -joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
C. Mission Rubber Company.
d. Plastic Oddities.
2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and
corrosion -resistant metal band on each end.
2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with
separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 180 deg F.
b. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Wafts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description: Factory -fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 and
larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and
that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME At 3.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place concrete and
other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied
to surfaces.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements
are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing,
unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.02 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends
compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller:
1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping joining materials.
2.
Transition fittings.
3.
Dielectric fittings.
4.
Sleeves.
5.
Identification devices.
6.
Grout.
7.
Flowable fill.
8.
Piped utility demolition.
9.
Piping system common requirements.
10.
Equipment installation common requirements.
11.
Painting.
12.
Concrete bases.
13.
Metal supports and anchorages.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and
weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical
contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
C. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic.
D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Identification devices.
B. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Steps and Pavements: Compact in 6-12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for
cohesionless material.
2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact in 6.12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or
I'll material at 85% maximum density for cohesive materials and 90% relative density for
cohesionless soils.
3. Walkways: Compact in 6-12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at
90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for cohesionless
material.
B. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free
water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
1. In sub -freezing weather, work only with non frozen material. Do not leave unconsolidated
material overnight without concluding placement work.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density.
3.2 CONCRETE FOR UTILITY WORK:
A. Provide all concrete for manhole bases, thrust blocks, anchors and other miscellaneous related to
utility installation.
B. Relate to tie rods, anchors, structure, etc.
3.3 THRUST BLOCKS: Follow details on drawings. The objective of thrust blocks is to provide enough soil
bearing surface to resist forces created by pipe line pressure or expansion and contraction. Pipe must be
secured to thrust block material, block material must tie to undisturbed or compacted earth.
3.4 CLEANUP:
A. Remove all excess or reject material from site, leave area clean and smooth. Clean adjacent
paved areas of excavation remnants.
END OF SECTION 330500
EARTHWORK AND CONIC. FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 330500-3
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Sand: Use for backfill over insulated pipe and around manholes. See details on drawings. Use with
care as piping and structures may tend to float with compaction.
2.2 CONCRETE: (Non-structural only - See other sections for structural concrete and reinforcing steel)
A. General: Ready mix or on-site mix.
B. Cement: Portland Type II.
C. Sand and Gravel: Proportions not critical, nominal 1 part sand to 1 part gravel.
D. Provide concrete with maximum water/cement ratio of 0.50; use at least 5-1/2 bags of cement per
cubic yard of concrete. Mix sand, gravel, cement and water to a nominal 3-4 inch slump
consistency, air entrainment 6-1/2 percent +t- 1-1/2 percent, 3,000 psi minimum 28 day test rating.
E. Place concrete as soon as possible. Do not place if ambient is 40°F or less without protection.
Protect from sun, wind, and cold. Provide insulating blankets, and temporary heat as needed.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION:
A. Excavate trenches mechanically, or by hand, in straight lines between anchor and guide points with
uniformly sloped trench bottoms. Remove backfill material which is unacceptable from the site and
legally dispose of same. Use equipment suited for work. Excavate by hand within 2 feet of buried
utilities. Use hand operated, air driven rock hammer tools for any incidental required rock
excavation.
Where excavation is in unconsolidated material, rock or large cobble stone, over -excavate, bring
trench or structure bottom to grade with compacted backfill that is at least 12 inches deep.
e. Provide shoring and protection for workers in trenches.
C. De -water open trenches if ground water or storm water runoff is encountered. Lay piping supports,
anchors, and set footings, etc., only on dry compacted bedding.
D. Provide protections for workers and installation where hot, live steam lines are involved.
E. Excavate as needed for new steam vaults, or enlargement of existing vaults. Protect against cave-
ins
3.2 BACKFILL:
A. Construct steam vaults. Set piping and support on smooth graded trench bottoms.
B. Construct forms for insulation as detailed. Install insulation.
C. Initially backfill and mechanically compact to midpoint of pipe.
D. Do not cover any joints until any pressure tests are completed.
E. Further, place and compact backfill, in layers not to exceed 6 - 8" thick, of moistened material per
layer.
F. Bring backfill up to finish grade or to within 6-8" of finish grade if other trades have landscape or flat
concrete work to do.
3.3 COMPACTION: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density
specified for each area classification indicated below.
A. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following
percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship
(cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following
percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will
not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship (cohesionless soils).
EARTHWORK AND CONC. FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 330500-2
BYU Idaho Science and Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
SECTION 330500 - EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM, CONDENSATE, 8, CHILLED WATER
UTILITIES
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints CES Standard Contract Requirements.
C. See other specification sections for structural reinforcing steel and concrete.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Work in sequence in areas as noted on the drawings and as scheduled with the Owner.
B. Provide excavation for all mechanical and related utility work. Include incidental rock removal
preparatory to steam vault reconstruction, revised steam line routing, and expansion loop
extensions, etc.
C. Provide backfill and compaction for all mechanical and related utility work.
D. Make preparation of sub -grade for vaults, walks, curbs, driveways, etc.
E. Provide concrete forming and placement, and reinforcing steel work required for mechanical utility
installation. Allocate trade responsibility during the bid period so that no work is left out. This
section is primarily responsible to see that the steam system modifications and extensions are
provided, complete, workmanlike, and intact.
The structural dimensions and re -bar requirements for reinforced poured -in-place concrete
manholes are shown on the mechanical drawings. It is expected that the trade doing the actual
work will refer to these drawings for dimensions and steel placement.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer's Qualifications: Licensed firm with 3 years minimum experience in steam related utility
work and familiar with work on the BYU-Idaho campus.
B. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
Owner, and of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Work Schedules: Submit schedules of anticipated work times to facilitate timely visits for review of
work. Clearly identify required utility outages noting the need to limit these outages in both
occurrence and duration.
B. Proposed Methods: Submit a written outline of how work will be accomplished. Note requirement
to keep live steam in service to Buildings throughout the work period, except for scheduled outages
of brief duration.
PARTII- PRODUCTS
2.1 BEDDING MATERIALS:
A. Use only clean compactable materials including sand and gravel suitable for the area of placement.
B. Local material, Use only selected material, free of cobble -rock larger than 2". Use only for volume
backfill, not around pipe or structure, for 12" above or below, or 18" on sides.
C. Pea Gravel: Use for underlayment of direct buried piping, overlayment and general backfill. Settle
and compact after initial placement.
EARTHWORK AND CONC. FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 330500- 1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection
Sodded areas will be accepted at final inspection if —
a. Sodded areas are properly established.
b. Sod is healthy, well rooted, even -colored, free of bare and dead spots and without weeds, open joints,
bare areas, and surface irregularities.
C. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2".
d. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice.
Areas sodded after October 1 will be accepted the following spring (May 15') approximately one
month after start of growing season if specified conditions have been met.
Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance at not additional cost to the
owner until lawns are satisfactory.
3.4 SOD GUARANTEE
A. Protect, water, and replace any damaged sod until acceptance by Owner. Guarantee shall include filling any voids
between sod pieces, repairing any eroded areas, and maintaining sod by watering, mowing, and controlling insects, as
well as advising Owner of any maintenance or watering procedures necessary to care for and promote plant life.
All sod must be in satisfactory condition at the time of the substantial completion inspection.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean up any soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of all deleterious materials.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protection of newly laid sod shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor. Provide acceptable visual barriers
by means of barricades set at appropriate distances and strings or tapes between the barriers as an indication of new
work. Restore any damaged areas cause by erosion, trespassing, vehicular traffic or any other causes until such
time as the lawn is accepted by the owner.
END OF SECTION 329223
329223-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
B.
C.
7
Surface Preparation - Newly Graded Subgrades
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. Limit sod subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
2. Seven days maximum priorto sodding:
a. Prepare subgrade and spread Planting Soil Mix in accordance to specification section 329119 - Fine
Grading and Soil Preparation.
b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
C. Install Landscape Edging as detailed for all turf areas adjacent planting areas.
3. After lawn areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except lawn rollers.
4. After preparation of lawn areas and with topsoil in semi -dry condition, roll lawn planting areas in two directions
at approximately right angles with water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lbs, according to soil type.
5. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is true and uniform, free from
lumps, depressions, and irregularities.
Surface Preparation - Unchanged Subgrades
1. Limit sod subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
2. Remove eAsting grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
3. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 4 inches. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture and break
up all clods and lumps.
4. Remove stones larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension and clods, weeds, sticks, roots, and other extraneous
matter and legally dispose them off of the Owner's property.
Finish Grading
1. Finish grades shall be in accordance with specification section 329119 - Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.
Adjustments of finish grades shall be made at the direction of the
Landscape Architect as required. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to
meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate
future.
2. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before
planting. Do not create muddy soil.
3. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
4. Final grade of soil in all turf areas shall be 1 1/2" below top of adjacent pavement of any kind before laying sod.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Laying of Sod
B.
1. Prior to laying sod, apply 16-16-8 fertilizer to the entire surface to receive sod at the rate of 4 pounds per 1,000
square feet.
2. Lay sod during growing season. Sodding during dry summer period, at freezing temperatures, or over
frozen soil is not acceptable.
3. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting.
4. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints, Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap.
Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Cul out irregular or thin sections with a sharp
knife. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with
subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks
between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
5. Lay sod Flush with adjoining existing sodded surfaces.
6. Lay sod at sloping areas with the long dimension of individual sod strips laid parallel with the contours of the
slope.
7. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 6:1 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod
manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
8. Do not sod slopes steeper than 3:1.
After Sodding Is Complete
1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicularlo each other.
2. Repair and re -roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in
grade will not be permitted.
3. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting to obtain moisture penetration through sod into
top 2" of topsoil.
4. During first two weeks, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of
2 inches.
329223-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch, Lay out temporary
watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.
D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cul. Mow 2 times during the growing season to the specified height.
Do not mow when grass is wet.
1. Mow grass 3 inches high.
E. Lawn Post fertilization: Apply fertilizer after second mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use commercial -grade complete fertilizer, O -F -241C, type 1, grade 16-16-8, level B with guaranteed chemical
analysis of contents marked on containers. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 TURFGRASS SOD
A. Certified Sod
1. Sod species as indicated on drawings. Only sod that has been grown on a commercial sod fans shall be used.
Specified Bella Blue and BioNative sod available from BioGrass Sod Farms, Clark Bell, (801) 562-9090.
2. Sod shall be of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and
development when planted.
3. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality, seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass
seedlings or stolons.
4. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop and weedy
plants at time of harvest.
5. Sod shall be machine cul at a uniform soil thickness of three-quarters inch (3/4") at the time of cutting.
Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch.
Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the suppliers standard width and length.
Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be five percent
5%). Broken pads and torn or uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod shall be
furnished and installed in rectangular sod strips measuring 12 in. or 16 in. in width and
from four ft. to six ft. in length, stored in rolls with the grass lop side inverted so that the
topsoil is to the exterior.
6. Sod shall be harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 24 hours. Soil on sod pads shall be kept moist
at all times.
7. Stakes: Stakes for pegging the sod shall be sound hardwood approximately one inch by two inches (1" x 2")
and of sufficient length to penetrate the mat, the seed bed and to a minimum depth of two inches (2") of subsoil.
Stakes shall be free from insects and fungi and capable of remaining in the ground at least two years.
2.2 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer, O -F -241C, type 1, grade 16-16-8, level B with guaranteed
chemical analysis of contents marked on the containers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPERATION
A. Protection
1. Take care in preparation work to avoid conditions which will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required.
2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains,
etc. Repair or replace damaged areas.
3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry.
329223-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
v
B. Maintenance Instructions: At the time of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit complete maintenance instructions for
lawn care for the Owner's use. The instructions shall be reviewed for approval by the Landscape Architect as a pre-
condition for Acceptance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING
A. Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod in accordance with requirements of "American Sod Producers (ASPA)
Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/ Installing."
B. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling.
During dry weather, protect sod from drying. Water as necessary to insure vitality and to prevent excess loss of
soil in handling
Sod which dries out will be rejected.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during the following period. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to
provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
April 15 to October 15.
B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll,
re -grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re -mulch to produce a unifonnlysmooth lawn.
C. Watering: Watering of the sod shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor by whatever means necessary to
establish the sod in an acceptable manner prior to acceptance by the owner. Provide and maintain temporary piping,
hoses, and lawn -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 2
inches for the first two weeks after planting. Water at the rate given in the turfgrass vendors written recommendations
thereafter during the maintenance period.
Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary
watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.
D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Mow 2 times during the growing season to the specified height.
Do not mow when grass is wet.
Mow grass to height as per manufacturer's instructions.
E. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after second moving and when grass is dry.
Use commercial -grade complete fertilizer, O -F -241C, type 1, grade 16.16-8, level B with guaranteed chemical
analysis of contents marked on containers. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate.
1.8 LAWN MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is sodded and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not
less than the following periods:
Sodded Lawns: Acceptance by the owner.
B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll,
re -grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re -mulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.
C. Watering: Watering of the sod shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor by whatever means necessary to
establish the sod in an acceptable manner prior to acceptance by the owner. Provide and maintain temporary piping,
hoses, and lawn -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 2
inches for the first two weeks after planting. Water at the rale given in the turfgrass vendors written recommendations
thereafter during the maintenance period.
329223-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 329223 -SODDING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following
1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents, for all lawn areas.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 329119 - Fine Grading and Soil Preparation
2. Section 328400 - Irrigation Systems
3. Section 329000 - Planting
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The work of this Section shall be performed by a Contracting firm, which has successfully installed work of a
similar quality, schedule requirement, and construction detailing with a minimum of five (5) years' experience.
Proof of experience shall be submitted per Samples, Submittals & Testing, refer to Section 1.5.
B. All work shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to the trade and under the
continuous supervision of a competent foreman capable of interpreting the Drawings and Specifications.
C. All accumulated debris and rubbish shall be cleaned up and removed from the site before commencing work. Clear and
grub all dead vegetative matter. The site shall be weed free prior to proceeding with any work.
D. Pre -Installation Meetings
1. Participate in pre -installation meetings.
1.4 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
A. The following standards and definitions shall apply to the work of this Section.
1. ADAC: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
2. ASPA: American Sod Producers Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/ Installing.
3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1.5 SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS
A. At least thirty (30) days prior to intended use, the Contractor shall provide the following samples and submittals for
approval. Do not order materials until Landscape Architect's approval of samples, certifications, or test results has
been obtained. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples.
1. Sod: Submit a suppliers certificate showing sod composition by grass species conforms to the Specification
requirements. Certification shall identify the source and include the name and telephone number of the supplier.
329223-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Planting Soil Mix placement shall not commence until rough grades have been approved by the Landscape Architect.
B. The Contractor shall remove existing soil and replace with Planting Soil Mix in turf, and planting bed areas, and plant
pits as specified in this section and as directed by the Landscape Architect.
C. Placement of Planting Soil Mix:
1. Immediately prior to placing and spreading the Planting Soil Mix loosen the subgrade ofplanting beds to a
minimum depth of SIX inches (6). Remove all stones greater than 3/4" in diameter and all weeds, sticks,
debris, or rubbish. Such material shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
2. Spread Planting Soil Mix over loosened subgrade to the depth indicated on the drawings. Do not spread
Planting Soil Mix if subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
D. Planting Soil Mix shall be backfilled in lifts of no more than six inches (6°). Compact each lift by foot tamping to 85%
prior to placing next layer of backfill.
E. Add recommended soil amendments at rates specified in soil analysis recommendations and as directed by the
landscape architect. Rololill amendments into the top 6 inches of soil to achieve a uniform mixture.
Following the incorporation of soil amendments, the surface shall be re -compacted to meet the requirements of
this section.
3.2 FINE GRADING
A. When rough grading, weeding, soil preparation and soil amending have been completed, and soil has been thoroughly
water settled, all planting areas should be smoothly graded, ready for placement of plant materials.
B. Fine grading shall be done when soil is at optimum moisture content.
C. Finish grades shall be smooth, even and on a uniform plane with no abrupt changes of surface. The finish grade shall
not vary more than one half inch (1/2") in ten feet (10') from the required line, and grade set forth in the Drawings.
Adjustments of finish grades shall be made at direction of Landscape Architect as required.
D. Finish grade of mulch in shrub and groundcover areas shall be flush with paved surfaces, after top -dressed with three
inches (3") of bark mulch as specified on the drawings. Finish grade of soil in all turf areas shall be one inch (1 1/2")
below all paved surfaces before laying sod.
END OF SECTION 329119
329119-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Imported from naturally well -drained areas with a history of satisfactory vegetative growth that has not
been stripped before.
B. Topsoil shall be "fine sandy loam" or "sandy loam" determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM D-22) and based on the
"USDA Classification System."
C. Topsoil shall not contain less than four percent (4%) or more than eight percent (8%) organic matter as determined by
the loss on ignition of oven -dried samples.
D. The acidity range of the topsoil shall be pH 5.5 to 7.5.
E. Topsoil shall be free of stones 1-1/2 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant
growth. Soluble salts <2 (dS/m or mmho/cm) and sodium absorption ration (SAR) <3. The electrical conductivity (EC2)
of a 1:2 soil -water suspension shall be equal to or less than 1.0 millimhos/cm. (Test minus sieve Number 10 material).
F. No topsoil shall be delivered to the site or placed in planting areas until topsoil test results and recommendations have
been reviewed and approved by the Landscape Amhilect. Such
approval shall not constitute final acceptance. The Landscape Architect shall reject any
material delivered to the site, which, after on-site, post -delivery testing, does not meet these
specifications.
2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 6 to 8; moisture content 25 to 35
percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2 -inch sieve; soluble salt content of <5 dS/m or mmho/cm; not
exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.
2.4
3.1
B. Compost shall conform as follows:
1. Tested at minimum, every six months for noxious weeds.
2. Organic matter source (feedstock): Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or
source -separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
3. Organic Matter Content: 60 to 80 percent of dry weight as determined by ash method.
4. Free of refuse (less than 1 percent by dry weight), plastics, contaminants or any material toxic to plant growth.
5. Processed to meet U.S. Composting Council's Seal of Testing Assurance Program, or equivalent.
6. Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio: 40 to 1 or lower.
7. Composted for a minimum of 9 months and reach a monitored temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit for at
least one week.
Toxic Elements Maximum Concentration (mg/kg dry weight)
Arsenic 41
Cadmium 39
Copper 1500
Lead 300
Mercury 17
Molybdenum 75
Nickel 420
Selenium 36
Zinc 2800
UTELITE E -SOIL
A. Expanded shale lightweight aggregate. Available from Utelile Corporation, (801) 243-9348.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION
329119-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. All accumulated debris and rubbish shall be cleaned up and removed from the site before commencing work. Clear
and grub all dead vegetative matter. The site shall be weed free prior to proceeding with any work.
G. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of
Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be
performed.
H. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis for all topsoil proposed for use as specified in this section by a qualified
soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange
capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of topsoil.
Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil.
I. Compost Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent, with the experience and capability to conduct testing
indicated following U.S. Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance procedures, or equivalent.
J. Compost Analysis: Provide documentation from supplier that compost has reached monitored temperature of 140
degrees Fahrenheit for at least one week.
1. Test representative sample(s) of compost for the follovnng parameters: pH, soluble salts, percent moisture,
percent organic matter, particle size, and nutrient content, including: Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus (P), Potassium
(K), Calcium (Ca), and Magnesium (Mg).
2. Test compost for maturity. Provide Carbon -Nitrogen ratio.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations to be no more than plus or minus 2" above or below subgrade elevation
which should allow for the depths required for topsoil and mulch throughout the planted areas. Observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed, and notify the Landscape Architect of unsatisfactory conditions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1
PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Shall consist of a ratio by volume of 50 percent topsoil, 25 percent organic compost, and 25 percent
Utelite fines.
1. The Contractor shall provide 12" depth of Planting Soil Mix in all shrub beds indicated on the Drawings to
complete all planting areas, as specified in this Section and as directed by the Landscape Architect. Planting
Soil Mix shall be produced by homogeneously blending the specified components odor to placement
2. Do not commence with mixing Planting Soil Mix until the review and approval of soil test results, organic
compost certification submittal, and Ulelite fines submittal.
B. Planting Soil Mix for Planters on Roof: Shall consist of a ratio by volume of 1/3 peat moss, 1/3 coarse vermiculate fines
and 1/3 Garden and Blooms soil building compost.
C. Planting Soil Mix for Green Roof System: Soil per manufacturer's instructions.
TOPSOIL
Native or Imported topsoil used as a component of the Planting Soil Mix for turf areas, plant beds, and tree planting pits.
Submit soil test results certifying that the topsoil meets the texture and analysis outlined below. Topsoil not meeting the
outlined criteria will not be accepted.
1. Source: Topsoil will be obtained from the following sources:
Existing Topsoil Stockpiled on site, or
329119-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 329119 -FINE GRADING AND SOIL PREPERATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 329000 - Planting
2. Section 329223— Sodding
1.3 SUBMITALS
A. At least 30 days prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect representative
samples, certifications, manufacturer's literature and certified test results for all materials as specified below. No
materials shall be ordered or delivered until the required submittals have been reviewed and stamped approved by the
Landscape Architect. Delivered materials shall match the approved samples.
B. Approval shall not constitute final acceptance. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject, on or after delivery,
any material that does not meet these Specifications.
C. List of submittals required.
1. Sample of manufactured Planting Soil Mix and soil analysis testing results.
2. Sample of topsoil (component of the Planting Soil Mix) and soil analysis testing results
3. Sample of organic compost (component of the Planting Soil Mix) and sieve analysis.
4. Sample UteLile (component of the Planting Soil Mix) and product data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following standards apply to the work of this Section:
1. ADAC: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists.
2. ASA: Methods of Soils Analysis, American Society of Agronomy, Soil Science Society of America, Inc.,
Madison Wisconsin, latest edition.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
4. All applicable local codes and regulations.
B. It is the intent of this specification that all materials herein specified and shown on the drawings shall be of the highest
quality available and meeting the requirements specified.
C. The work of this Section shall be performed by a Contracting firm that has successfully installed work of a similar
quality, schedule requirement, and construction detailing with a minimum of five (5) years experience.
D. All work shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to the trade and under the
continuous supervision of a competent foreman capable of interpreting the Drawing and Specifications.
E. Soil shall not be worked when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction occurs, nor when it is so dry, that
dust will forth in air or that clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to provide ideal moisture
content for tilling and for planting.
329119-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. The contractor shall provide on-site maintenance instructions to the Owner's Authorized
Representative and maintenance personnel prior to turning the project over to the Owner.
3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B.
Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors
and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged exterior planting.
C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery lags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels,
wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and project site.
3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 329000
329000-11
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3.10 LANDSCAPE EDGING INSTALLATION
A. COR -TEN or approved equal: Install edging materials as detailed in locations shown on the drawings. Install per
manufacturer's instructions.
3.11 HERBICIDE APPLICATION AND WEED CONTROL
A. Application of pre -emergent herbicide is required. The contractor shall maintain the site weed free until the end of the
establishment period.
B. Apply herbicides so no damage to protected vegetation occurs whether inside or outside the project site. Damage to
protected vegetation or vegetation outside the project site will be reimbursed to the owner or replaced by the
Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Authorized Representative, and according to the International
Society of Arboriculture Method of "Valuation for Landscape Trees, Shrubs, and Other Plants," latest edition.
C. Post Emergent Herbicide:
1. Mix and apply post -emergent herbicide according to manufacturer's recommendations indicated in the'Weeds
Controlled" section of the label, and apply to undesired, actively growing vegetation.
2. Apply the spray mixture so that all undesired vegetation is uniformly covered, but avoid causing over -spray and
drift. Spray target vegetation so that it is wet, but short of run-off.
3. Prune all suckers at the base of any trees to the soil level prior to application.
4. Do not apply post -emergent herbicide in any of these conditions: When rainfall is expected within six hours;
when there is growth stress as a result of drought, insects, disease, or plant damage, or when there is heavy
dust on plants.
5. Do not walk or permit other traffic on treated areas when they are wet from application. Shoes and equipment
may track spray solution to areas where vegetation is not to be treated.
6. Repeat application, as necessary to completely eradicate undesired vegetation.
D. Pre -emergent Herbicide:
1. Mix and apply pre -emergent herbicide according to manufacturer's recommendations and information on the
side panel, and the following: Use granular applicators designed to apply herbicide at Manufacturers suggested
highest rate.
2. Calibrate the applicator according to the manufacturer's directions prior to use and check frequently during
application to be sure the equipment is working properly and distributing the granules uniformly. Do not apply
more than the recommended amount.
3. Apply granular herbicide according to manufacturer's recommendations and on site conditions and soil
preparation requirements or restrictions appropriate to the herbicide used.
4. The pre -emergent application must be followed within 8 hours with overhead watering or rainfall equivalent to
1/2".
E. License: Use a state licensed applicator to apply herbicide.
Mechanical Control
1. Mechanically control the weeds by pulling, cutting, hoeing, or by any other directed means approved by the
Owners Authorized Representative.
2. Weeds in a dormant stage or other condition which cannot be effectively controlled with post -emergent
herbicide shall be removed from the site by mechanical methods.
3.12 ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE
A. Begin Maintenance immediately after planting.
B. Maintain plant until Final Acceptance.
C. Maintain plants by watering, pruning, cultivating and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers.
Treat as required to keep plant materials free of insects and disease.
D. The contractor shall provide the owner with an approved irrigation schedule.
329000-10
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting
soil mix.
B. Set container -grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeal
watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.
C. Add fertilizer plant tablets to planting pit. Fertilizer tablets shall be placed no deeper than eight inches (8") from finished
grade and two inches (2') from the root ball. Add the required number of tablets as specified below.
1. One (1) tablet per one (1) gallon container.
2. Two (2) tablets per five (5) gallon container.
3. Three (3) tablets per fifteen (15) gallon container.
4. Four (4) tablets per two-inch (2") caliper tree.
5. Six (6) tablets per three-inch (3") caliper tree.
6. Eight (8) tablets per four -inch (4") caliper tree.
D. Prepare a watering circle around the trunk as indicated on Drawings.
E. Mulching: Apply three inch thickness of specified mulch extending to edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch
within 4 inches of trunks or stems.
TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken twigs and branches. All cuts, scars and bruises shall be properly treated according
to the directions of the Landscape Architect. Proper pruning techniques shall be used. Do not leave stubs and do not
cut the leader branch. Improper pruning shall be cause for rejection of plant material.
GUYING AND STAKING
A. Upright Staking and Tying: As detailed, trees shall be firmly staked, as shown on the Drawings. Stakes to be of even
height and neat in appearance, and to be placed outside of the root ball.
B. Guying and Staking: As detailed, trees shall be firmly anchored and guyed as shown on the Drawings.
GROUND COVERAND PERENNIAL PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated.
B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil.
C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.
D. Water thoroughly after planting, laking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.
PLANTING BED MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated on drawings.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated on drawings. Mulch: Apply specified
organic mulch to a thickness of 3" deep in areas indicated on the cravings and as detailed. Do not place mulch
against plant stems. Care shall be taken not bury any plants. Plant lost due to mulch coverage shall be replaced
at the contractor's expense.
329000-9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPERATION
A. Locate all underground utilities prior to digging. Do not place plants on or near utility lines. Obtain a digging permit
and have the permit at the site.
B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from
damage caused by planting operations.
C. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff
or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
D. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations, outline areas,
adjust locations when requested and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make
adjustments as required by Landscape Architect
3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT
A. Prepare subgrade of planting beds and spread Planting Soil Mix in accordance with specification section 329119
- Fine Grading and Soil Preparation.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture and in
accordance with specification section 329119 - Fine Grading and Soil Preparation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill
depressions to meet finish grades.
C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting
D. Install Landscape Edging as detailed in all location shown on the drawings.
3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and buriapped and
container grown stock. Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of
plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
B. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
C. Prior to planting, fill excavated tree/shrub pit with water and allow to percolate out. If after 24 hours, the water has not
percolated out of the pit, notify the Owner's Authorized Representative. Do not plant until the problem has been
corrected.
3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball V-2" above adjacent finish
grades.
1. Remove burlap, wire baskets, twine, and wrappings from root balls, taking care not to disturb root balls. Do
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in 12 inch lifts, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
329000-8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Planting Tablets: Fertilizer planting tablets shall be tightly compressed commercial grade planting tablets having a
20-15-5 formula, weighing 21 grams each. The planting tablets shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened
containers, bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any damage tablet Will not be accepted. Approved
planting tablets:
1. Blue Chip
2. Grow Power
2.8 LANDSCAPE EDGING
A COR -TEN Steel or approved equal of Mild Steel with acid wash: %:' thick x 12" high. Length and locations as detailed
on Drawings. Submit sample for approval prior to placement. Manufacturer: Outdoor Elements, Justin Holt (801)
608-5312, or approved manufacturer.
2.9 MULCHES
A Inorganic Mulch: Stalker Parson Landscape Center Mexican Beach Decorative Cobble Rock. Submit sample for
approval prior to placement.
1. Type: Landscape River Rock
2. Size Range: 1"
3. Color: Dark Gray
B. Organic Mulch: Stalker Parson Shredded Bark. Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees
and shrubs. Submit sample for approval prior to placement.
1. Type: Shredded bark
2. Size Range: % inch (13 mm) minimum, 2 inches (76 mm) maximum
3. Color: Undyed
2.10 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Tree stakes shall be two inch (2") diameter, by ten foot (10') long straight grained pine and driven to a minimum
depth of one foot IV) into firth soil beneath plant pit excavation. Height of stakes shall be below tree branching.
B. Tree ties shall be Arborbmce Tree -tie Webbing. Field sample shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.
C. Guy wires and anchors on all evergreens shall be Duckbill tree support system model #68 DTS including anchors,
galvanized steel, vinyl -coated cable, lumbuckles, tree collars and cable clamps, all pre -assembled. Install per
manufacturer's specifications.
D. Safety Flagging for all diagonal guy wires shall consist of one half-inch (1/2") PVC sleeves
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Pesticide:
Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type
recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and
applications.
2. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Antidesiccanl: Water -insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in
original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Herbicide:
Provide selective post emergent herbicide for use in weed control. Provide Round -up or approved equal.
Provide pre -emergent herbicide for use in planter beds for weed control. Provide Treflan or approved equal.
329000-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. General: Furnish nursery -grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by
transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects,
eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI 260.1 for type of trees and shrubs required.
C. Size and Planting Condition: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common
name.
E. Nursery: R&D Wholesale Nursery, Richard Vest, 208-520-5085.
SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single -stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper
indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.
B. Small Ornamental Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper,
height, and branching according to ANSI 260.1; stem form as indicated on Drawings.
C. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and
branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as indicated on Drawings.
DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured
according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required,
complying with ANSI Z60.1.
BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal -quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required,
complying with ANSI Z60.1.
GROUND COVER PLANTS
A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and
complying with ANSI Z60.1.
2.7 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer, 0 -F -241C, type 1, grade 16-16-8, level B with guaranteed
chemical analysis of contents marked on the containers.
329000-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless
otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect.
12 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine the subgrade, verify the elevations to be no more than plus or minus Y' above or below subgrade elevation
which should allow for the depths required for topsoil and mulch throughout the planted areas. Observe the
conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify the Landscape Architect of unsatisfactory conditions.
1. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse
drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify the Landscape Architect for direction prior to planting.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within
the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.
C. Planting Schedule: Prepare a proposed planting schedule. Schedule the dates for each type of landscape work during
the normal seasons for such work in the area of the site. Correlate work
with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance throughout the specified time
period. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons
for delays.
13 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including
death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse
by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: One year from dale of Substantial Completion.
3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding
planting season.
4. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty
period.
1.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding,
fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper
grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees
and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.
Maintenance Period: Contractor to maintain until acceptance by the owner.
B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other
operations as required to establish healthy, viable plants.
1. Maintenance Period: Contractor to maintain until acceptance by the owner.
1.15 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. The date of Substantial Completion for the new landscape will be when the Maintenance and Operating Manual has
been approved, all required submittals have been received and
approved, and the planting is installed as intended as demonstrated during final inspection. This
will be determined by observation by the Landscape Architect and Owner's Representative.
329000-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Contractor shall be liable to reimburse the Owner for all costs of the Landscape Architect's hourly services
incurred during unproductive inspection trips.
3. Unless specifically designated otherwise, a representative of the Contractor shall accompany the
Landscape Architect on plant material selection field trips.
4. All trees for the project shall be individually tagged for approval with the Landscape Architect's seals, and no
trees shall be accepted for delivery to the site without such seals.
5. Unauthorized substitutions will not be accepted. If proof is submitted that specific plants or plant sizes are
unobtainable, written substitution requests will be considered for the nearest equivalent plant or size. All
substitution requests must be made in writing.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Project Management and Coordination"
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Notify Landscape Architect 5 working days prior to the proposed arrival of plant material on site.
B. Plant materials shall be examined by Landscape Architect at time of delivery on site. This inspection does not
constitute final acceptance of plants. All plants will be inspected again at time of final inspection and once again at the
end of the warranty period. Any plant found to be unacceptable at any of these inspections shall be immediately removed
and replaced.
C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect bark, branches,
and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or
bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior
plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
D. Handle planting stock by root ball.
E. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is
delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
1. Set nursery stock on ground and cover roots with mulch.
2. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist
condition.
F. Packaged Materials: Deliver materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and
address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.
G. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf
areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -
bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or
walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during the following. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide
required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
1. May 15 to September 30.
2. Planting may occur outside this window with prior written approval from owner. Contact: Jeff Wynn, BYU-I
Grounds Supervisor (208) 496-2621.
B. Weather Limitations: Planting shall not take place when ground is frozen.
329000-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
1.8
1.9
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the
project.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating
Installer's capabilities and experiences. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and
addresses of owners' contact persons.
C. Product Certifcales: For each type of manufactures product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the
Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
D. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil, existing native surface topsoil, existing in-place surface
soil and imported or manufactured topsoil.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a
calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior
plants.
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standings of either the Professional Landcare
Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site
when exterior planting is in progress.
3. Qualification of Arborist: All work of pruning shall be performed by an arborist certified by the International
Society of Arboriculture.
4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements
in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
C. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal
position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up
to 4 -inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height
and spread; do not measure branches or roots lip -lo -tip.
D. Observation: Landscape Architect shall observe trees and shrubs at place of growth and at site before planting for
compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe
trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to
reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs
immediately from Project site. Cost of replacements shall be bom by the Contractor.
E. Selection: Contractor shall locate plant material sources and ensure plants are shipped in timely fashion for
installation. Landscape Architect shall inspect and tag plants at place of growth prior to delivery to site.
At least one month prior to the expected planting date, the Contractor shall request that the Landscape
Architect provide a representative to select and lag nursery stock to be planted under this Section. Contractor
shall pay for the transportation, subsistence and overnight accommodations for the Landscape Architect's
representative during the period of time required to select and tag the plant material.
Contractor shall be responsible to certify the availability of quality plants in specified sizes from his/her sources
of supply prior to requesting that the Landscape Architect make plant source inspections. In the event that
plants at the inspection location are found to be unavailable or of insufficient size, and quality, the
329000-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating pests. This includes
insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures
intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people.
These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails, slugs) rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants
(weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
H. Plant, Plants, Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground cover,
ornamental grasses, bulbs, corns, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
I. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with
soil amendments.
J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare". The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens
to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.
K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.
L. Subgrads: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill,
before placing planting soil.
1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Before any trenching, excavation, or digging below the surface for any reason is begun, the contractor shall obtain a
"Digging Permit" (see Ordinance, Permits, and Fees section below)
and have the College "Blue Stake" the work site in order to determine as close as possible the
location of all underground utilities and structures. Although identified, underground utilities and
structures will be assumed to be in approximate locations. The contractor will conduct the work
in such a manner to protect all utilities and structures from damage. It is the responsibility of the
contractor to repair or replace any damage incurred by the contractor or the contractor's
employees with identical materials to match the existing, at no expense to the owner.
1.6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. The contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site improvements to remain, including, but not limited to
buildings, grounds, or utilities. Should damage be incurred by the contractor or the contractor's employees, the
contractor shall repair the damage to its original condition at the contractor's own expense.
1.7 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND FEES
A. The Work under this Section shall comply with all ordinances and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction
B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits, tests and certifications required for the execution of Work
under this Section.
C. Furnish copies of Permits, Certifications and Approval Notices to the Owners Representative prior to requesting
payment.
D. The Contractor shall obtain a "Digging Permit" from the College before beginning any trenching, excavation, or digging
as outlined in the College's General Conditions.
E. The Contractor shall initiate a "Request for Shutdown" any time a utility must be shut off to allow work progress. See the
General Conditions for "Request for Shutdown" requirements.
329000-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 329000 - PLANTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includesthe following:
1. Trees
2. Shrubs
3. Groundcover
4. Planting
5. Edging
6. Mulch
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 - Earthwork for excavation, filling, rough grading, backfill materials, protection of existing trees and
plantings, and site clearing.
2. Specification Section 328400 - Irrigation Systems.
3. Specification Section 329119 - Fine Grading and Soil Preparation
4. Specification Section 329223—Sodding
1.3 SCOPE
A. The extent of the landscape development work is shown on the drawings and in schedules and includes all plant
materials, preparation of planting pits and beds, and mulch as indicated.
B. The contractor shall visit the site and study all portions of the contract documents prior to submitting a bid.
C. As -built Drawings: The contractor shall keep a record of all departures from the contract drawings that occur during
construction. These shall be kept on a clean set of prints of the contract drawings. The Owners Authorized
Representative will review the "as -built drawings" to verify that changes are being recorded as construction occurs.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball
size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI 260.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required;
wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum -laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with fine, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed,
unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and
size of exterior plant required.
C. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root
system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when
removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root
mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior
plant required.
D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil or mulch in planting beds.
329000-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
installed. Tubing shall be installed with equal spacing between lateral runs of tubing. Tubing
shall be adequately staked or stapled to the soil surface to prevent tubing from penetrating
bark surface. Any tubing visible at mulch surface shall be re -installed and re -stapled at
Contractor expense.
B. In general, Contractor shall install S/40 lateral pipe in ground to planting areas furthest away
from control valve. Connect Point Source emitter tubing between lateral at end of run and
lateral at beginning of run, creating a loop. Repeat for all areas containing plant materials.
All drip tubing shall be looped back to control valve via in ground S/40 lateral pipe.
C. Care shall be taken to prevent contamination with soil in tubing.
D. Contractor shall place filters, regulators, air/vac vents and flush valves as necessary to meet
manufacturer's minimum recommendations.
E. Field conditions, specifically soil type conditions shall dictate any alteration in emitter size,
emitter spacing and row spacing. Contractor shall notify OAR to request confirmation of soil
type prior to ordering drip tubing products to ensure proper product and proper spacing are
used.
3.13 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
A. Sprinkler heads shall be adjusted to proper height when installed.
B. Changes in grade or adjustment of head height after installation shall be considered a part of
the original contract and at Contractor's expense.
C. Adjust all sprinkler heads for arc, radius, proper trim and distribution to cover all landscaped
areas that are to be irrigated. Adjust sprinklers so they do not water buildings, structures, or
other hardscape features.
D. Adjust run times of stations to meet needs of plant material the station services.
E. No sprinkler shall be located closer than 6" to walls, fences, or buildings.
F. Heads adjacent to walks, curbs, or paths shall be located at grade and 2" away from
hardscape.
G. Control valves shall be opened and fully flush lateral line pipe and swing joints prior to
installation of sprinklers.
H. Spray heads shall be installed and flushed again prior to installation of nozzles.
I. Contractor shall be responsible for adjustment if necessary due to grade changes during
landscape construction.
3.14 CLEANUP
A. Contractor shall clean all work areas daily, leaving areas accessible to the public in a'broom
clean' condition.
B. Open trenches and or hazards shall be protected by chain link fence, snow fencing, or
caution tape as directed by the OAR.
C. Contractor shall coordinate with OAR for periodic as well as final cleanliness inspection.
D. Upon project completion, Contractor shall remove all excess material, construction debris,
packing, etc. attributable to his work.
END OF SECTION 32 84 00
32-84-00 Page 17 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
S. Maximum acceptable flow through piping shall be 5.0 FPS maximum flow through piping
shall be:
1. 1"-13 GPM
2. 1-1/4"-22 GPM
3. 1-1/2"-30 GPM
4. 2"--50 GPM
5. 2-1/2" 75 GPM
3.9 MANUAL CONTROL VALVE
A. For 3" and larger valves, place sleeve of 6" or larger pipe over top of valve vertically and then
extend to grade. Place 10" round valve box over sleeve at grade. See detail for additional
information.
B. Isolation valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be contained in a Carson Standard size valve box.
Valves shall be installed with S/80 PVC TOE Nipples one both sides of valve.
3.10 QUICK COUPLER VALVE
A. Quick coupler valves shall be placed with manifold groups and protected by manifold isolation
valves.
B. Top of quick coupler valve cover shall allow for complete installation of valve box lid, but also
allow for insertion and operation of key.
C. Base of quick coupler valve and top of quick coupler swing joint shall be encased in 3/4" -
gravel.
D. Contractor shall not place quick coupler valves further than 200 feet apart, to allow for spot
watering or supplemental irrigation of new plant material.
E. Quick coupler valve at POC shall not be eliminated or relocated.
3.11 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE
A. Contractor shall place remote control valves in groups as practical to economize on quantity
of manifold isolation valves.
B. Remote control valves shall be located separately and individually in separate control boxes.
1. Flows through 1" valves shall be 1-25 GPM.
2. Flows through 1-1/2" valves shall be 26-50 GPM.
3. Flows through 2" valves shall be 51 through 75 GPM
4. Flows through 3" valves shall be 76 GPM through 200 GPM.
C. Valves shall be located in boxes with ample space surrounding them to allow access for
maintenance and repair.
D. Where practical, group remote control valves in close proximity, and protect each grouping
with a manifold isolation valve as shown in details. Manifold Main Line (or Sub -Main
Line) and all manifold components and isolation valves shall be at least as large
as the largest diameter lateral served by the respective manifold.
E. Valve boxes shall be set over valves so that all parts of the valve can be reached for service.
Valve box and lid shall be set to be flush with finished grade.
F. Only one remote control valve may be installed in a Carson 1419124 box.
G. Place a minimum of 4" of 3/4" washed gravel beneath valve box for drainage.
H. Bottom of remote control valve shall be a minimum of 2" above gravel.
I. See remote control valve manifold detail for more information.
3.12 DRIP COMPONENTS
A. Planting beds shall be graded to continuous uniform finish grade prior to tubing installation.
Surface installed drip tubing shall be installed after plant material, but prior to mulch being
32-84-00 Page 16 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Sleeve ends on sleeve sizes 4" and larger shall be capped with corresponding sized PVC slip
cap, pressure fit, until used, to prevent contamination.
D. Sleeve ends on sleeve sizes 3" and smaller may be thoroughly taped to prevent
contamination.
E. Sleeves shall be installed at appropriate depths for main line pipe or lateral pipe
F. Contractor shall be responsible to protect existing underground utilities and components.
G. Sleeve all piping and wiring that pass under paving or hardscape features.
H. Sleeves shall be positioned relative to structures or obstructions to allow for pipe or wire
within them to be removed if necessary.
3.8 MAIN LINE / LATERAL LINE PIPE
A. All ductile iron fittings having change of direction shall have proper concrete thrust block
installed.
B. Pulling of pipe shall not be permitted on this project.
C. Over excavate trenches both in width and depth. Ensure base of trench is rock or debris free
to protect pipe and wire. Grade trench base to ensure Flat, even support of piping. Backfill
with clean soil or import material.
D. Contractor shall backfill no less than 2" around entire pipe with clean, rock free fill.
E. Main line piping and fittings shall not be backfilled until Designer or Owner's Representative
has inspected and pipe has passed pressure testing. Perform balance of backfill operation to
eliminate any settling.
F. Place irrigation pipe and other elements at uniform grades. Automatic drains shall not be
installed on this Project. Manual drains shall only be installed at POC where designated on
Construction Drawings.
G. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
H. Install main line pipes with 18" of cover, lateral line pipes with 12" of cover.
I. Drawings show diagrammatic or conceptual location of piping—Contractor shall install piping
to: minimize change of direction, avoid placement under large trees or large shrubs, avoid
placement under hardscape features.
J. Plastic pipe shall be cut squarely. Burrs shall be removed, spigot ends of pipes 3" and larger
shall be beveled.
K. Pipe shall not be glued unless ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees F. Pipe shall not
be glued in rainy conditions unless properly tented.
L. All solvent weld joints shall be assembled using IPS 711 glue and P70 primer according to
manufacturer's specification, no exceptions.
M. Glued main line pipe shall cure a minimum of 24 hours prior to being energized. Lateral lines
shall cure a minimum of 2 hours prior to being energized and shall not remain under
constant pressure unless cured for 24 hours.
N. All threaded joints shall be wrapped with Teflon tape or paste unless directed by product
manufacturer or sealing by o -ring.
0. All main line pipe, lateral line pipe and other irrigation elements shall be bedded and
backfilled with clean soil, free of rocks 1" and larger.
P. Contractor shall furnish and install additional backfill material as necessary due to rocky
conditions.
Q. Trenches and other elements shall be compacted and/or water settled to eliminate settling.
R. Debris from trenching operations un -usable for fill shall be removed from project and
disposed of properly by Contractor.
32-84-00 Page 15 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. If damaged work is new, Contractor shall engage original installer of that work to perform
repairs.
3 POWER SOURCE
A. Power supply to irrigation controller shall not be included in the irrigation portion of this
Project. Power supply shall be a part of other Contracts associated with this Project. See
Electrical Construction Documents and Specifications for information and/or detail. Controller
power wire from load center(s) to Controller shall be a part of this Contract.
B. Pedestal mount controllers shall have Paige Wire grounding grid installed per Section 1.05 C.
of this document.
C. Locate Controllers in general location shown on Construction drawings. Coordinate power
supply and breaker allocation with electrical contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for
all power connections to Controllers, whether they are wall mount or pedestal mount.
Contractor shall coordinate with electrical or other Project trades as needed to facilitate
installation of power to controllers.
3.4 CONTROLLER
A. All grounding shall be as directed by controller manufacturer and ASIC guidelines, not to
exceed a resistance reading of 10 OHMs.
B. Locate controllers in protected, inconspicuous place when possible.
C. Coordinate location of pedestal controllers with OAR to minimize visibility.
D. Coordinate location of wall mount controllers with building or electrical Contractor to facilitate
electrical service and future maintenance needs. Wall mount shall be securely fastened to
surface. If exterior mounted, wall mount controllers shall have electrical service wire and
field control wire in separate, appropriate sized weatherproof electrical conduit, PVC pipe
shall not be used.
E. Wire under hardscape surfaces shall be placed continuously in conduit.
F. Controllers shall be oriented such that Owner's Representative maintenance personnel may
access easily and perform field system tests efficiently.
G. Place Standard valve box at base of controller or nearby to allow for three to five feet of
slack field control wire to be placed at each controller.
H. This Contractor shall provide conduit access if needed for Electrical contractor. Electrical
supply and installation, as well as hook-up to controller shall be by this Contractor.
3.5 CONTROL WIRE
A. One spare wire from every valve grouping containing three or more valves shall be `home
run' to the controller.
B. Install at least one spare wire for every five valves.
C. Total number of spare wires shall not be less than 1/5`" of the total control valves installed.
D. Spare wire shall be looped within each valve box of the grouping it is to service.
E. A minimum of 24" of additional wire shall be left at each valve, each splice box and at each
controller.
3.6 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Wire splicing between controller and valves shall be avoided if at all possible.
B. Any wire splices shall be contained within a valve box.
C. Splices within a valve box that contains no control valves shall be stamped'WIRE SPLICE' or
'WS' on box lid.
3.7 SLEEVING PIPE
A. Sleeves shall be extended 6" minimum beyond walk or edge of pavement.
B. Wire or cable shall not be installed in the same sleeve as piping, but shall be installed in
separate sleeves.
32-84-00 Page 14 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
B. Swing joint for 1" quick coupler valves shall be Lasco model 13S-212 factory assembled
swing joint.
C. Swing joint for 3/4" quick coupler valves shall be Lasco model 13T-212 factory assembled
swing joint.
2.20 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be as listed on plan legend.
2.21 VALVE BOXES
A. Valve box sizes as indicated on plan detail sheet.
1. Carson Industries Specification Grade valve boxes.
2.22 LATERAL LINE PIPE
A. All lateral piping shall be new, S/40 PVC, solvent weld bell end.
B. Sized as indicated on plans.
2.23 LATERAL LINE FITTINGS
A. All lateral line fittings shall be new S/40 PVC.
B. Factory assembled, Lasco swing joint containing:
a. Inlet and outlet same size as head inlet
b. Male threaded inlet
c. '0' ring connections
d. Single swivel at base, double swivel at head
e. 12" lay length
2.24 DRIP COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturer and model shall be as listed on plan legend.
2.25 GLUE AND PRIMER
A. Contractor shall use IPS Weld -On 711 glue
B. Contractor shall use IPS Weld -On P-70 primer
C. No Substitutions.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL NOTES
A. Contractor shall repair or replace work damaged by irrigation system installation.
B. If damaged work is new, Contractor shall engage original installer of that work to perform
repairs.
C. The existing landscape of this Project shall remain in place. Contractor shall protect existing
plant material and work around existing plant material as necessary.
D. Plant material deemed damaged by OAR shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.
E. Contractor shall route pipe, wire and other irrigation elements around outside of tree canopy
drip line to minimize damage to tree roots.
F. Contractor shall not cut existing tree roots larger than 2" to install this Project.
G. Coordination of trench and valve locations shall be laid out with OAR prior to any excavation
occurring.
H. Contractor shall have no part of existing irrigation system used by other parts of Project
landscape without water for more than 48 hours.
3.2 ROOFTOP IRRIGATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor to ENSURE THAT PIPING, SLEEVING,
CONDUIT, WIRING, ROOF PENETRATIONS are complete to accommodate roof top landscape
and irrigation.
32-84-00 Page 13 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Compression type connections to water supply shall use brass pack -joint connectors, (i.e.
pack -joint male adapter, pack-oint female adapter or pack -joint tee) same size as POC
Illi
indicated. Connection to poly water supply shall require stainless steel inserts.
F. Threaded saddle connections to water supply shall use Ford model 202 brass 2 strap saddle
or approved equal.
G. Tapping saddle connections to water supply shall use flanged ]CM model 423 or approved
equal.
2.13 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
A. Backflow device is not included in irrigation scope of work. See Civil Drawings
2.14 SLEEVING PIPE
A. Minimum sleeve size shall be 2" pipe.
B. Sleeving 2" through 4" shall be S/40 PVC pipe. Sleeving 6" and larger shall be CL/200 PVC
pipe.
C. Sleeves shall typically be two nominal sizes larger than the pipe to be placed within them.
Sleeve material and sizes shall be according to the following
SLEEVING TABLE:
INTERIOR PIPE
SLEEVE PIPE
INTERIOR PIPE
SLEEVE PIPE
3/4-S/40
2-S/40
4" C 200
8" CL/200
1" S 40
2-S/40
6" CL/200
10" CL/200
1-1/4-S/40
2-1/2-S/40
8" CL/200
12" CL/200
1-1/2-S/40
3-S/40
10" CL/200
14" C905
2-S/40
4" S/40
3" S/40
6" CL/200
2.15 MAIN LINE PIPE
A. Pipe 1" through 3" shall be S/40, solvent weld -bell end.
B. Pipe 4" through 12" shall be CL/200 gasketed-bell end.
2.16 MAIN LINE FITTINGS
A. All mainline fittings 2-1/2" and smaller shall be PVC S/80.
2.17 HYDROMETER
A. Manufacturer and model shall be as listed on plan legend.
2.18 MANUAL CONTROL VALVES
A. Line or isolation valves 3" and larger shall be:
1. Mueller ductile iron, resilient wedge, push on type, with 2" square operating nut.
B. Line or isolation valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be:
1. Matco Norca model 503 bronze gate valve.
2. Milwaukee model 105 bronze gate valve.
3. Hammond model IB645 bronze gate valve.
C. Isolation valves for RCV Manifolds (1" through 2-1/2') shall be:
1. Matco Norca model 759 brass ball valve.
2. Apollo 77C-IOX-01 bronze ball valve.
3. Apollo 94A -SOX -01 brass ball valve.
D. Drain Valves shall be:
1. 3/4" Cambridge Brass model 263NL-F3F3.
2. 3/4" Mueller Oriseal model H-10288.
2.19 QUICK COUPLER VALVE
A. Manufacturer and model shall be as listed on plan legend.
32-84-00 Page 12 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
6. 240 VAC cables where service is provided to controller and other 120 VAC
equipment such as a convenience outlet shall be 4 conductor (2 hot, 1 neutral and
1 ground)
B. CONVENTIONAL WIRING FOR WALL MOUNTED CONTROLLERS:
1. Power wire or cable for conventionally wired wall mount or conduit -fed pedestal
mount shall be according to local and NEC codes.
2.7 SUPPLEMENTARY GROUNDING
A. Ground rods shall be 5/8" X 10', Paige Electric part number 182007.
B. Wire connections or splices shall use Cadweld GR1161G'One-Shot' welding kit, Paige Electric
part number 1820037. In order to ensure proper ignition of the'One-Shot' kit, the Cadweld
T-320 igniter must be utilized, Paige Electric part number 1820040.
C. Bare wire from grounding device to ground lug of controller shall be 6 AWG solid bare copper
wire.
D. Copper grounding plate assemblies shall be 4" x 96" x 0.0625" Paige Electric part number
182199L, with a 25' continuous length of 6 AWG solid bare copper wire attached to the plate
by the manufacturer.
E. Earth Contact material for the ground plate assembly shall be 100 lbs of `PowerSet', Paige
Electric part number 1820058.
F. All items under Supplementary Ground shall be submitted for approval.
2.8 BONDING / SHIELDING WIRE
A. The bonding/shielding conductor shall be 6 AWG solid bare copper wire.
B. The bonding/shielding conductor shall be 4 AWG solid bare copper wire when the system
power conductors are larger than 1/0 AWG.
C. The bonding/shielding conductor shall be in addition to grounding conductor encased within
in power wire cable.
2.9 CONTROL WIRE
A. Remote Control Valve wire shall be Paige Electric, See details.
B. NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED.
2.10 COMMUNICATION WIRE
A. Communication wire for Hydrometer shall be per manufacturer requirements.
2.11 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. RCV wire splicing connectors and Decoder wire splicing connectors shall be Paige P7364D,
Paige part number 270670 or 270671(3M model `DBR/Y-6�. No substitutions allowed.
B. Communication wire splicing or connection shall be Paige brand, model 273211 (3M model
SliQ and Paige brand, model 270228R (3M model 316IR). No substitutions allowed.
2.12 POINT OF CONNECTION
A. Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install products necessary to complete
installation of Stop & Waste valve; including saddle, tapping equipment, tap, fittings, nipples
and valves.
B. Plan legend and details shall serve as guide for basic products required.
C. Precise or specific products required for installation of the POC may not be completely
available at time of design. Contractor shall be responsible to furnish POC products adapting
to field conditions.
D. Stop & Waste valves for POC sizes 3/4" through 2" shall be:
1. Cambridge Brass 263-FXFX
2. Mueller Oriseal H-10288
32-84-00 Page 11 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL NOTES
A. Any additional components required for installation of the products listed in this section, but
not specified in this section, shall be designated on plan detail sheet.
B. Contractor shall submit for approval, irrigation products listed in this section (such as RCV, or
sprinkler head), and also any other additional components necessary to complete installation
of the main component.
2.2 ROOF TOP IRRIGATION
A. Irrigation Contractor shall provide the irrigation equipment shown on irrigation plan for
interior installation by other Trades, including:
1. Backflow prevention device
2. Master valve
3. Flow meter
4. Controller
B. Allied equipment necessary for installation of this equipment shall not be the responsibility of
the Irrigation Contractor
C. Irrigation Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring necessary for valve operation and
weather station connection.
D. Irrigation Contractor shall furnish and install all products necessary on roof top for irrigation
system.
2.3 POWER SOURCE
A. Power source for irrigation equipment shall not be included in the irrigation Contractor's
portion of this Contract.
2.4 CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM
A. A Central Control System is not included in this Project, HOWEVER;
B. The completed project shall be furnished in a Central Control -ready condition for connection
to Hunter IMMS equipment.
C. Contractor shall coordinate with OAR and provide equipment or materials designated by OAR
necessary for connection and operation as a central system.
2.5 CONTROLLER
A. Manufacturer and model shall be as listed on plan legend.
B. Controller shall be:
1. Exterior wall mounted.
C. Exterior wall mount controllers shall use rigid galvanized steel electrical conduit for all above
grade wiring, including sweep elbows below grade.
D. Interior wall mount controllers shall use EMT electrical conduit for interior conditions, rigid
electrical conduit for below grade conditions.
E. Pedestal Mount controllers shall use rigid galvanized steel electrical conduit for all wiring.
F. PVC pipe, conduit sweeps, and fittings shall not be used for any wiring at the controller.
2.6 POWER WIRE
A. DIRECT BURY WIRE FOR FIELD LOCATED WALL OR PEDESTAL MOUNTED CONTROLLERS:
1. All power cables shall be Paige Wire, type Tray Cable.
2. Wire shall be Paige Wire specification number P7266D for 10 AWG and smaller.
3. Wire shall be Paige Wire specification number P7267D for 8 AWG and larger.
4. 120 VAC wires shall be 3 conductor (hot, neutral and ground)
5. 240 VAC cables where service is provided to controller only, shall be 3 conductor
(2 hot and 1 ground)
32-84-00 Page 10 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
required information of product purchased and/or dollar value which qualify for
corresponding program. Documents shall be delivered to OAR within 14 days of purchase of
products.
1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish the following items to OAR:
1. One (1) 5-6' key for stop & waste valve.
2. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller.
3. Two (2) quick coupler keys with hose swivels attached.
4. One (1) quick coupler valve.
S. One (1) of each size or type of remote control valve used on Project.
6. Five (5) of each sprinkler head and each nozzle used on Project.
1.17 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide one-year Warranty for Project. Warranty shall coverall material,
workmanship and labor.
B. Warranty period begins upon date of acceptance by OAR that Project is substantially
complete.
C. Warranty shall include filling and/or repairing depressions, replacing turf or other plantings
due to settlement of irrigation trenches or irrigation system components, and adjustment of
valve boxes, sprinkler heads and all other irrigation components which have settled from
proper finish grade.
1.18 ADDITIONAL SERVICES
A. Winterization:
1. Contractor shall winterize entire irrigation system installed under this Contract prior
to the first winter following installation; prior to hard frost --but no later than
November 151h, unless directed otherwise by OAR in writing.
2. Winterize entire system via 'blow-out' method, using compressed air.
a. Compressor shall be industrial type, capable of evacuating water from all
main line and lateral line pipe, with a minimum capacity of 300 CFM.
b. Compressor shall be mechanically regulated to not more than 60
PSI.
B. Spring Start-up:
1. Contractor shall start up entire irrigation system the Spring following installation;
prior to plant need --but following danger of damaging frost, yet no later than April
1s`.
2. Contractor shall energize entire main line pipe, all RCV's, and check for correct
program installation and operation of Controller, each RCV and each quick coupler
valve.
C. As -built documents: Prior to final inspection, prepare and submit to OAR As -built drawings.
1. Show field dimensioned locations of sleeving, POC, mainline piping, wiring runs not
in main line pipe trench, and valves/valve boxes.
2. Dimensions are to be taken from permanent site features or finished hardscapes.
1.19 OWNER'S INSTRUCTION
A. After system is installed, inspected, and approved; Contractor shall instruct OAR or other
OAR designated individuals in complete operation and maintenance procedures of irrigation
system. Coordinate instruction with references to previously submitted Operation and
Maintenance manual.
32-84-00 Page 9 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Specific grounding requirements for Central Control systems shall be met by
A
Contractor or corrected at his expense.
D. Project Record Copy
1. Maintain on Project site, one copy of all CD's clearly marked 'Project Record Copy'.
Mark any deviation in material installation on CD's. Maintain and update sheets at
least weekly.
2. Project Record Copy shall be available to OAR on demand.
E. Regulatory Requirements
1. Contractor shall comply with all plumbing requirements which direct work to be done
by a licensed plumber.
2. Contractor shall comply with all electrical requirements which direct work to be done
by a licensed electrician.
3. All work and materials shall be according to any and all rules, regulations or codes,
whether they are local, state or national requirements.
4. CD's may not be construed or interpreted to permit work or materials not conforming
to the above codes.
Adequate Water Supply
1. Water supply to this Project is or shall be installed by trades other than the Irrigation
Contractor. Connection to this supply at the POC shall be by this Contractor.
Contractor shall be responsible to verify that proper connection exists, and is of
adequate size and pressure.
2. Notify OAR verbally immediately and in writing within 48 hours of problems
encountered with water supply.
G. Workmanship and Materials
1. It is the intent of the Irrigation CD's that all material required shall be of the highest
quality available and meeting the requirements specified.
2. All work shall be performed in accordance with the best standards of practice relating
to this trade.
1.15 PROJECT MATERIALS
A. Owner shall retain option to purchase materials to be used on Project and provide them to
Contractor. Owner shall not provide materials for Project.
B. Contractor shall not remove materials purchased for this Project from this site.
C. Contractor shall not store or co -mingle materials for this Project with materials for other
Projects on this site.
D. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. All materials shall be protected from contamination, damage, theft, vandalism and
prolonged exposure to sunlight.
2. All material stored on project site shall be neatly organized in a compact
arrangement, and this storage shall not disrupt project owner or other trades on
Project site.
3. Project materials shall be handled by Contractor with care necessary to prevent
damage or breaking.
4. Damaged or blemished materials attributed to Contractor shall be replaced with new,
at Contractors expense.
E. If this Project qualifies for manufacturer rebate, creditor incentive programs; Contractor shall
provide OAR with documents in pdf format from distributor and/or manufacturer indicating
32-84-00 Page 8 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. If non-traditional and/or central control equipment or products are to be used on this Project,
including but not limited to:
1. 'SMART' controllers,
2. Decoders and two wire systems,
3. Weather -based systems, AND/OR
4. Soil moisture sensors.
B. Contractor shall provide copies of appropriate Certification documents for all applicable staff.
In order to provide a minimum level of workmanship, all installation personnel expected to
perform any tasks involving non-traditional and/or central control equipment shall have
Certificates for each task they perform as designated below:
1. All installation personnel who will work on the specific system, equipment or product
shall be certified by the manufacturer of the corresponding products to be used on
the Project.
2. The certification shall cover proper application and installation of these products, and
also adaptation of the products to this specific Project.
3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain such certification and to provide a
copy of the "Certificate of Completion" for each person installing these products on
the project to the OAR prior to commencement of that portion of work.
4. It is the Contractors responsibility to contact the product manufacturer and the local
manufacturer's authorized representative well in advance of commencement of work
to schedule his/her attending of a scheduled seminar or to make an appointment for
a new one.
C. Loca I Dist ributor , Ma n ufa ct ure r' s R e ore se nt a t ive or Ma nufa ct ure r a re a ut
ho riz e d t o w it hhold sales or delivery of non-traditional equipment until such time that
the Contractor demonstrates adeauate understanding of assembly, installation, programming
operation and maintenance of the equipment.
1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection Scheduling
1. Contractor shall expect a minimum of five irrigation inspections under the direction of
the OAR.
a. Main Line pipe and wire
b. Main Line pressure test
c. Progress inspection
d. Final inspection
e. Completed'Punch List' inspection
B. Main Line Piping
1. Main line pipe shall not be buried until approved by OAR. Pipe buried prior to
approval shall be excavated and exposed for OAR's review.
2. Upon completion of main line pipe or sections thereof, Contractor shall isolate and
pressurize to 150 PSI for two hours.
3. Contractor shall provide OAR with 48 hours request prior to testing date and time.
C. Grounding Resistance Testing
1. Pedestal Controllers shall be tested by Licensed Electrical Contractor and show
resistance of 10 Ohms or less.
2. Grounding not in compliance shall be corrected by Contractor at his expense.
32-84-00 Page 7 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
1.13
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
perform any tasks involving PVC pipe, electrical components, and or drip components; shall
have Certificates for each task they perform as designated below:
1. All installation personnel who will work on PVC pipe and PVC fittings in the irrigation
system shall be certified by IPS Corporation. The certification shall cover PVC pipe
and fitting assembly using solvent weld joining techniques. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to obtain such certification and to provide a copy of the "Certificate of
Completion" for each person handling PVC products on the project to the OAR prior
to commencement of work. It is the Contractors responsibility to contact IPS
Corporation and then the local IPS authorized representative well in advance of
commencement of work to schedule his/her attending of a scheduled seminar or to
make an appointment to schedule a new seminar. Contact IPS Corporation, Weld -On
Customer Service at 800 421-2677, to obtain a referral for the local IPS factory
authorized representative contact information.
2. All installation personnel who will work on the electrical circuits of the irrigation
system shall be certified by Paige Electric Co. The certification shall cover irrigation
wires, cables, proper installation and splicing methods, and protecting electronic
equipment from lightning and power surges. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
to obtain such certification and to provide a copy of the "Certificate of
Completion" for each person installing electrical products on the project to the OAR
prior to commencement of work. It is the Contractors responsibility to contact Paige
Electric well in advance of commencement of work to schedule his/her attending of a
scheduled seminar or to make an appointment for a new one. Contact Vince Nolletti,
Vice President Irrigation Operations, Paige Electric Co, LP, 559 431-2346.
3. If Drip irrigation products are to be used on this Project, all installation personnel who
will work on drip components of the irrigation system shall be certified by the
manufacturer of the corresponding drip products specified to be used on the Project.
The certification shall cover proper application and installation of point source and
inline drip irrigation products, and also adaptation of drip product to Project soil
types and infiltration rates. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain such
certification and to provide a copy of the "Certificate of Completion" for each person
installing drip products on the project to the OAR prior to commencement of work.
It is the Contractors responsibility to contact the drip product manufacturer and the
local manufacturer's authorized representative well in advance of commencement of
work to schedule his/her attending of a scheduled seminar or to make an
appointment for a new one. Courtesy contact information for the following
manufacturers is shown below:
a. Rain Bird Corporation --Dave Palumbo (310) 503-4004
b. Hunter Industries—Justin Hamula (801) 231-9504
c. Netafim USA—Kelly Keicher (303) 513-3738
4. Documents verifying certifications for the following shall be provided to OAR through
the General Contractor at least 7 days prior to commencement of any irrigation work
on the Project:
a. PVC Solvent Weld certification
b. Electrical certification
c. Drip certification
CERTIFICATIONS FOR NON-TRADITIONAL CONTROL OR CENTRAL SYSTEMS
32-84-00 Page 6 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Site map showing Controller zones, each zone distinguished by a different color.
4. Table showing typical Controller program schedule for worst case day.
5. Copy of control system certification if required for this Project.
6. Copy of water audit results if audit is required for this Project.
a. Copy of water audit certification when Project has met required criteria.
1.10 EXPERIENCE
A. Contractor shall provide an Experience resume or document; in pdf format, indicating:
1. That Contractor is licensed to perform landscape and irrigation construction in the
State where this Project resides.
2. That Contractor is bondable and insured for the work to be performed.
3. That Contractor has been installing sprinkler systems on commercial projects for the
last five consecutive years.
4. References of five projects of similar scope and size completed within the last five
years. Three of the projects listed shall be local.
1.11 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall provide a Qualifications resume or document; in pdf format indicating:
1. That Contractor currently employs both skilled and unskilled workers in sufficient
quantities to complete project within time limits indicated by Contract.
2. A list of employees to be assigned to this project and their irrigation experience.
3. That Contractor possesses proper power equipment of appropriate size and quantity
to complete project within time limits indicated by Contract.
4. Contractor shall include a listing of the supplier(s) where irrigation related material
will be purchased for this Project.
5. Person on project site, in charge (Project Foreman, Superintendent, Supervisor,
Manager --etc.) of daily irrigation field construction operations:
a. Has at least five consecutive years of commercial irrigation experience.
b. That this person is able to communicate with OAR. Is Fluent in reading,
writing and speaking English.
c. That this person is able to communicate rapidly and effectively with his staff
in any languages used within his staff.
d. Is a Certified Irrigation Contractor (CIC) in good standing as set forth by the
Irrigation Association. This person shall be on the project site at least 75%
of each working day.
i. Contractor's CIC shall be a regular full-time employee of the
Contractor firm, or a sub -contractor to Contractor, where sub-
contractor's firm provides all irrigation installation for the Project and
meets all listed requirements for Experience, Qualifications and
Certifications.
ii. NOTE: Contractor shall not engage a CIC as a consultant or
representative to oversee Contractor's staff install the Project
irrigation system, i.e. the Contractor shall not ` re nt' a CIC or
CI C' s
license.
1.12 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall provide copies of appropriate Certification documents for all applicable staff.
In order to provide a minimum level of workmanship, all installation personnel expected to
32-84-00 Page 5 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Contractor shall coordinate this work with other work by other trades on Project as well as
other landscape tasks on Project.
D. Install sleeving prior to installation of concrete flat work, paving or other permanent site
elements as needed.
E. Irrigation system Point of Connection components, backflow prevention and pressure
regulation devices shall be installed and operational prior to all downstream components.
F. All main lines shall be thoroughly flushed of all debris prior to installation of Remote Control
Valves.
G. All lateral lines shall be thoroughly flushed of all debris prior to installation of any sprinkler
heads.
1.7 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. The following references apply to this project, the Contractor shall be responsible to be
familiar with, refer to, and implement these references in completion of this project:
1. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials.
2. Irrigation Association: Turf and Landscape Irrigation Best Management Practices
(BMPs).
3. American Society of Irrigation Consultants (ASIC)'ASIC Guideline 100-2002 (January
2, 2002) For Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irrigation Systems.
4. Any Brigham Young University standard, document, detail, specification; related to or
direction irrigation installation.
5. Any local governing agency codes, ordinances and/or any standards, details and
specifications for irrigation applicable agency may have.
6. Applicable industry codes, ordinances or standards such as (but not limited to) UBC
or NEC.
1.8 RELATED Master Format' SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
A. Contractor shall be responsible to be familiar with the following sections and how they affect
irrigation installation.
1. 0133 00 Submittals
2. 02 00 00 Existing Conditions
3.
26 00 00 Electrical
4.
3122 00 Grading
5.
3123 00 Excavation and Fill
6.
32 90 00 Planting
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall follow format and requirements as set forth in Submittals section of this f
specification document for materials submittals.
B. Contractor shall provide submittal for irrigation equipment and materials prior to ordering or
taking delivery of any products.
C. Equipment or materials purchased or installed prior to receiving written submittal approval is
at risk of rejection by OAR. Use of materials other than those approved in writing is at risk of
rejection by OAR. Contractor shall liable for removal or replacement of any or all non -
approved products at his own expense.
D. Contractor shall provide OAR with 2 copies of Operations and Maintenance manual,
containing:
1. Copy of approved submittal products
2. Detailed written instruction for Spring Start-up and Winterization.
32-84-00 Page 4 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. In the event irrigation installation requires emergency shut -down of the municipal
water system, Project site or development water system, or Project's irrigation
system, Contractor shall be responsible to notify OAR and governing agency
immediately. Contractor shall make every effort to restore service in a timely
manner.
C. Planned Interruption of water service
1. In the event irrigation installation require shut -down of municipal water system(s),
project site water system, or project irrigation system, Contractor shall be
responsible to coordinate with and receive approval from the OAR and local
governing agency. Contractor shall be responsible for notification of any affected
properties or other site trades as directed by the local governing agency. In no case
shall notification be less than 48 hours in advance of shut down, nor shall the shut
down extend beyond 8 hours.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for continuous provision of irrigation water
maintaining all existing or new plant material on Project in a healthy condition during
term of this project.
D. Contractor shall maintain Project work area in a safe condition, and provide flagging, taping,
barricades, trench covering, shoring and or fencing necessary to maintain safety.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum pressure and minimum flow required:
1. Irrigation CD's expect that the POC has available a minimum static pressure and a
minimum flow capable to safely and efficiently operate irrigation system as designed,
minimum design requirements are listed in plan notes.
2. Contractor shall perform static/working pressure and volume test within 48 hours of
commencement of work, and provide written results to OAR.
B. Responsibility for coverage:
1. Irrigation system basic design intent shall be to provide 100% coverage of sprinklers
(also known as double coverage or head-to-head coverage.)
2. Contractor shall have authority to make minor adjustments to actual placement of
sprinkler heads or irrigation components vs. locations shown on plan, in order to best
achieve full coverage indicated above, without significant overspray on hardscapes,
buildings or other project features.
3. Contractor shall notify OAR in writing of: potential discrepancies or weaknesses due
to field conditions in implementing irrigation CD's.
C. Layout of Components
1. During layout and staking, consult with OAR to verify proper placement of major
irrigation components.
2. Contractor shall not proceed with implementation of CD's without OAR's approval.
3. Contractor shall have authority to make minor adjustments to pipe routing or
equipment locations due to conflicts with site utilities or other obstructions.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Contractor shall contact local utility locator service at least 48 hours prior to commencement
of work on the Project, and as often as needed during progress of the Project to maintain
Project safety and protection of site utilities.
B. Contractor shall familiarize himself with site utilities and hazards prior to commencement of
work.
32-84-00 Page 3 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. Line Valve: A manual valve located on the main line that when shut off, restricts flow in the
main line. More than one line valve must be shut off to isolate a section of main line and
corresponding downstream irrigation components.
G. Lateral Line Piping: Circuit piping downstream of remote control valve (RCV) providing water
to sprinkler heads, bubblers, or drip components. Under pressure only when RCV activated
and opened.
H. Line Voltage Wiring: Wiring used to convey power to electrically operated equipment on the
Project, such as 120 VAC, 240 VAC, or 480 3PH VAC.
I. Low Voltage Wiring: Wiring used to convey power to irrigation system components, such as
RCV's, master valve, flow meter, decoders, etc. An example would be: 14 AWG PE UL RCV
control wire.
J. Main Line Piping: Piping downstream of Point of Connection (POC). Provides water to RCV's,
Quick Couplers, and hose bibs. Normally under constant pressure.
K. OAR: Acronym for Owner's Approved Representative. This individual designated by Owner
who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Owner. This individual is authorized by
the Owner to direct actions of the Contractor. This individual shall have detailed involvement
in the project and be on Project site at regular intervals.
L. POC: Acronym for Point of Connection. The physical location of the water source for this
Project, and the actual components installed connecting to the water source. May require
Contractor to provide additional saddles, valves, nipples, fittings, spools etc. to provide water
to the Project.
M. RCV: Acronym for Remote Control Valve. An electrically operated 24 VAC valve.
N. Static Pressure: Pressure measured at the POC, with no flow taking place within the system.
0. Water Supply: Potable, and/or Non -Potable, and/or Effluent piping and components,
furnished and installed by trades or contractors other than the irrigation contractor; to
provide irrigation water to this Project upstream of (prior to) the POC.
1.3 ELIGIBILITY TO BID
A. The minimum level of expectation for Experience and Qualifications required to be eligible to
bid the irrigation system on this Project are listed below in this section.
1. See Sections referring to 'Experience, Qualifications and Certifications' for more
information and details.
2. Contractor shall be in compliance with these requirements at the bid date.
B. Contractor shall be prepared to submit documentation supporting their Experience and
Qualifications to the General Contractor and the Owner's Approved Representative, (hereafter
referred to as the OAR) within 48 hours of bid date.
C. Failure to meet the minimum requirements for Experience and Qualifications may result in
elimination of the Contractor's bid or his ability to work on this Project.
D. Failure to provide supporting documents within 48 hours of bid may result in elimination of
the Contractor's bid or his ability to work on this Project.
E. Requirements for documentation of Certifications are also listed below in the same Section.
Contractor shall not be required to submit documentation of Certification at Bid date, but at
date indicated.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall accept Project site in `as -is' condition.
B. Emergency Interruption of water service.
32-84-00 Page 2 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF PROJECT
A. Work to be done on Project shall:
1. Include all labor, materials, equipment, tools and transportation.
2. Perform all operations, in connection with and reasonably incidental to; the complete
installation of the irrigation system.
3. Follow directions as shown on the plan sheets, legend, notes, details, specifications
(the Construction Documents, hereafter referred to as CD's).
B. Items of work specifically included are:
1. Procurement of all applicable licenses and permits.
2. Payment of any fees for connection to water source and power source.
3. Coordination of location of underground utilities, by contacting local services: `Blue
Stakes' or'Call Before You Dig'.
4. Sleeving necessary for irrigation pipe and wire.
5. Provision for and connection of the electrical power supply to the irrigation control
system.
6. Pumping plant (if required) for irrigation system.
7. Filtration plant (if required) for irrigation system.
8. One year warranty of all irrigation components and all labor required to install.
9. 90 day maintenance period of irrigation system and components.
C. All disturbed areas shall receive irrigation unless specifically indicated on CD's.
D. Revise, repair, and/or restore existing irrigation system to continue operation of existing
components and to accommodate new construction. All plant material on the Project shall be
irrigated unless specifically indicated on CD's.
E. Contractor shall note that location or routing of irrigation components on CD's is
approximate. Piping, sleeving and/or other components may be shown schematically on CD's
for visual clarity and to demonstrate component groupings and separations. All irrigation
components shall be placed in landscaped areas, with the exception of pipe and wire in
sleeving under hardscaped areas.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Documents: All documents provided to Contractor for proper installation of
irrigation system; including plan sheets, legend, notes, details, specifications and
supplemental plan issues or addenda. Referred to in this section by the acronym CD's.
B. Contract: For the purposes of the irrigation section of the specification, (Section 32 84 00)
this term refers to the Contract, Sub -Contract, or portion of the Contract dealing only with
the irrigation system.
C. Contractor: For the purposes of the irrigation section of the specification this term refers to
the specific contractor or sub -contractor responsible for installation of the irrigation system
for this project.
D. GPM: Acronym for Gallons per Minute.
E. Isolation Valve: A manual valve located on the main line that when shut off, will remove
constant pressure to a specific section of the main line and corresponding downstream
irrigation components.
32-84-00 Page 1 of 17
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Compressive Strength
At 28 Days
3,000
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Minimum Sack of
Cement Per Cubic Yard
5.5
5. Consistency: Slump shall be within the range indicated below.
Minimum Maximum
2 inches 4 inches
6. Entrained Air: 4% to 6%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HAND -FORMED CURB
A. Forms shall be either metal or straight -grained finished lumber. They shall be straight, free of warp or
irregularities, and of sufficient strength to resist springing or departure from true alignment and grade.
Forms shall be full depth, securely staked, and braced with headers and clamps. Contact surfaces of
forms shall be clean and oiled to prevent adherence of materials and damage during form removal.
B. The base and forms shall be thoroughly moist but not muddy, soft, or showing pools of water when the
concrete is placed. Concrete shall be placed in the forms in uniform layers not to exceed 6 inch loose
depth. Each layer shall be thoroughly consolidated to assure uniform, maximum density, and a smooth
surface next to the forms.
C. As soon as concrete has set sufficiently to retain its shape, forms shall be removed and honeycombed or
rough surfaces shall be immediately corrected by use of 1:2 mortar. The concrete shall be floated with a
wooden float to remove form marks and other irregularities.
3.02 FINISHING
A. Concrete shall be worked until the coarse aggregate is exposed. The surface shall then be floated with a
wooden float to a smooth and uniform surface. When the concrete in the curb and gutter has hardened
sufficiently, the surface shall be given a broom finish. The strokes shall be square across the curb and
gutter from edge, with adjacent strokes overlapped. Strokes shall be made without tearing the concrete.
The broomed finish shall produce regular corrugations not over 1/8 -inch in depth.
3.03 CURING
A. Any of the following curing methods may be used. Surfaces to receive coatings shall be water cured if
liquid curing compound is incompatible.
1. Moist Curing: Cover with burlap, mats or 1 -inch sand. Completely cover surface, lap sheet
materials 3 inches. Thoroughly saturate cover with water and keep wet.
2. Impervious Sheet Curing: Thoroughly wet surfaces with a fine water spray. Completely cover
surfaces with waterproof paper. Lap all edges 4 inches or more and seal with adhesive or tape.
Weight to prevent displacement. Repair or replace if damaged.
3. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: Apply per manufacturer's instruction.
3.04 JOINTING
A. Contraction joints shall be provided at 10 -foot intervals. Where shorter sections are necessary for
closure, the interval maybe less than 10 feet, but no section shall be less than 7 feet. The depth of the
contraction joints shall be 3/4 of an inch.
B. Where hand -formed curbs are used, form a cold joint through the curb section at 10 -foot intervals. Tool
edges of cold joints before concrete hardens.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 321613-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 321613 - CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Construct curb and combined curb and gutter of Portland cement concrete as shown on the drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards:
1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings;"
2. ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting;"
3. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting;"
4. ACI 211 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete;"
5. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete:"
American Concrete Institute (ACI).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Batch certificates for each load of ready -mix delivered to the job site, certifying that batch
conforms to approved proportions.
B. Proposed proportions for mix concrete, including results of tests performed to establish mix designs.
C. Current test results to establish suitability of current aggregate source.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type II
2. Aggregates: ASTM C-33
3. Water: Potable
B. Admixtures
1. Air Entrainment: ASTM C-260
2. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C-494
C. Joint Former: Nonstaining PVC plastic, to be removed without spilling concrete.
D. Curing Materials
1. Impervious Sheet Covering: Polyethylene sheeting - Commercial Standard CS -238, four -mil
minimum thickness, black; polyethylene -coated kraftpaper; waterproof paper - ASTM C-144.
2. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound; ASTM C-309, Type 1. Provide one of the following: Esco's
Tri-Kote No. 18, West chemical's Fil-Por, Hilyard's Cam Seal; use fugitive dye type.
2.02 CONCRETE MIX
A. Ready Mix Concrete: ASTM C-94, Alternate No. 3.
1. Strength: 3,000 psi, compressive strength at 28 days.
2. Aggregate Size: 3/4 -inch maximum.
3. Proportions: ACI 211.
4. Minimum Cement Content: Concrete shall contain at least the quantity of cement shown on the
following table.
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 321613-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint -sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint:
1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in
which joints occur.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace
with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.06 PAVEMENT -JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint -Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement.
1. Joint Location:
a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete pavement.
b. Contraction joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs.
C. Other joints as indicated.
2. Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic -grade.
3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION 321373
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by joint -sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.02 COLD -APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200.
2.03 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and otherjoint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint -
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density
required to control joint -sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant.
2.04 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field
tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint -sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint -sealant manufacturers written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturers written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Joint -Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install joint -sealant backings of kind indicated to supportjoint sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint -sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent joint -sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold -applied joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 32 1313 "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1/2 -Inch- wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Pavement -Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint -sealant formulation.
4. Joint -sealant color.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373-1
Blank Page
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions
and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -day and 28 -day tests.
C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate
slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by
Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the
requirements of this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete
bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When
construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains
and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete
paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
E. During the progress and upon completion of this work, surplus and waste materials resulting from
the operations, including disused implements of service employed therein, shall be the work of this
section is concerned, shall be left in a neat, clean and acceptable condition.
F. Safety: Suitable barricades, lights, signs, flashers, and other safety devices for preventing injury or
damage to traffic or individuals shall be furnished by the Contractor. All these devices shall be
approved by BYU Idaho, but this approval shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for their
adequacy or for conducting a completely safe operation.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-9
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to
uniform granular texture.
1. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float -finished concrete
surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture.
3.08 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection.
C. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before
and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturer's
instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound,
or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following
materials:
a. Water.
b. Two inches of sand kept continuously wet.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Remove no forms during curing period unless protection as specified is applied to surfaces
from which forms are removed.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests,
and submit test reports during concrete placement as follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C
94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive- strength
test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests
will be required when concrete consistency changes.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive- strength
test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air- entrained concrete.
C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of
compressive -strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive -strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required.
e. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each
concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and
retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete,
conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five
are used.
3. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured
cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing
the in-place concrete.
4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual
strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class,
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-8
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place
concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not
add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site.
not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or
drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.
G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal
vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -
faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating
reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required
depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position.
Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being
covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect.
I. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
J. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface
plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
K. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit
revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs
and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed
concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.
L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength.
M. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water
and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F
and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents orchemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
N. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot -weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of
placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided
water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient
air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.07 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. Match finishes with
adjoining existing pavement where applicable. Verify finishes required with campus standards.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats, or
by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot -long straightedge placed anywhere on the
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-7
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
I. Support bar reinforcing for concrete laid on earth in its proper position by means of short lengths
of bars driven into earth at frequent intervals as directed, with reinforcing securely wired thereto.
J. Run steel reinforcing bars continuous through cold joints. Provide dowels required to receive and
engage subsequent work of sufficient length to develop strength of the bar and to securely set into
forms prior to placing concrete. Provide dowels at construction joints, places where steps, etc., join
concrete walls and where slabs are poured onto walls. Use dowels at 24 inches center to center to
connect and prevent vertical separation of old walks from new walks.
3.05 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete with no pointed corners at joints. Construct transverse
joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips wher indicated. Doweled Joints: Install slip dowel bars
and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel
length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3. Provide construction joints so that there is no more than no more than 7 feet between
construction joints or between construction joint and expansion joint.
C. Isolation (Expansion) Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than '/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint
sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -
filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of
joint.
7. Provide expansion joints so that there is no more than 50 feet between expansion or
contraction joints.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows (match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement if applicable):
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge
of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.Sawed Joints: Form
contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades.
Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. Doweled Contraction Joints:
Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat
one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an
edging tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement,
and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do
not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-6
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to
receive paving.
C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected
and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.03 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so
forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
D. When directed by the Owner's Representative, remove defective concrete from the site and be
replaced with concrete that complies with specifications. Concrete Work shall be deemed defective and
may be rejected for any one of the following reasons:
1. Concrete work is not formed as indicated.
2. Concrete work is not pitched to drain as indicated.
3. Concrete work is not true to the intended alignment.
4. Concrete work is not plumb or level where so intended.
5. Concrete work is not true to the intended grades and levels.
6. Concrete work has voids or rock pockets that have not been filled.
7. Concrete work has sawdust, wood or debris embedded in voids or rock pockets.
8. Concrete work does not fully conform to the provisions of the specifications.
E. Formwork Tolerances: Install formwork at interior segments of curved sidewalk with plus or minus 2
inches tolerance.
3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement. Verify reinforcement required with applicable civil and structural drawings.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
E. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy -coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy -coated reinforcement.
Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/1)3963M.
F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of
distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before
placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch overlap of adjacent mats.
G. Minimum clear distance between any bar and the form shall be as follows:
1. Weather side of exterior wall: 2 inches.
2. Wall surfaces not exposed to weather: 1 inch.
3. Concrete beams and columns: 1 1/2 inch.
4. Slabs: 3/4 inch.
5. Above bottoms of footings: 3 inches.
Do not make splices at points of maximum stress and, where made, lap splices 40 diameters unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings or otherwise required to develop strength of bars. Stagger lap
splices.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-5
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
a. Acuricon - Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Company, Newark, N.J.
b. Ashford Formula - Curecrete Chemical Company, Orem, UT.
C. Cenco Seal 301 - Century Concrete Chem, Orem, UT.
d. SandSoil - Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. B. All sealer shall be applied
strictly according to manufacturer's directions.
2.06 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: Sealtight by W.R. Meadows Inc., or Architect prior to bid
approved equivalent..
B. Joint Filler Manufacturer:
1. Burkey-Keyed Kocd Joint by the Burke Co., San Mateo, CA.
2. Keyed Kold Joint by Keyhold, Inc. Belmont, CA
3. Equivalent, approved by Architect prior to bidding.
2.07 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal -weight
concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
1. The BYU Idaho standard concrete mix design filed with the local concrete companies shall be
used for all work. BYU Idaho mix design number is 192 -RC class 40 F. All concrete shall be
ordered by the contractor.
2. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture
designs for the trial batch method. Do not use the Owner's field quality -control testing agency.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at
Point of Placement: 0.45.Slump Limit: 3 inches with 5 inches maximum.
C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal -weight concrete
at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 6-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent unless recommended otherwise by
manufacturer.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability and
when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
2. Use lithium compound admixture to produces concrete mix with linear expansion at 14 days not
exceeding 0.10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1567.
E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland
cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows:
1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent maximum.
F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.
2.08 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM
C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the
Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-
1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time
to 60 minutes.
2. Mixing time should be a minimum of 1 minute. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional
yard of concrete or fraction thereof in excess of one cubic yard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-4
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
F. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
H. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain steel
bars.
I. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive
strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not
support chair legs.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials matching materials used for existing
campus paving and of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/11. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B. Test aggregate for the mix for expansion in accordance with AASHTO T 303.
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded.
D. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar pavement applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and
cementitious materials.
1. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete
of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable
to Owner's Representative.
2. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: #26.
3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures.
1. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260
a. Protex AES.
G. Sand: ASTM C33, Walters MA -22.
H. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
a. Procrete N.
2.A. The proposed aggregate for the mix shall be tested for expansion and Alkali -Silica Reaction (ASR)
in accordance with AASHTO T 303. Where testing indicates aggregates are reactive, the
contractor shall use fly ash admixture to produce a concrete mix that successfully mitigates ASR.
Contractor shall provide test results of successful mitigation using ASTM C 1567, with results
showing a linear expansion at 14 days not exceeding 0.10 percent when tested.
B. Fly ash may be used to replace a portion of the Portland cement in the concrete mix. The fly ash
used shall not exceed twenty five percent of the total cement material in the mix. The cement
material in the mix includes both Portland cement and fly ash.
2.05 CURING MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene sheet or water -proof Kraft paper held snug against the surface by weights and sand along
edges; or sprayed -on curing compound of a sodium silicate base.
1. Approved manufacturers:
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-3
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints,
surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build minimum 30 by 30 foot mockup in location as directed by Architect. Include expansion
and control joints in mockup.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed pavement.
5. Demolish and remove mockups that do not meet Architect's requirements from the site.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Section 01 3100 "Project Coordination" and the following:
1. Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives of authorities having
jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned
entities to review requirements. Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.02 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Face forms for exposed concrete wall surfaces with smooth tempered masonite or
plastic coated forms of as large a dimension as possible as approved by the Owner's Representative.
Elsewhere, construct forms of plywood or approved patented form boards with plywood facings having
as large a unit dimension as possible. Use 2 by 4 inch nominal size SIE dimension stock studs for wall
forms, spaced not farther apart than sixteen inches on center. Drive board up tight and secure each
board to each support with not less than two 6d box nails. Solidly back plywood to preclude buckling and
bulging between supports. Forms for concrete slabs on grade may be two-inch thick material of
sufficient width to avoid exposure of rough concrete, in finished work. Use flexible or curved forms for
curves of a 100 foot or less radius.
B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form -release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces
and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
B. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
D. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed
bars.
E. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars; assembled
with clips.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-2
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Curbs and gutters.
2. Walkways.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for planter walls, retaining walls, planter slabs,
footings and foundations, general applications of concrete.
2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast -furnace slag.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies
with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
7. Joint fillers.
E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved by the Owner to install concrete paving.
Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has a minimum of 5 years'
experience specializing in installing concrete paving similar to that required for this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with
ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
CONCRETE PAVING 321313-1
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each
concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
7. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens
at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28
dais.
b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -
strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location
of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions
and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests.
11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not
been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as
directed by Architect.
13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the
Contract Documents.
D. Measure slab Flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-16
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as slabs, for finish smoothness and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or
completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a proprietary repair underlayment
when acceptable to Architect. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.Repair
defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out
and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose
steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials
and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to
blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top
of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen
cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent
has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
G. Where parging may be required, alignment, color and texture must match adjacent concrete and be
approved by the Architect.
H. Architectural Concrete: Use special care repairing concrete exposed to view. Comply with the following:
1. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of architectural concrete from damage; use guards and
barricades.
2. Protect architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of
construction period.
3. Clean architectural concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings, dust, and
debris.
4. Wash and rinse architectural concrete surfaces according to concrete finish applicator's written
recommendations. Protect other Work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
5. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast -in-place
architectural concrete finishes.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall
be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture
exceeding 1 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-15
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following
materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water -fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and
sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
C. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a
curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project.
3. Begin curing operations immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures, mechanical injury or vandalism.
Stain Prevention: Use special care to prevent petroleum and other stains from forming on concrete
surfaces. Comply with at least the following:
1. Diaper all hydraulic powered equipment to avoid staining of concrete.
2. Do not allow vehicles to park on the interior slabs if avoidable. If vehicles are necessary to
complete scope of work, place drop cloths below vehicles at all times.
3. Do not use pipe cutting machines on interior floor slabs.
4. Avoid rust staining. Do not allow steel to be placed on interior slab.
3.13 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months unless otherwise approved by Architect
to meet schedule requirements. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint
clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cutjoints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill
joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-
half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry -pack mortar
or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.\
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/4 inch in
any dimension , and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch
in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with
water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Fill form tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. No featheredge
will be permitted.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portend cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area
at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-14
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
M. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to
total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed 1/4 -inch in height on
formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins
and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering
material applied directly to concrete such as waterproofing, painting, or another similar system.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -
driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and
uniform in texture and appearance. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as
trowel is moved over surface. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied
coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied waterproofing.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked
surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F
C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.
1. Immediately after Float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before
application.
3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x In before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing
forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including
floors and slabs, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-13
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building
Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Do not allow time between charging of materials in the mixing drum and placement on site to exceed 90
minutes (60 minutes for air -entrained concrete), less for higher temperatures.
F. Use conveying equipment that conforms to ASTM C 94.
G. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable.
H. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301 and the following. Account for all water added to the concrete mix.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture.
2. Do not add any water to ready -mix concrete drum unless the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Water is added only while the concrete is mixing in the drum.
b. Mixing truck is equipped with a revolution counter and a working water meter.
C. Delivery ticket provides all information required in this Section so that the total amount of
water added to the mix can be determined.
d. Provide slurry test and compression tests for all concrete after water is added at site.
I. Bear footings 6 inches into sound bedrock. Refer to Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for appropriate
definition of bedrock for this Project. Dowel continuous and spot footings, columns and piers into bedrock
using Super Por -Rock with reinforcing as directed by Structural Engineer.
1. Lean -Mix Concrete Fill: Bear footings on bedrock as defined above or on lean -mix concrete fill,
which bears 6 inches into bedrock. Lean -mix concrete may be placed across the clean base of the
footing excavations for a leveling course.
J. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth no deeper than 24 inches and to not exceed
formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. Internal
vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to
consolidate the concrete effectively.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each
insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to
segregate.
4. If a section cannot be placed continuously, locate construction joints as approved a maximum of 30
foot on center.
5. Do not allow concrete to free fall over 4 feet.
6. Deposit concrete as near as possible to its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
7. Clean and dampen hardened concrete surfaces to receive fresh concrete.
K. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly, 1/8 -inch per foot minimum, to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane,
before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
L. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive
days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by
ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials, or on frozen concrete surfaces.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-12
BYU Idaho Science & Technology Building Conformed Set I November 7, 2014
E. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating
according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy -coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy -coated steel
reinforcement.
3.08 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements
of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and
at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one fourth of concrete
thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of
joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to
conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). Show on
shop drawings for architect's approval.
4. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished
concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are
indicated.
3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt
coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.09 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. If concrete of a concrete delivery truck is rejected for any reason, do not allow truck on-site for a
minimum of 12 hours after moment of rejection.
B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
C. Preparation of Subgrade for Slabs on Grade: Keep subgrade moist but do not allow standing water, mud
or soft spots. If temperature where concrete is to be placed is below 50EF, enclose and heat to maintain
temperature above 50EF long enough to remove frost from Subgrade.
D. Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete,' and as
specified.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321300-11